Best Practice Guide For Environmental Protection On Construction Sites

Best Practice Guide
for Environmental Protection

on Construction Sites
2013
The Hong Kong Construction Association, Limited

3/F, 180-182 Hennessy Road, Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2572 4414
Fax: 2572 7104
www.hkca.com.hk
Hong Kong Construction Association
Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on

Construction Sites
Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on Construction Sites

Table of Contents
May 2013
ii
Disclaimer
The materials contained in this Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection on Construction Sites
(hereunder Best Practice Guide) have been developed to provide guidance to interested parties, including
contractors and subcontractors, in managing environmental protection issues on sites. Every due care has
been exercised taking into account the circumstances of local working environment and requirements of the
laws of Hong Kong. Any advice or comment in this Best Practice Guide is given in this general context and
should not be relied upon as a substitute for legal or other professional advice.
This document is produced to provide practical guidance on managing environmental protection issues on
construction sites and to meet legal obligations. There is no intention whatsoever to offer exhaustive
guidance and interpretation of the environmental legislations and regulations of Hong Kong. Anyone wishing
to affirm the legal position of individual facts or situation should refer to the relevant regulations and other
related statutory documents or consult a lawyer.
Taking the advice and good management practice given in this document does not confer any immunity from
legal obligations, both criminal and civil.
Whilst every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information provided in this Best Practice
Guide, the author, HKCA, their agents and the publishers accept no responsibility or liability for any loss or
damage caused, whether occasioned by negligence, misstatement or otherwise arising out of any errors,
omissions or inaccuracies in the materials.
Copyright
The copyright of this document rests with the Hong Kong Construction Association. Reproduction of any of
its contents for commercial purpose is not allowed.
Acknowledgements
The preparation of this document was placed under the stewardship of HKCA Environmental Committee that
gave the consultants direction and steer.
We would like to record our acknowledgments and thanks to the following Best Practice Guide Task Group
Members Ir Ringo Yu (convener)
Mr Eddie Tse
Mr Chris Telford
Mr Tony Yam
Mr Patrick Tang
Preface
HKCA is in support of green construction initiatives and is committed to take
lead in introducing those initiatives to our membership and the industry as a
whole. We are pleased to publish the Best Practice Guide for Environmental
Protection on Construction Sites 2013 (the Guide) to improving the environment.
The Guide was first published in 2002 and updated last in 2009. Given the current trend
of society and the significant new legislation, regulations and non-statutory guidelines/
codes of practice that have been issued lately, we commissioned AECOM Asia Co., Ltd.
to review and update the Guide and the key aspects of the update are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Update of statutory and regulatory requirements and new contractual requirements for government
projects and public housing projects.
Update section of the BEAM from HK-BEAM Society to be in line with the latest version, i.e. BEAM
Plus.
Add a new section for BEAM Plus and LEED credits related to contractors work and good practices,
and provide practical measures and minimum supporting submittal required for achieving each
concerned credits.
Provide hyperlinks to corresponding websites and relevant sections in the Guide
The purpose of the Guide is to provide a handy reference to frontline management teams in managing
certain critical and environmental-prone site issues. By drawing on past cases, good and bad trade practices,
the 2013 Guide aims to provide a framework for those who have direct influence over environmental
performance, with some useful pointers for continuous improvement.
Last, but not least, special thanks are due to the Task Group members of our Environmental Committee to
steer the project and have regular working sessions with AECOM to provide practical advice, insightful
directions and thorough review to various drafts of the book. I hope that this Guide may serve as useful
reference for industry practitioners and thus bring about significant beneficial change on the environmental
performance of the whole industry.
Ir Ringo S M Yu
Chairman of Environmental Committee, HKCA
May 2013

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 1-1
STATUTORY AND NON-STATUTORY ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ........................... 2-1
PROJECT PLANNING ................................................................................................................. 3-1
CONSTRUCTION DUST MANAGEMENT .................................................................................... 4-1
AIR POLLUTION CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 5-1
NOISE IMPACT CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 6-1
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ................................................................................................ 7-1
WASTE MANAGEMENT .............................................................................................................. 8-1
CHEMICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................... 9-1
10
LAND CONTAMINATION .......................................................................................................... 10-1
11
PROTECTION OF ECOLOGICAL RESOURCES ....................................................................... 11-1
12
RESOURCES MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 12-1
13
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT ORDINANCE ....................................................... 13-1
14
IMPLEMENTATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM..................................... 14-1
15
TRAINING RESOURCES AND MATERIALS ............................................................................. 15-1
16
INNOVATIVE ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL ............................................................................ 16-1

Chapter 1 Introduction
Introduction
ENSR
Asia
(HK)
Limited
(ENSR)
was
commissioned by the Hong Kong Construction
Association (HKCA) to carry out the review and
revision works for the Best Practice Guide for
Environment Protection on Construction Sites (the
Guide) which was launched in 2002 and amended
in October 2004.
A desk top study was carried out to review and
update statutory and non-statutory information,
contained in the existing Guide which has changed
as a result of revised or new requirements. The
scope of this version of the Guide has been
expanded to cover wider aspects with respect to
environmental protection and management on
construction sites and to incorporate the latest best
practice.
To improve the readability of the Guide and keep it
up-to-date, hyperlinks to the existing statutory and
non-statutory requirements is provided in the
softcopy version of this revision.
The Guide focuses on the environmental issues
which are often encountered within the construction
industry and the practical mitigation measures to
reduce environmental impacts.
The purpose of the Guide is to provide the reader
with a general understanding of the environmental
pollution control ordinances and other requirements
relevant to construction activities. It gives practical
suggestions to the construction industry to
implement environmental protection measures on
sites to comply with current relevant environmental
requirements in Hong Kong and to promote best
available practice.
1-1

Chapter 2 Statutory and Non-Statutory Environmental Requirements
Table of Contents
STATUTORY AND NON-STATUTORY ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ........................... 2-1

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Sources and Nature ......................................................................................................... 2-1

Environmental Legislations and Regulations .................................................................... 2-2
Liable Person and Maximum Penalties for Offence .......................................................... 2-7
Non-Statutory Requirements ............................................................................................ 2-7
Contractual Requirements.............................................................................................. 2-13
List of Tables
Table 2.1
Strict Liability under Environmental Legislation ................................................................. 2-1
Table 2.1
Strict Liability under Environmental Legislation (Continued) .............................................. 2-2
Table 2.2
Legislation on Construction Site Air Pollution Control ....................................................... 2-2
Table 2.2
Legislation on Construction Site Air Pollution Control (Continued) .................................... 2-3
Table 2.3
Legislation on Construction Site Noise Control ................................................................. 2-4
Table 2.4
Legislation on Construction Site Waste Management ....................................................... 2-5
Table 2.4
Legislation on Construction Site Waste Management (continued) ..................................... 2-6
Table 2.5
Legislation on Construction Site Water Quality Management ............................................ 2-6
Table 2.6
Practice Note for Registered Contractors Related to Construction Site ............................. 2-8
Table 2.7
Practice Note for Professional Persons Related to Construction Site ................................ 2-8
Table 2.9
BEAM Plus Credits Related to Foundation and/or Superstructure Contractors during

Construction Stage ........................................................................................................ 2-12
Table 2.10
Compliance Path to meet both LEED and BEAM Plus requirement ....................................18
Table 2.11
Summary of BEAM Plus Prerequisites and Credits for Contractor.......................................22
List of Appendices
Appendix 2.1
Penalties of Relevant Environmental Legislations............................................................ A18

Statutory and Non-Statutory

Environmental Requirements
2.1
Sources and Nature
The legislation listed in this Section is that in effect

as of March 2008. For the current version, please
refer to the web-based database of Hong Kong
legislation.
Readers may also refer to the EPDs webpage for
the updated information on the environmental laws
currently in force.
2.1.1 The Legal Source of Law

The legal source of law refers to law presently
available to a judge when deciding a case. There
are 4 main sources:
The Basic Law
Legislation: Ordinances in Hong Kong and
those Acts of Parliament in the United Kingdom
which are still in force after 30th June 1997
Case Law: Both the United Kingdom and Hong
Kong rules of common law and equity
embodied in decided cases
Chinese Law and Custom
Table 2.1
In addition, after 1997, common law and rules of

equity are still applied in Hong Kong because of
Article 8 of the Basic Law (and also section 7 of the
Hong Kong Reunification Ordinance which is a
similar provision) which adopts the common law
and rules of equity except for any contravening the
Basic Law. In other words, cases, where applicable,
judged by court in the past would be used as a
reference to make judgement for similar cases.
Any person who breaches the environmental
legislation requirement(s) is subject to criminal
liabilities.
2.1.2 Strict Liability Offences
Criminal prosecution is normally subject to two
simultaneous elements: Mens Rea (i.e. guilty mind)
and Actus Reus (i.e. guilty act). However, in some
circumstances, the party who make the prosecution,
e.g. HKSAR, Secretary of Justice, etc., is not
required to prove that the acts or omissions in
question were accompanied by an intention,
knowledge or negligence. Table 2.1 summarises
the situation as described in the ordinance.
Strict Liability under Environmental Legislation
Ordinance
Description
Summary
Air Pollution
Control
Ordinance, Cap
311 Section 48
In any proceedings for an offence under this Ordinance relating to the

emission of an air pollutant it shall be a defence to prove the contravention
complained of was:
a) Solely due to the lighting up of a relevant plant which was cold and that
the best practicable means had been taken to prevent or minimise the
emission of the air pollutant; or
b) Solely due to some failure of a chimney or relevant plant or of an
apparatus used in connection with a chimney or relevant plant and thati) The failure could not have reasonably been foreseen, or if foreseen, could
not reasonably have been provided against;
ii) The contravention could not reasonably have been prevented by action
taken after the failure occurred; and
iii) As soon as was reasonably practicable after the occurrence of the failure
the EPD was informed thereof in writing.
Statutory defence:
Due diligence
Waste Disposal
Ordinance, Cap
354 Section 31
In any proceedings for an offence under section 11, 15, 15A, 15AA, 16, 16A,
17, 18A, 20E or 23 it shall not be necessary for the prosecution to prove that
the acts or omissions in question were accompanied by an intention,
knowledge or negligence on the part of the defendant as to any element of
the offence.
No need of mens
rea, actus reus
suffice
2-1

Table 2.1
Strict Liability under Environmental Legislation (Continued)
Ordinance
Description
Water Pollution
Control
Ordinance, Cap
358 Section 10
In any proceedings for an offence under section 8(1), 8(1A), 8(2), 9(1) or 9(2)
in which it is alleged that the defendant caused matter to enter the waters of
Hong Kong or inland waters or a communal sewer or communal drain or
caused matter to be deposited as provided in section 2(3) it shall not be
necessary for the prosecution to prove that the acts or omissions in question
were accompanied by any intention, knowledge or negligence on the part of
the defendant as to any element of the offence.
2.2
Environmental Legislation and

Regulations
There are eight major environmental ordinances in

Hong Kong, these are:
Air Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap 311);
Noise Control Ordinance (Cap. 400);
Waste Disposal Ordinance (Cap. 354);
Water Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 358);
Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance (Cap. 403);
Dumping at Sea Ordinance (Cap. 466);
Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance
(Cap. 499); and
Hazardous Chemicals Control Ordinance (Cap.
595).
Summary
No need of mens
rea, actus reus
suffice
construction work.
Regarding construction
activities,
the
ordinance mainly
concerns
construction dust or black smoke emissions as well
as specified processes such as operating a
concrete batching plant.
Abatement notices are usually issued to anyone
causing air pollution from a process or machinery
and they will be asked to reduce or stop their
emissions. Polluters failing to comply with the
notice will face prosecution.
The ordinance is the principle law for managing air
quality. Table 2.2 shows the relevant control
legislation related to construction site air pollution.
2.2.1 Air Pollution Control Ordinance (APCO)

This ordinance empowers the EPD to control air
pollution from industry, commercial operations and
Table 2.2
Legislation on Construction Site Air Pollution Control

Legislation
Description of Control
Air Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 311) 1983
Provides for the control of air pollution from stationary

sources and motor vehicles. Also enables promulgation
of regulations (as below).
Air Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 311), Part VIII,

S.51-S.68
Provides for the control of environmental asbestos.
Air Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 311), Part IX, S.69S.80
Provides for the control of Asbestos Work.
Air Pollution Control (Air Control Zones) (Declaration)

(Consolidation) Order 1993
Provides for consolidated declaration of Air Control

Zones.
2-2

Table 2.2
Legislation on Construction Site Air Pollution Control (Continued)

Legislation
Air Pollution Control (Appeal Board) Regulations 1983
Stipulates the procedures and run down of an appeal.
Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust) Regulation 1997
Requires contractors to take dust reduction measures

when construction work is being carried out.
Notification to EPD about the commencement of notifable
construction work.
Air Pollution Control (Open Burning) Regulation 1996
Prohibits open burning of construction waste, tyres and

cables for metal salvage, and controls other open burning
activities by permit system.
Air Pollution Control (Smoke) Regulation 1983
Restricts emission of dark smoke from stationary

combustion sources.
Air Pollution Control (Specified Processes) Regulations

1987
Provides the administrative framework for the licensing of

Specified Processes.
Air Pollution Control (Asbestos) (Administration)

Regulation 1996
Provides for the qualifications and fees for registration of

asbestos consultants, contractors, supervisors and
laboratories.
Air Pollution Control (Volatile Organic Compounds)

Regulation 2007
Provides for the control of VOC emissions from paints,

consumer products, printing inks, adhesives and
sealants. Products are required to display their VOC
content. Maximum VOC limits of regulated products
have been fully implemented in stages, together with
other requirements such as annual reporting of their
sales data.
Air Pollution Control (Fuel Restriction) Regulation
Regulates the use of Ultra Low Sulphur Diesel.
Building (Demolition Works) Regulations (Cap. 123) 1962
Regulates building demolition, including prevention of

nuisance.
Shipping and Port Control Ordinance (Cap. 313) 1978
Regulates and controls ports, vessels and navigation,

including control of smoke emissions.
2.2.2 Noise Control Ordinance

This ordinance controls construction noise, noise
from commercial and industrial premises,
neighbourhood noise and noise from newly
registered motor vehicles as well as intruder alarms.
Generally, a place in Hong Kong is categorized as
either a designated area or non-designated area,
based on the degree of potential impact to the
surroundings. More stringent control is applied to
the designated areas.
The uses of Powered Mechanical Equipment (PME)

in construction site are not allowed between 7pm
and 7am or at any time on a general holiday, unless
prior approval has been granted by the EPD
through the Construction Noise Permit (CNP)
system. The use of certain PME is also subject to
restrictions. These PME are hand-held percussive
breakers and air compressors, the noise levels of
which must comply with the noise emissions
standards and a noise emission label shall be
obtained from the EPD.
2-3

Percussive pile driving is allowed on weekdays only

with prior approval, in the form of a CNP from the
EPD.
between 7pm and 7am or at any time on a general

holiday, unless prior approval by the EPD via CNP.
Table 2.3 shows the relevant legislation for
controlling noise from construction site activities.
Certain noisy works (i.e. prescribed construction

works) within designated areas are not allowed
Table 2.3
Legislation on Construction Site Noise Control
Noise Control
General
Legislation
Noise Control (Amendment) Ordinance (cap. 400)

2004
The management of body corporate

personally liable for repeated offences.
Noise Control Ordinance (cap. 400) 1988
Control construction noise from:

a) The use of PME; and
b) The carrying out of certain noisy works
(i.e. prescribed construction works) in
designated areas, between 7pm and
7am and any time on general holidays,
by CNP.
Director of Environmental Protection (DEP)
issues permit in accordance with two
relevant statutory Technical Memoranda.
The Designated Areas are amended under
the notice. This comes into operation on 1
January 2009.
Noise Control (General) Regulations 1989

General
Construction
Work
Noise Control (Construction Work) Regulation 1996
Noise Control (Construction Work Designated

Areas) Notice 2008
Noise Control Ordinance (Cap. 400) 1998
Noise Control (General) Regulations 1989

Percussive
Piling
Prohibits percussive piling between 7pm

and 7am and any time on general holidays
and restricts the working hours of
percussive piling at other times by CNP.
DEP issues permit in accordance with a
relevant statutory Technical Memorandum.
Noise Control (Appeal Board) Regulations 1989
Noise Control (Amendment) Ordinance 1997
Noise Control Ordinance (Cap. 400) 1998
Noisy Products
Noise Control (Hand Held Percussive Breakers)

Regulations 1991
Controls the import, manufacture, supply

and use of hand held percussive breakers
(with mass of above 10kg) and portable air
compressors (supply air at 500 kPa or
above). The noise level of such PME shall
comply with a stringent noise emission
standard and a noise emission label shall
be obtained from the DEP before use.
Noise Control (Air Compressors) Regulation 1991

The PME concerned shall be fitted with a
noise emission label.
2-4

2.2.3 Waste Disposal Ordinance

This ordinance provides a comprehensive
framework for managing waste from the point of
production to the point of final disposal. The
Table 2.4
intention of the legislation is that waste should be

disposed of in an environmentally acceptable manner.
Table 2.4 summarises the relevant legislation relating
to waste and its disposal.
Legislation on Construction Site Waste Management

Legislation
Waste Disposal Ordinance (Cap. 354) 1980
Provides for the licensing of collection services and disposal

facilities for all types of waste, the control scheme on handling
and disposal of chemical waste, the control on illegal dumping of
waste, the control on import and export of waste, the
Construction Waste Charge Scheme and etc..
Waste Disposal (Amendment) Ordinance 1991
Provides for control of chemical waste with respect to packaging,

labelling, storage, collection, disposal, import and export
activities.
Waste Disposal (Amendment) Ordinance 1997
Expands the regulation making powers for implementation of the

various waste disposal charging schemes and repeals section 28
which inconsistent with the Hong Kong Bill of Rights Ordinance
(Cap. 383).
Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste) (General)

Regulation 1992
Provides for control of all aspects of chemical waste disposal,

including packaging, labelling, storage, collection, transport,
treatment and final disposal.
Waste Disposal (Permits, Authorisations and

Licences) (Fees) Regulation 1992
Prescribes the fees for application of licences for waste

collection and disposal, and the permits for import and export of
waste.
Waste Disposal (Appeal Board) Regulation 1992
Provides for the setting up of an appeal mechanism against

decisions made under the WDO.
Waste Disposal (Charges for Disposal of

Chemical Waste) Regulation 1995
Requires payment of charges for disposal of chemical waste at

the Chemical Waste Treatment Centre thus creating an
economic incentive towards waste minimisation.
Waste Disposal (Designated Waste Disposal

Facility) Regulation 1997
Provides for maintenance of orderly conduct within sites used for

waste disposal activities; measures to counteract the evasion of
charges payable in connection with the provision of waste
disposal services at such sites; and proof of matters in
proceedings before court in relation to the provision of waste
disposal activities at such sites.
Waste Disposal (Charges for Disposal of

Construction Waste) Regulation 2004
Provides for charging for disposal of construction waste at

designated waste disposal facilities and for enhancing control on
fly-tipping of waste.
Foreshores and Sea Bed (Reclamations)

Ordinance (Cap.127) 1985
Provides for the control of reclamation and use of the foreshore

and seabed.
Public Health and Municipal Services Ordinance

(Cap.132) 1960
Provides for prevention and control of waste. It also provides for

removal of litter or waste from any places.
2-5

Table 2.4
Legislation on Construction Site Waste Management (continued)

Legislation
Land (Miscellaneous Provisions) Ordinance (Cap.

28) 1972
Provides for control on dumping of public fill.
Dumping at Sea Ordinance (Cap. 466) 1997
Provides for control on disposal of and dumping of substance

and articles in the sea and under the sea-bed, and for connected
purposes.
2.2.4 Water Pollution Control Ordinance

This ordinance and its subsidiary legislation allow
the government to declare Hong Kong waters into
ten water control zones (WCZs).
Control of
discharges in these zones to achieve and maintain
water quality objectives are exercised mainly
through a licensing system.
All discharges, other than discharge of domestic
sewage to a foul sewer or unpolluted water to a
storm drain, are subject to the licensing control
under the Water Pollution Control Ordinance.
Discharge licence must be obtained from EPD
before any discharge is made. The discharge must
Table 2.5
also comply with the terms and

stipulated in the said licence.
conditions
The licence specifies the permitted physical,

chemical and microbial quality of the effluent and
the general guidelines are that the effluent does not
damage sewers or pollute inland or inshore marine
waters. Details of the effluent standards can be
found in the Technical Memorandum Standards for
Effluents Discharged into Drainage and Sewerage
Systems, Inland and Coastal Waters.
Table 2.5 summarises the relevant legislation in
Water Pollution Control Ordinance.
Legislation on Construction Site Water Quality Management

Legislation
Water Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap. 358)

1980
Provides for the designation of control zones within which

discharges of effluent, other than discharge of domestic sewage
to a foul sewer or unpolluted water to a storm drain, are subject
to the licensing control.
Water Pollution Control (General) Regulations

1986
Give practical effect to the ordinance.
Water Pollution Control (Appeal Board)

Regulations 1985
Set out procedures to be followed in appeals against orders

made or directions given under the ordinance.
Water Pollution Control (Amendment) Ordinance

1993
Requires property owners to connect wastewater to the public

foul sewerage system, ensures that private communal sewage
treatment plants are operated properly and allows the
government to carry out the necessary work on a cost recovery
basis when the government requirements are not upheld.
2.2.5
Public Health and Municipal Services

Ordinance
This ordinance provides for prevention and control
of waste. It also provides for removal of litter or
waste from any location.
2.2.6 Ozone Layer Protection Ordinance

This ordinance controls the production, import and
export of products containing ozone-depleting
substances, and the recycling of ozone-depleting
substances, thereby giving effect to Hong Kongs
international obligations under the 1985 Vienna
Convention and the 1987 Montreal Protocol.
2-6

2.2.7 Dumping at Sea Ordinance

This Ordinance controls the disposal of substances
at sea, and for connected purposes. Marine
dumping should only be considered as the last
resort for the disposal of substances provided no
land-based disposal options are available and the
substances cannot be further reused or recycled.
Materials to be controlled by permit under the
Dumping at Sea Ordinance are mostly large
quantities of sediment arising from dredging works.
More details can be found at EPDs webpage.
2.3
The potential environmental pollutants generated

from a construction site mainly include construction
dust; noise from general construction activities and
powered mechanical equipment; wastewater such
as surface runoff, sewage, cleaning/rinsing water;
construction and demolition material and chemical
waste. Appendix 2.1 summarises the activity or
source, liable person and Penalties with respect to
the relevant legislation.
2.4
2.2.8
Environmental Impact Assessment

Ordinance
The main objectives of the ordinance are to avoid,
minimise and control the adverse impact on the
environment of Designated Projects through the
application of the environmental impact assessment
(EIA) process and the environmental permit (EP)
system.
Designated projects specified under Schedule 2 of
the Ordinance, unless exempted, must follow the
statutory EIA process and require an EP for their
construction, operation or decommission. The EP
will specify the environmental monitoring and audit
requirements if necessary. Please refer to Chapter
13 of this Guide for more details.
2.2.9
Hazardous Chemicals Control

Ordinance
This ordinance regulates, through an activity-based
permit system, the import, export, manufacture and
use of non-pesticide hazardous chemicals that
have potentially harmful or adverse effects on
human health or the environment. Any person
importing, exporting, transhipping, transiting,
manufacturing or using a scheduled chemical under
the ordinance must hold a valid activity-based
permit issued by the EPD. In addition, unless
exempted otherwise, each consignment of
scheduled chemical(s) entering/leaving Hong Kong
must also be covered by a consignment-based
import/export licence issued under the Import and
Export Ordinance (IEO). Such licences are issued
by the EPD under the delegated authorities from
the Director-General of Trade and Industry.
2-7
Liable Person and Maximum

Penalties for an Offence
Non-Statutory Requirements
Non-statutory requirements with respect to

environmental management on construction sites
are published from various sources:
Practice Note for Registered Contractors
(PNRC), issued by Buildings Department (BD)
Practice Note for Professional Persons
(ProPECC), issued by Environmental Protection
Department (EPD)
Technical Circulars (TC), issued by
Development Bureau, ex-Environment,
Transport and Works Bureau (ETWB) and exWorks Bureau (WB)
Building Environmental Assessment Method
(BEAM) from HK-BEAM Society
Recommended Pollution Control Clauses for
Construction Contracts" promulgated by EPD
2.4.1
Practice Note for Registered

Contractors from Buildings Department
The PNRCs related to environmental management
on construction sites are shown in Table 2.6.
2.4.2
Practice Note for Professional Persons

from Environmental Protection
Department
The ProPECC practice notes related to
environmental aspects on construction sites are
shown in Table 2.7.
2.4.3
Technical Circulars from Development

Bureau (formally Environment,
Transport and Works Bureau (ETWB)
and Works Bureau (WB))
The technical circulars related to environmental
aspects on construction sites are shown in Table
2.8.

Table 2.6
Practice Note for Registered Contractors Related to Construction Site

Practice Note
Description of Practice Note
PNRC 15 Asbestos (1996)
Provides guidelines in the design and construction of

buildings that the use of asbestos containing material
(ACM) in new buildings should be avoided and the
removal of ACM from existing buildings should be
handled with caution.
PNRC 17 Control of Environmental Nuisance from

Construction Sites (1997)
Provides checklist for identifying possible environmental

nuisance and practical advice for the Control of such
nuisance from construction sites.
PNRC 21 Tropical Hardwood Timber (1992)
Provides guideline to reduce the amount of tropical

hardwood timber used in building projects.
PNRC 24 Metal Refuse Chutes at Construction Sites

(1994)
Requires using chutes made of other materials of to

reduce the noise level.
PNRC 61 Protection of natural streams/rivers from

adverse impacts arising from construction works (2005)
Requires contractor to carry out construction works in an

environmentally responsible manner and with appropriate
mitigation measures to minimize any adverse impact to
natural streams/rivers.
Table 2.7
Practice Note for Professional Persons Related to Construction Site

Practice Note
Description of Practice Note
PN 1/93 Noise from Construction Activities Statutory
Describes the legislation in force to control noise from

construction activities.
PN 2/93 Noise from Construction Activities - Nonstatutory Controls
Provides to set out the assessment criteria as well as

requirements relating to construction noise not currently
controlled under the Noise Control Ordinance.
PN 1/94 Construction Site Drainage
Provides some basic environmental guidelines for the

handling and disposal of construction site discharges.
PN 1/96 Use of Quiet Construction Equipment for Road

Opening Works during Non-Sociable Hours
Provides guidelines on the application of some commonly

used quiet equipment and techniques for road pavement
works.
PN 2/97 Handling of Asbestos Containing Materials in

Buildings
Provides guidance on the basic precautionary measures

applicable to asbestos abatement work.
2-8

Table 2.8
Technical Circulars from Development Bureau

Technical Circular
Description of Technical Circular
WBTC No. 10/1992 Provision of Refuse Containment

Booms in Reclamation Contracts Involving Public
Dumping
Requires provision of refuse containment booms in

reclamation contracts involving public dumping.
WBTC 02/1993 - Public Dumps
Requires suitable construction waste is placed in public

dumps on reclamation and land formation projects, and
not disposed of in landfills.
WBTC 02/1993B - Public Filling Facilities
Renames public dumping as public filling.
WBTC 16/1996 - Wet Soil in Public Dumps
Avoids the delivery of wet soil to landfills for disposal.
WBTC 04/1997 - Guidelines for Implementing the Policy

on Off-site Ecological Mitigation Measures
Requires that where such a ecological mitigation

measure is required, it would be provided to the extent
that it is practicable, on a like for like basis and within
the boundaries of Hong Kong.
WBTC 04/1998 - Use of Public Fill in Reclamation and

Earth Filling Projects
Requires reclamation or earth filling projects with

imported fill requirements of 300,000 m 3 or more to
consider using public fill for the Works.
WBTC No. 18/1999 Particular Specification Clause for

Vehicles Carrying Dusty Materials
Requires vehicles carrying dusty materials to provide

proper coverage of dusty materials before leaving the
Site.
WBTC 12/2000 - Fill Management
Provides management framework on fill resources,

construction and demolition material (C&DM), and
dredged/excavated sediment disposal.
WBTC No.19/2001 Metallic Site Hoardings and

Signboards
Requires the use of metallic site hoardings and

signboards in order to reduce the amount of timer used
on the construction sites.
WBTC No. 6/2002, (superseded by WBTC No.8/2010)

Enhanced Specification for Site Cleanliness and Tidiness
Enhances cleanliness and tidiness of public works project

sites through modifications on specifications.
WBTC No. 11/2002 Control of Site Crushers
Describes approval procedures for site crushers that may

be installed in the project.
WBTC No. 12/2002 Specifications Facilitating the Use

of Recycled Aggregates
Specifies the use of recycled aggregates in concrete

production, and construction of road sub-base in projects.
ETWB TC(Works) No. 33/2002 Management of

Construction and Demolition Material Including Rock
Introduce specification to enhance the management of

construction and demolition (C&D) material including rock
and to minimize its generation at source in public works
projects.
ETWB TC(W) 34/2002 - Management of

Dredged/Excavated Sediment
Sets out the procedure for seeking approval to

dredge/excavate sediment and the management
framework for marine disposal of such sediment.
2-9

Table 2.8
Technical Circulars from Development Bureau (Continued)

Technical Circular
Description of Technical Circular
ETWB TC(W) 2/2003 (superseded by ETWB TC(W) No.

3/2009 - Regulating Action where a Serious Incident has
or Site Safety or Environmental Offences have occurred
on a Construction Site
Sets out the particular policies and procedures to be

followed when considering taking regulating action
against a contractor where a Serious Incident has or Site
Safety or Environmental Offences have occurred on a
Construction Site.
ETWB TC(W) 22/2003, 22/2003A - Additional Measures

to Improve Site Cleanliness and Control Mosquito
Breeding on Construction Sites
Provides additional measures to improve site cleanliness

and control mosquito breeding on construction sites.
ETWB TC(Works) No.24/2004 Specification Facilitating

the Use of Concrete Paving Units Made of Recycled
Aggregates
Specifies the use of concrete paving units made of

recycled aggregates for road works and construction of
pavements.
ETWB TC(W) 31/2004 (superseded by DEVB TC(W)

6/2010) - Trip Ticket System for Disposal of Construction
& Demolition Materials
Sets out the trip ticket system for public works contracts.
ETWB TC(W) 05/2005 - Protection of natural

streams/rivers from adverse impacts arising from
construction works
Provides an administrative framework to better protect all

natural streams/rivers from the impacts of construction
works.
ETWB TC(Works) No.16/2005 Adoption of Energy

Efficient Features and Renewable Energy Technologies
in Government Projects and Installation
Sets out guidelines and procedures on the adoption of

energy efficient features and renewable energy
technologies in government projects and installations.
ETWB TC(W) 19/2005 - Environmental Management on

Construction Sites
Sets out policy and procedures requiring contractor to

prepare and implement an environmental management
plan in all public works contracts.
DEVB TC(W) 2/2011 - Encouraging the Use of Recycled

and other Green Materials in Public Works Projects
Sets out a comprehensive framework for the

procurement of recycled and other green materials with a
view to promoting their use in public works projects. It
also streamlines the process for recyclers which
manufacture recycled materials to collect construction
and demolition (C&D) materials and introduces a
recyclers list for C&D materials.
DEVB TC(W) 9/2011 - Enhanced Control Measures for

Management of Public Fill
To promulgate the control measures to enhance the

management of public fill, as recommended by Public Fill
Committee.
2-10

2.4.4 BEAM Plus from BEAM Society

BEAM is a green building assessment tool to
assess performance of a building. This scheme
covers the planning, design, demolition and
construction,
commissioning,
management,
operation and maintenance of buildings that
enables buildings to be assessed under a series of
categories in order to gain credits that will
determine the level of attainment achieved. These
levels are Platinum (Excellent), Gold (Very Good),
Silver (Good), and Bronze (Above Average). For full
details of the criteria used in the assessment,
please refer to the BEAM Plus Guideline for New
Buildings which can be downloaded from the
website of BEAM Society.
The various performance aspects covered in BEAM
are grouped within the following 6 categories:
Site Aspects (SA)
This aspect relates to the location and design of the
building, of which the emissions from the site is of
significance to the contractor during construction
stage.
Materials Aspects (MA)
This aspect concerns about the selection, efficient
use, recycling and disposal of construction
materials during construction stage.
Energy Use (EU)
This aspect concerns about the energy use and
energy management of a building. Some sections
are related to the contractor during construction
stage
Water Use (WU)
This aspect concerns about the water conservation
and effluent discharges of a building and is not
related to the contractor during construction stage.
Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ)
This aspect focuses on the safety, hygiene,
ventilation, thermal comfort, lighting, acoustic, and
building amenities of a building and is not related to
the contractor during construction stage.
Innovations and Additions (IA)
This aspect considers the innovative techniques or
performance
enhancements
that
provide
environmental benefit additional to the other
aspects. The innovative construction technique
undertaken by the contractor to improve

environmental performance of a building will also be
considered.
Critical Design Stage Consideration
The critical BEAM requirements related to the
design consideration are outlined below.
BEAM Plus Prerequisites
For each section, BEAM Plus prescribes
prerequisites which MUST be satisfied in order for
the credits within the same category to be counted
towards the awards. Failure of compliance would
result in project disqualification.
Energy Use Analysis
BEAM Plus requires a computational approach to
determining
the
overall
building
energy
performance.
The computer software to be used and
methodology of the energy simulation should make
reference to BEAM Plus Guidebook for New
Building section EU 1.
Water Efficient Features
Water efficient applicants should be selected to
achieve a quantifiable reduction of water
consumption
compared
with
a
baseline
performance, following the assumptions given in
BEAM Plus.
Landscape Design
For residential development having an area of
greater than 1,000m2, greenery features should be
provided equivalent to at least 20% of the site area
in accordance with PNAP-152 calculation method.
Computational Modeling
Computational modeling should be undertaken to
evaluate various building performance including
microclimate, natural lighting, light pollution, natural
ventilation and indoor thermal comfort etc.
Consideration at Construction Stage
The BEAM Plus requirements related to the
foundation and superstructure contractors during
construction stage are outlined in Table 2.9 Most
credits apply to both foundation and superstructure
contractors, while some apply to superstructure
contractor only.
Table 2.9
BEAM Plus Credits Related to Foundation and/or Superstructure Contractors during
Construction Stage
BEAM Plus Credits
Foundation (F)
Superstructure (S)
Site Aspects (SA)

SA 10 Environmental Management Plan
SA 11 Air Pollution During Construction
SA 12 Noise Pollution During Construction
SA 13 Water Pollution During Construction
2-12

BEAM Plus Credits
Foundation (F)
Superstructure (S)
Material Aspects (MA)

MA P1 Timber Used for Temporary Works
MA P2 Use of Non-CFC Based Refrigerants
MA P3 Construction and Demolition Waste
Management Plan
MA 3 Prefabrication
MA 6 Sustainable Forest Product
MA 7 Recycled Materials
MA 8 Ozone Depleting Substances
MA 9 Regionally Manufactured Materials
MA 11 Construction Waste Reduction
Water Use (WU)
WU P1 Water Quality Survey
WU 1 Annual Water Use
Energy Use (EU)
EU 3 Embodied Energy in Building Structural
Elements
EU 10 Testing and Commissioning
EU 11 Operation and Maintenance
IEQ 6 Outdoor Sources of Air Pollution
IEQ 7 Indoor Sources of Air Pollution
IEQ 8 IAQ in Car Parks
SA 10 Environmental
Management Plan
Baseline and impact monitoring should be carried

out in accordance with the EM&A Manual.
Contractor should implement an Environmental

Management Plan (EMP) including provisions for
Environmental Monitoring and Auditing (EM&A).
The EMP should cover activities from demolition to
foundation and superstructure stages.
Failure of EMP implementation from any of
demolition / foundation / superstructure contractors
would result in the loss of credit.
The content of EMP should be referred to Section
3.2.3.
SA 11 Air Pollution During
Construction
Equipment should be calibrated prior to any

measurement
(e.g.
HOKLAS
accredited
laboratories).
Failure of monitoring implementation and/or
compliance with Air Pollution Control Ordinances
(i.e. conviction and/or complaint) from any of
would result in the loss of credit.
For sample of site inspection checklist (dust) please
refer to Appendix 4.1
S
SA 12 Noise Pollution During
Construction
Contractor should apply adequate mitigation

measures for dust and air emissions during the
construction as recommended by the EPD and
demonstrate compliance with the air quality
management guidelines as detailed in the
Environmental Monitoring and Audit Manual
(EM&A).
2-13
Contractor should monitor and implement a control

of noise on site has met the requirements with
reference to the latest best practice guidelines or
practices, in respect of all Noise Sensitive
Receivers as defined in Annex 13 of the Technical
Memorandum under the Environmental Impact
Assessment Ordinance.

Baseline and impact monitoring should be carried

out in accordance with the EM&A Manual.
Equipment should be calibrated prior to any
measurement
(e.g.
HOKLAS
accredited
laboratories).
compliance with Noise Control Ordinances (i.e.
conviction and/or complaint) from any of demolition
/ foundation / superstructure contractors would
result in the loss of credit.
MA P2 Use of Non-CFC Based

Refrigerants
SA 13 Water Pollution During

Construction
Contractor should submit contract documents and

specifications specifying the use of non-CFC based
refrigerants, equipment schedule and equipment
catalogue.
Contractor should undertake measures to reduce

water pollution during construction as made
reference to the latest best practice guidelines or
practices. Wastewater testing should be undertaken
by HOKLAS accredited laboratories which comply
with the Wastewater Discharge License.
compliance
with
Water
Pollution
Control
Ordinances (i.e. conviction and/or complaint) from
any of demolition / foundation / superstructure
contractors would result in the loss of credit.
For sample of site inspection checklist (wastewater)
please refer to Appendix 7.1.

MA P1 Timber Used for
Temporary Works
FSC
MA P3 Construction and
Demolition Waste Management
Plan
This is a prerequisite credit. Failure of compliance

from any of demolition / foundation / superstructure
contractors would result in project disqualification.
Contractor should implement a waste management
system that provides for the sorting, recycling and
proper disposal of waste materials.
Contractor should implement a waste sorting and
recycling, and demonstrate through appropriate
record keeping.
Section 8.6 provides guidance in waste
management and implementation with examples.
F
At least 20% (1 BEAM credit) or 40% (2 BEAM

credits) of BEAM Plus-listed prefabricated building
elements (concrete items only) should be
manufactured off-site.
The manufacturing factory should be located within
800km from the site.
The calculation should accumulate the total weight
or volume of prefabricated building elements used
from
both
foundation
and
superstructure
contractors, which should be consistent in overall.
Equation for prefabrication elements calculation is
illustrated in below:% of prefabrication quantity = (Total unit of qualified
prefabricated elements/Total unit of all listed
elements) x 100%
MA 6
Products
AFPA
This is a prerequisite credit which MUST be

complied. Failure of compliance from any of
would
result
in
project
disqualification.
Contractor
should
ensure
that
no
chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants are
being used in the HVAC&R systems.
MA 3 Prefabrication
This is a prerequisite credit which MUST be

complied. Failure of compliance from any of
would result in project disqualification.
Contractor should ensure that no virgin forest
products will be used for temporary works, unless
exceptional circumstances require such use. Metal
formwork is a recommended alternative for timber.
Wood products from well-managed or sustainable
sources are acceptable for credit compliance, such
as certified by Forest Stewardship Council (FSC),
the American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA),
or other known licensed sources.
For sample of BEAM Plus submission checklist
please refer to Appendix 2.2.1.
Sustainable
Forest
At least 50% of all timber and composite timber

products used in the project are from sustainable
source / recycled timber (FSC, AFPA or other know
licensed sources, reference please refer to MA P1).
2-14

The
unit
of
calculation
should
be
mass/volume/dollar value, which should be
consistent in overall.
Equation for sustainable forest product calculation
is illustrated in below:% of sustainable timber = (Total unit of permanently
timber originated from sustainable sources/ Total
unit of all permanently install timber) x 100%
For sample of BEAM Plus submission please refer
to Appendix 2.2.1
At least 10% of materials used in site exterior

surfacing work, structures and features are recycled
materials. (1 BEAM credit).
At least 10% of materials used for faade and
structural component are recycled materials.
(1 BEAM credit).
At least 10% of materials used for interior nonstructural components are recycled materials.
(1 BEAM credit).
The
unit
of
calculation
should
be
Equation for recycled materials calculation is
illustrated below:% of recycled materials = (Total unit of recycled
materials/ Total unit of all materials) x 100%
Materials which normally consist of recycled
content will not be considered as achievement, for
instance steel and glass.
MA 8 Ozone Depleting
Substances
MA 9 Regionally Manufactured
Materials

credits) of all building materials used in the project
are manufactured locally within 800km from the site.
Mechanical and electrical systems components
should not be included in the calculation.
The
unit
of
calculation
should
be
Equation for regionally manufactured materials
calculation is illustrated below:% of regional materials = (Total unit of regional
manufactured material/ Total unit of all building
materials) x 100%
For sample of BEAM Plus submission please refer
to Appendix 2.2.3
MA 11 Construction Waste
Reduction

credits) of construction waste is recycled.
The excavated waste will not be considered as part
of the construction waste. The disposal of inert
waste to public fill will not be considered as an
acceptable
strategy
for
fulfilling
this
requirement .The unit of calculation should be
weight /volume, which should be consistent in
overall.
ETWB TWC 19/2005 should be used as a guide to
the nature of reporting and recording keeping.
Water Use (WU)
Contractor should submit the equipment schedule

and catalogue of HVAC&R equipment showing the
refrigerants employed.
Contractor should demonstrate by calculation that
the global warming potential and ozone depletion
potential of the refrigerants used in equipment
meets the specified requirement of ASHRAE and
CIBSE. (1 BEAM credit).
Contractor should submit catalogues of insulation
materials or statement from manufacturer
demonstrating that the products are free from CFC
and HCFC (1 BEAM credit).
For sample of Ozone Depletion & Global Warming
Potential calculation please refer to Appendix 2.2.2

Contractor should conduct portable water sampling
and testing after completion of construction.
Water samples shall be taken at all the farthest
point(s) of use in the distribution system from the
storage tank, and shall include sampling for each
water supply tank used in the building.
Water quality at all sample points should meet
with the Water Supplies Department (WSD)
Guidelines under the Quality Water Recognition
Scheme for Buildings.

Contractor should submit water fittings specification
and catalogues.
2-15

Contractor
should
submit
calculation
to
demonstrate the estimated aggregate annual water
use saving to achieve at least 20% (1 BEAM credit),
or 25% (2 BEAM credits), or 30% (3 BEAM credits).
For sample of Annual Water Use saving calculation
Energy Use (EU)
EU 3 Embodied Energy in
Building Structural Elements
Contractor should provide sufficient information of

major building elements (e.g. building quantities) for
design team to undertake a Life Cycle Assessment.
Only building elements and materials used in the
foundation and superstructure are required for
assessment. Building services materials are
excluded for the calculation.
For the sample of building materials input fact sheet
EU 10 Testing and
Commissioning
Contractor
should
provide
commissioning
specification indicating that details testing and
commissioning requirements and cost provisions
for all building services system, equipment and
components.
Contractor should appoint a commissioning
authority and provide a commissioning plan that
embraces all specified commissioning work.
Contractor should provide a detailed T&C report for
all systems, equipment and components that
impact on energy use and indoor environmental
quality.
All the testing and commissioning documents shall
meet the requirements detailed in Section 8.5.18.5.4 in BEAM Plus Guidelines as a minimum
EU 11
Maintenance
Operation
and

IEQ 6 Outdoor Sources of Air
Pollution
Contractor should demonstrate compliance with

IAQ certification scheme Good Class criteria for
Carbon monoxide (CO), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and
Ozone (O3) (1 BEAM credit).
Respirable suspended particulate (RSP) (1 BEAM
credit).
Credit compliance can be achieved by on-site
measurement after completion of construction
For detailed criteria please refer to IAQ Certification
Scheme
IEQ 7 Indoor Sources of Air

Pollution

Volatile organic compounds (VOCs), Formaldehyde
(HCHO) and Radon (Rn) respectively (1 BEAM
credit for each contaminant).
For detailed criteria please refer to IAQ Certification
Scheme
Contractor should demonstrate that the design of

the ventilation system meets or exceeds the
guidelines given in ProPECC PN 2/96, including
provisions for the monitoring and automatic control
of air pollution.
Contractor should provide a fully documented

operations and maintenance manual (1 BEAM
credit).
Contractor should provide fully documented
instructions in an energy management manual that
enable systems to operate at a high level of energy
efficiency (1 BEAM credit).
Contractor should provide training record for
operations and maintenance staff and demonstrate
that adequate maintenance facilities are provide for
operations and maintenance work. The training
program shall cover as a minimum the items listed
in Section 8.5.8 in BEAM Plus Guidelines.
2-16

2.4.5 LEED from USGBC

BEAM Plus is the leading and well-recognized
standard in Hong Kong to assess, improve, certify
and label the environmental performance of
buildings. In addition to BEAM Plus, project may
also apply for US LEED certification, which will
have additional consideration at both design and
construction stages on top of BEAM Plus.
Critical Design Stage Consideration
The critical LEED requirements related to the
design consideration are outlined below.
Prerequisites
The applicant project MUST satisfy all the
prerequisites and qualify for a minimum number of
points to attain the established project ratings.
Failure of compliance would result in project
disqualification.
Energy Use Analysis

LEED requires a comprehensive energy analysis to
determining
the
overall
building
energy
performance. Computational simulation is one of
the common approaches.
The computer software to be used and
methodology of the energy simulation should make
reference to LEED Reference Guide section EAp2
and EA 1.
Water Efficient Features

Water efficient applicants should be selected to
achieve a quantifiable reduction of water
consumption
compared
with
a
baseline
performance, following the assumptions given in
LEED.
Commissioning of Building Energy System

An independent commissioning authority (CxA)
should be employed to verify that the projects
energy-related
systems
are
well-installed,
calibrated and perform according to the owners
project requirements, basis of design and
construction documents.
Critical Construction Stage Consideration
The LEED requirements related to the foundation
and superstructure contractors during construction
stage are outlined in Table 2.10.
2-17

Table 2.10
Compliance Path to meet both LEED and BEAM Plus requirement
BEAM Plus Credits
LEED Credits a
Site Aspects (SA)

SA 10 Environmental
Management Plan
There is no LEED related criteria. Please refer to section 2.4.4 for compliance.
SS P1 Construction Activity Pollution
Prevention
This is a prerequisite credit in LEED which MUST be complied for any rating.
There is no BEAM Plus related criteria.
Create and implement an erosion and sedimentation control plan for all
construction activities associated with the project.

Construction

Construction

Construction

MA P1 Timber Used for
Temporary Works
MA P2 Use of Non-CFC
Based Refrigerants
EA P3 Fundamental Refrigerant
Management
Use non-CFC based refrigerants in HVAC&R systems
Demolition Waste Management
Plan
MR 2 Construction Waste
Management
Develop and implement a construction waste management plan. LEED requires

recycling or salvaging construction waste by at least 50% (1 LEED point) or
75% (2 LEED points). The required percentage of recycle quantities is different
Reduction
from BEAM Plus MA 11 (section 2.4.3).
MA 3 Prefabrication
MA 6 Sustainable Forest
Product
MR 7 Certified Wood
Use at least of 50% of wood-based materials and products that are certified in
accordance with the FSCs principles and criteria, for wood building components.
Stringent LEED criteria beyond BEAM Plus
- Calculation is based on cost only.
- Selection of materials origin is limited to FSC only.
2-18

BEAM Plus Credits

LEED Credits a
MR 4 Recycled Content

Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of postconsumer recycled
content plus 1/2 of the pre-consumer content constitutes at least 10% (1 LEED
point) or 20% (2 LEED points). Calculation is based on cost only.
- For LEED assessment, there is no separated calculation for outside surface
works and structure (MA 7a), building structure (MA7b) and interior components
(MA7c)
- Calculation is based on cost only, and the calculation equation should be
modified from BEAM Plus.
Substances
EA 4 Enhanced Refrigerant
Management

The air-conditioning and refrigeration equipments shall fulfill the following
equation which determines a maximum threshold for the combined contributions
to ozone depletion and global warming potentials:
LCGWP + LCODP 105 100
(Please refer to BEAM Plus Guideline section MA 8 for detailed calculation
definitions)
Materials
MR 5 Regional Materials
At least 10% (1 LEED point) or 20% (2 LEED points) of all building materials and
products that are extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as manufactured
within 500miles (800km) of the project site, based on cost only.
- Regional materials are identified from point of extraction and harvest instead of
manufacture location.
Water Use (WU)

WU P1
WU 1
WE 3 Water Use Reduction
At least 30% (2 LEED credit), or 35% (3 LEED credits), or 40% (4 LEED credits)
of estimated annual saving from the baseline
LEED requires an estimated annual saving of at least 20% as a prerequisite.
Flushing water use reduction from water closets and urinals cannot be included
in the calculation.
2-19

LEED Credits a
BEAM Plus Credits
Energy Use (EU)

EU 10 Testing and
Commissioning
EA P1 Fundamental commissioning
of Building Energy Systems

This is a prerequisite credit in LEED which MUST be complied for any rating.
The Client MUST designate an independent commissioning authority (CxA) to
lead, review and oversee the completion of the testing and commissioning
process activities.
EU 11 Operation and
Maintenance
EA 3 Enhanced Commissioning

The Client MUST designate an independent commissioning authority (CxA) to
lead, review and oversee the completion of the commissioning process activities.

Pollution
Pollution
IEQ 3.2 -Construction Indoor Air Quality

Management PlanBefore
Occupancy
Conduct on-site measurement after completion of construction to demonstrate

compliance of maximum concentration levels for:
Carbon monoxide (BEAM & LEED)
Nitrogen dioxide (BEAM only)
Respirable Suspended Particles, PM10 (BEAM & LEED)
Total volatile organic compounds (BEAM & LEED)
Formaldehyde (BEAM & LEED)
Radon (BEAM only)
4-Phenylcyclohexene (LEED only)

Carbon monoxide (<9 ppbv)
PM10 (<50 g/m3)

3
Total volatile organic compounds (500 g/m )
Formaldehyde (27 ppbv)
2-20

BEAM Plus Credits

LEED Credits a
MR 4 Recycled Content
Use materials with recycled content such that the sum of postconsumer recycled
content plus 1/2 of the pre-consumer content constitutes at least 10% (1 LEED
point) or 20% (2 LEED points). Calculation is based on cost only.
- For LEED assessment, there is no separated calculation for outside surface
works and structure (MA 7a), building structure (MA7b) and interior components
(MA7c)
- Calculation is based on cost only, and the calculation equation should be
modified from BEAM Plus.
Substances
EA 4 Enhanced
Management
Materials
MR 5 Regional Materials
Refrigerant

The air-conditioning and refrigeration equipments shall fulfill the following
equation which determines a maximum threshold for the combined contributions
to ozone depletion and global warming potentials:
LCGWP + LCODP 105 100
(Please refer to BEAM Plus Guideline section MA 8 for detailed calculation
definitions)
At least 10% (1 LEED point) or 20% (2 LEED points) of all building materials and
products that are extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as manufactured
within 500miles (800km) of the project site, based on cost only.
- Regional materials are identified from point of extraction and harvest instead of
manufacture location.
Energy Use (EU)

Remark:
a
LEED addresses the different project development and delivery processes through the different rating systems, such as LEED for New
Construction (NC), LEED for Core & Shell (CS) and LEED for School etc. Credits described in Table 2.4.2 is according to LEED NC criteria in
general.
2-21

2.4.7
Specification
Overview of Housing Authority (HA) BEAM

Plus-related specification for Contractor
This section is applicable to building, piling and
demolition contracts specific to Housing
Authority projects undergoing BEAM Plus
certification. With reference to PRE.B8.2810, the
responsibility of contractor includes the
followings:
Assist Chief Manager to conduct BEAM Plus
assessment for the Works according to the
BEAM Plus for New Buildings;
Meet all the target BEAM Plus prerequisites
and credits listed in PRE.B8.2820 and provide
supporting documents outlined in the
specification;
Assign a BEAM Plus Construction Coordinator
(BC) who is familiar with BEAM Plus
assessment full time on site to coordinate all
relevant works of BEAM Plus assessment.
Table 2.11
Such person can be the Environmental

Supervisor (ES) specified in PRE.B6.130;
A BEAM Plus consultant will be appointed by
HA to monitor the implementation of BEAM
Plus credits and prerequisites. Contractor shall
coordinate with and provide necessary
information to the BEAM Plus consultant to
facilitate the BEAM Plus assessment;
Attend site inspection with the BEAM Assessor
and provide necessary facilities, access and
assistance to the BEAM Assessor to facilitate
the BEAM Plus assessment.
A summary of all relevant BEAM Plus
prerequisites and credits for contractor is given
in Table 2.11. The listed prerequisites and
credits cover both demolition and construction
stages.
Summary of BEAM Plus Prerequisites and Credits for Contractor
BEAM Plus Credits
Clause Reference
Remark
Site Aspects (SA)

SA 10 Environmental Management
Plan
Construction

Construction
PRE.B8.2510
PRE.B8.2560
the
Environmental
PRE.B8.APPEND9
Provide substantiation showing the mitigation

measures have been properly implemented. The
substantiation shall cover the relevant items in
under Air Pollution Control During Construction.
PRE.B8.510
PRE.B8.570
Conduct and report on construction dust monitoring
PRE.B8.APPEND9
Provide substantiation showing the mitigation

measures have been properly implemented. The
substantiation shall cover the relevant items under
Noise Control During Construction.
PRE.B8.890
PRE.B8.899
Construction
Prepare and implement

Management Plan
Conduct and
monitoring
report
on
construction
noise
PRE.B8.APPEND9
Provide substantiation showing the measures have

been properly implemented. The substantiation
shall cover the relevant items under Water
Pollution Control During Construction.
PRE.B8.2410
Conduct and report on discharged water monitoring
PRE.B8.2450
CON2.M080
Use sustainable timber for temporary works during

construction

MA P1 Timber Used for Temporary
Works
2-22

Clause Reference
Remark
MA P2 Use of Non-CFC Based

Refrigerants
PRE.B8.2820
Use no chlorofluorocarbon-based refrigerants in

HVAC&R
Demolition Waste Management Plan
PRE.B8.2520
Prepare and implement the Waste Management

Plan
PRE.B8.APPEND9
Provide substantiation showing the measures for

waste
management
have
been
properly
implemented. The substantiation shall cover the
relevant items under Waste Management.
MA 3 Prefabrication
PRE.B8.2820
Use and demonstrate not less than 40% of the

precast concrete components is fabricated off-site
and the manufacturing factory shall be located
within 800 km from the Site
MA 6 Sustainable Forest Product
PRE.B8.2820
Use timber products including timber doorsets such

that not less than 50% of the timber is originated
from sustainable source
MA 8 Ozone Depleting Substances
PRE.B8.2820
Use zero ozone depleting potential products for

thermal insulation and fire retardant materials in
building fabrics and building services
Materials
PRE.B8.2820
Use and demonstrate not less than 20% of all the

building materials is manufactured locally within
800 km from the Site
MA 10 Demolition Waste
Reduction
PRE.B8.2820
Demonstrate not less than 30% of demolition waste

is recycled. The amount of inert waste disposed to
public fill shall be discounted from the calculation.
Reduction
PRE.B8.2820
Demonstrate not less than 30% of construction

waste is recycled. The excavated waste is not
considered as part of the construction waste. The
amount of inert waste disposed to public fill shall be
discounted from the calculation.
PRE.B8.2820
PLU2.T070
Conduct water quality test specified in PLU2.T070

to demonstrate the quality of potable water meets
the specified drinking water quality standards at all
points of use
PRE.B8.2820
PLU2.M510
Use water efficient devices specified in PLU2.M510

that lead to an annual saving of consumption of
potable water of not less than 20% when calculated
in accordance with the method described in BEAM
Plus
EU 10 Testing and Commissioning
PRE.B8.2820
Commissioning
systems
EU 11 Operation and Maintenance
PRE.B8.2820
Provide operation and maintenance manual and

energy management manual for specified electrical
and mechanical system covering details in
Appendix 8.5 of BEAM Plus for New Buildings
PRE.B8.2820
Measurement of indoor air quality including carbon

monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, ozone and respirable
suspended particulate
BEAM Plus Credits
Water Use (WU)
Energy Use (EU)

of
electrical
and
mechanical

Pollution
2-23

Clause Reference
Remark

Pollution
PRE.B8.2820
Measurement of indoor air quality including volatile

organic compounds, formaldehyde and radon
PRE.B8.2820
Measurement of indoor air quality including carbon

monoxide and nitrogen dioxide
BEAM Plus Credits
2-24

Appendix 2.1: Penalties of Relevant Environmental Legislations

Legislation Related to Air Pollution Control
Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
Second or Subsequent
Offence
First Offence
Air Pollution Control
Ordinance (Cap. 311)
1983
10
Fails to comply with an air pollution abatement

notice given.
A person who
commits the offence
Failing to cease the

operation of a polluting
process as specified in the
air abatement notice:
Fine of $500,000
12 months imprisonment
Further fine of $100,000 for
each day if offence
continues
In any other case:
Fine of $100,000
Failing to cease the

operation of a polluting
process as specified in the
air abatement notice:
Not applicable
In any other case:

Fine of $200,000
Further Fine of $20,000 for
each day if offence
continues
30
Fails to comply with any of the requirements of

a notice.
Any owner who

commits the offence
Fine of $100,000
13
Conducts a Specified Process without a licence.
Any owner who

commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
Fine of $20,000 for each day if offence continues
A2-1
Fine of $200,000
Fine of $20,000 for each
day if offence continues

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First Offence

1983
29
Any person who:

1 Wilfully resists, obstructs or delays any
officer in the exercise of any power
conferred on such officer by or under
section 28;
2

(Construction Dust)
Regulation (Cap.
311R) 1997
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $50,000
Offence
Fails without reasonable excuse to comply

with any requirement duly made by an
officer under section 28;
In compliance or purported compliance with
any such requirement produces any
drawing, record or document which he
knows to be incorrect or inaccurate in a
material respect or does not believe to be
correct or accurate; or
Wilfully or recklessly gives information
which is incorrect in a material respect or
withholds information as to any of the
matters in respect of which information is
required to be given under section 28.
Carry out notifiable work without prior notice to

the Authority.
Any person who

commits the
offence
Fine at Level 4
Fine at Level 5
Carry out notifiable work not in accordance with

the Schedule.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine at Level 5
Fine at Level 6
Fine of $10,000 each day if
offence continues during
the whole or any part of the
works
A2-2

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
Offence
First Offence
(Construction Dust)
Regulation (Cap.
311R) 1997 (cont)
5, 6
Carry out regulatory / excluded work not in

accordance with the Schedule.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine at Level 4
Fine at Level 5
offence continues during
the whole or any part of the
works

(Open Burning)
Regulation (Cap.
311O) 1996
Carry out prohibited open burning activities

such as the disposal of construction waste,
clearance of site for construction work,
disposing tyres and salvage of metal.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine at Level 5
Fine of $500 for every 15
minutes if offence continues
Fine at Level 5
Carry out open burning without permit or in

contravention of permit condition.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine at Level 5
minutes if offence continues
Fine at Level 5
minutes if offence
continues

(Smoke) Regulation
(Cap. 311C) 1983
Emit dark smoke for more than 6 minutes in any

period of 4 hours or for more than 3 minutes
continuously at one time.
An owner of
premises who
operates any
chimney or relevant
plant
Fine of $20,000
Fine of $100 for every one
quarter of an hour during
the whole or any part of
which such offence is
knowingly and wilfully
continues
Fine of $20,000
Fine of $100 for one
quarter of an hour during
the whole or any part of
which such offence
knowingly and wilfully
continues

(Volatile Organic
Compounds)
Regulation (Cap.
311W) 2007
3, 17
Import or manufacture regulated paint that is

listed in Part 2, 3 or 4 of Schedule 1 and has a
volatile organic compound content in excess of
the prescribed limit.
A person who
imports or
manufactures the
regulated paints
Fine of $200,000
17
Knowingly or recklessly displays, gives, reports

or records any information that is misleading,
false or incomplete in a material particular.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine at level 5
A2-3

minutes if offence
continues

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First Offence
Offence

(Fuel Restriction)
(Amendment)
Regulation (Cap. 311I)
2008
Contravenes the fuel restriction requirements of

the Regulation 4(1), 4A, 4C (1) or 4D.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of not exceeding

$20,000
Additional daily fine not

exceeding $5,000 if the
offence continues

(Fuel Restriction)
(Amendment)
Regulation (Cap. 311I)
2008
Fails to keep the certificates of compliance

issued for 3 years and produce for inspection
upon request by the Authority.
The owner of the

relevant plant
commits the offence
Fine at Level 5
Fine at Level 5
Issues a certificate of compliance in respect of a

fuel-using equipment not according to the
stipulated requirements.
A Competent
examiner who
commits the offence
Fine at Level 5
Fine at Level 5
Building (Demolition
Works) Regulations
(Cap. 123C) 1962
3, 13
The authorized person and registered specialist

appointed in respect of the demolition work do
not carry out required activities before
commencing of demolition.
An authorized
person, and/or
registered specialist
contractor who is
guilty of the offence
Fine of $25,000
Shipping and Port

Control Ordinance
(Cap. 313) 1978
50
Any vessel in the waters of Hong Kong that

emits smoke in such quantity as to be a
nuisance, except in circumstances affecting the
safety of life or of the vessel.
The owner and

master of the vessel
who commits the
offence
Fine of $10,000
Shipping and Port

Control Ordinance
(Cap. 313) 1978
74
Obstructs the Director of Marine, or any other

person, performing or exercising any function,
duty or power under this Ordinance.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $10,000
An owner, agent or
master of a vessel
who commits the
offence
Fine of $50,000
2 years imprisonment
A2-4
Fine of $20,000

Legislation Related to Noise Control

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability*
First offence
Noise Control
1988
6 (1)
Causes or permits to use of powered

mechanical equipment at any place between
1900-0700 or anytime on a general holiday
without construction noise permit (CNP) or noncompliance with CNP condition.
6 (2)
Carries out, causes or permits to be carried out

prescribed construction work at any place within
designated area between 1900-0700 or anytime
on a general holiday without construction noise
permit (CNP) or non-compliance with CNP
condition.
26
Any person who:

public officer in the exercise of any power
conferred by section 25 which he is
authorized to exercise under section 24;
2 Fails without reasonable excuse to comply
with any requirement duly made by any
public officer in the exercise of any such
power;
3 In compliance or purported compliance with
any such requirement produces any
drawing, record or document which he
knows to be incorrect or inaccurate in a
material respect or does not believe to be
correct or accurate; or
4 Wilfully or recklessly gives information
matters in respect of which information is
required to be given under section 25.
A2-5
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $100,000
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $50,000
Offence
Fine of $200,000
Fine of $20,000 each day
if offence continues

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability*
Offence
First offence
Noise Control
1988 (cont)
Noise Control
2002
6 (3)

percussive piling at any place in 0700-1900 on
any day, not being a general holiday, without
construction noise permit (CNP) or noncompliance with CNP condition.
6 (4)

percussive piling at any place between 19000700 or anytime on a general holiday.
14 (1a)
Trades or business imports, manufactures,

supplies, offers or exposes of supply of
prescribed products intended for use in Hong
Kong without fitted with noise label.
14 (1b)
Noise from prescribed product does not comply

with standard.
28A
Commits an offence under NCO by a body

corporate.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $100,000
Fine of $200,000
Any Person who

commits the offence
Fine of $100,000
Fine of $200,000
A director or an
officer of the body
incorporate
--
--
*Remark: Liability for prosecution under the ordinance for an offence may include the management and supervisory staff of the Contractor, e.g. site agent, foreman.
A2-6

Legislation Related to Waste Management Control

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Waste Disposal
Ordinance (Cap.354)
1990
Offence
13
Fails to comply with the requirements on

removal of wastes from any premises as stated
in the notice issued by the collection authority.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $50,000

16
Disposal of waste to any land or premises

without license from the DEP.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
Fine of $500,000
16A
Any person who, without lawful authority or

excuse, or permission of any owner or lawful
occupier of the place, deposits or causes or
permits to be deposited any waste in any place.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
Fine of $500,000
17
Fails to give notice to the DEP as required, or

fails to comply with any direction given under
this section.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $100,000
Fine of $200,000
23
Contravenes any term or condition subject to

which the license was granted.
Any person has been

granted a waste
disposal license
Fine of $200,000
Fine of $500,000
Additional fine of $10,000
each day if offence
continues
Any person has been

granted a waste
collection license
Fine of $100,000
Fine of $200,000
Additional fine of $5,000
per day if offence
continues
A2-7

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Waste Disposal
Ordinance (Cap.354)
1990
23B
Fails without reasonable excuse to comply with

the requirements of the notice or in purported
compliance with such notice, makes any
statement to the authority which he knows to be
incorrect in a material respect or recklessly
makes any statement to the authority which is
incorrect in a material respect of knowingly omits
any material particular.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $100,000
23F
Any person who:

1 Wilfully obstructs a collection authority or a
waste disposal authority or any authorized
officers in the exercise of authoritys or the
officers power under this ordinance;
with the requirement duly made by a
collection authority or a waste disposal
authority or any authorized officers under
this ordinance;
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $100,000
Offence
In purported compliance with any

requirement produces any drawing,
document or record which he knows to be
incorrect or inaccurate in a material
particular or does not believe to be correct
and accurate.
A2-8

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Waste Disposal
(Chemical Waste)
(General) Regulation
(Cap. 354C) 1992
(For the details of the
requirements under s.9,
10, 12, 13, 15 and 18,
please refer to the
booklet Code of
Practice on the
Packaging, Labelling
and Storage of
Chemical Wastes )
Offence
6, 38
Fails to register before producing any chemical

waste.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
Additional daily fine of

$10,000 if offence
continues
7, 38
Fails to inform the DEP of any change in the

particulars contained in the application as soon
as practicable after such change occurs.
A registered waste
producer
Fine of $10,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
8(1), 38
Waste producer fails to arrange for his chemical

waste to be delivered to a reception point or an
appropriate waste disposal facility.
A registered waste
producer
Fine of $200,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
8(4), 38
Waste producer fails to provide record i.e. trip

ticket to the DEP to show that the proper
disposal arrangement for waste disposal had
been made.
Fine of $100,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
9, 38
Fails to ensure that chemical waste should be

packed and stored in a suitable container, the
container should be maintained in good
condition and repair and be free from corrosion,
contamination or any other defect
A waste producer
who commits the
offence
Fine of $100,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
10, 38
Fails to ensure that there is proper packing of

chemical waste in a safe place, and
A Waste producer
who commits the
offence
Fine of $100,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
A waste producer
and the person
responsible for such
packing and storing
who commits the
offence
Fine of $100,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
No mixing of incompatible chemical waste in a

container is allowed.
11, 38
Fails to comply that capacity of a chemical

waste container should not exceed 450 litres,
unless approved by the DEP.
A2-9

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Waste Disposal
(Chemical Waste)
(Cap. 354C) 1992
Offence
12, 38
Fails to comply requirement fro labelling of the

chemical waste container.
A waste producer
who commits the
offence
Fine of $50,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
13, 38
Fails to ensure that any area for the storage of

chemical waste containers:
1 Is for storage of chemical waste only;
2 Be enclosed on at least 3 sides by a wall;
3 Is well ventilated;
4 Is not connected to any sewer or drains;
A waste producer
who commits the
offence
Fine of $100,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
5
6
7
8
9
Has adequate space for the handling of the

container;
If located inside a multi-storey building, be
so located as not to obstruct the use of any
means of escape or exit from the building;
If the storing area is not within a building, be
provided with a roof or a similar covering;
Should be kept clean and dry; and
Is secured with a lock except during
necessary normal operations.
A2-10

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Waste Disposal
(Chemical Waste)
(Cap. 354C) 1992
14, 38
Fails to ensure that waste container contains

liquid chemical waste should:
1 Have an impermeable floor or surface;
2 Have a retention structure with the capacity
to accommodate I) the contents of the
largest container or II) 20% by volume of
the chemical waste stored in that area,
whichever is the greater; and
3 Be enclosed by walls or partitions
constructed out of an impermeable material,
where such containers are stacked.
15, 38
Fine of $100,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
Fails to ensure that containers of incompatible

chemical waste are not stored together where
potentially dangerous consequence may result
in the event of contact between the different
wastes and any stacks of containers of chemical
waste are made secure so as to prevent their
falling down.
Fine of $100,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
18, 38
Fails to ensure that the chemical waste store

should display a proper warning panel, notice or
marking at or near the entrance or the opening.
Fine of $50,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
21, 38
Fails to engage the services of a waste collector

to remove or transport the chemical waste from
the site or premises.
Fine of $200,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
A2-11
A waste producer
who commits the
offence
Offence
Any person who

commits the offence

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Waste Disposal
(Chemical Waste)
(Cap. 354C) 1992
Offence
22, 38
Waste producer fails to ensure:

1 Required information is recorded on trip
tickets;
2 Chemical waste to be delivered is correctly
classified, described, quantified and
labelled, and certify as such on the trip
tickets; and
3 Comply with requirements which the trip
ticket specifies.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $100,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
28, 38
Fails to retain the copy of the trip ticket for at

least one year from the date it is handed over,
and shall make it available to the EPD if
required.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $50,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
29, 38
The DEP may require a waste producer, a

person who is in possession of or has the
custody of chemical waste, a waste collector or
a reception point manager fails to furnish to him
in such form and within such time as determined
by him, any information in respect of any
chemical waste produced by such waste
producer or consigned by or on his behalf to a
waste collector, collected by such waste
collector or received by or on behalf of such
reception point manager, as the case may be.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $100,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
A2-12

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Waste Disposal
(Chemical Waste)
(Cap. 354C) 1992
Offence
30, 38
Waste producer fails to:

1 Prepare and make available written
procedures to be observed in the event of
emergencies due to spillage , leakage or
accidents arising in the course of or from
the handling and the storage of chemical
wastes; and
2 Ensure that his employees or agents have
received adequate instructions and training
for implementing such procedures.
A waste producer
who commits the
offence
Fine of $200,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
31, 38
Fails to comply the requirement that:

If the Director of Environmental Protection is of
the opinion that any stored chemical waste is
likely to threaten public health or safety or cause
pollution, he may require the owner or occupier
of the premises in which the waste is stored to
remove or cause to be removed the chemical
waste to a particular facility by notice in writing.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $200,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
32, 38
Any person contravenes:

1 In the storage, collection, transportation,
reception, transfer, disposal, import or
export or in otherwise handling chemical
waste, take all necessary precautions for
preventing any hazard or danger to public
health or safety or pollution or risk of
pollution to the environment; and
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $200,000

$10,000 if offence
continues
Not deal with or dispose of chemical waste

in any manner contrary to this Regulation or
so as to cause any hazard or danger to
public health or safety.
A2-13

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Waste Disposal
(Chemical Waste)
(Cap. 354C) 1992
37, 38
Any person who:

1 In furnishing any information or particulars
under this Regulation in a trip ticket or any
form specified for the purposes of this
Regulation, in relation to arrangements for
disposal of chemical waste or otherwise,
makes a statement or gives an estimate
which he knows to be incorrect in a material
particular or recklessly makes a statement
or gives an estimate which is incorrect in a
material particular or knowingly or
recklessly omits a material particular;
2 For the purposes of this Regulation, certifies
as correct anything which he knows to be
incorrect or recklessly certifies as correct
anything which is incorrect.
Any person who

commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
Waste Disposal
(Charges for Disposal
of Construction Waste)
Regulation (Cap. 354N)
2004
If the account holder does not inform the DEP in

writing of the change in the information provided
to the DEP in relation to an exemption account.
The account holder

who commits the
offence
Fine at Level 6
9 (1)
Fails to apply for a billing account within 21 days

after being awarded the contract for construction
work with a value of $1,000,000 or above under
a contract.
A main contractor
who commits the
offence
Fine at Level 5
9 (2)
Fails to ensure that

1 Billing account is used for paying any
prescribed charge payable in respect of
construction waste generated from
construction work undertaken under that
contract; and
2 Billing account is not used for paying any
prescribed charge payable in respect of any
other construction waste.
A main contractor
who commits the
offence
Fine at level 5
A2-14
Offence
$10,000 if offence
continues
Fine of $1,000 daily if

offence continues

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Waste Disposal
(Charges for Disposal
of Construction Waste)
Regulation (Cap. 354N)
2004
22
A person who:
1 Makes any statement or gives any
information that he knows to be incorrect in
a material particular;
2 Recklessly makes any statement or gives
any information that is incorrect in a
material particular; or
3 Knowingly or recklessly omits any material
particular from any statement or
information.
A2-15
A person who
commits the offence
Offence
Fine at Level 6

Legislation Related to Chemical Control

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Hazardous Chemical
Control Ordinance
(Cap. 595) 2008
Manufacture any scheduled chemical, except

under and in accordance with a permit.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine at Level 5
1 year imprisonment
Import any scheduled chemical, except under

and in accordance with a permit.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine at Level 5
1 year imprisonment
Use any scheduled chemical, except under and

in accordance with a permit.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine at Level 5
1 year imprisonment
16
Without reasonable excuse, return the permit to

the Director of Environmental Protection later
than 10 working days after the variation of
conditions of a permit takes effect.
A Permit Holder who

commits the offence
Fine at Level 1
18
Contravenes a condition of his permit that falls

within the description of section 11(1)(a), (b), (c)
or (d).
A Permit Holder who

commits the offence
Fine at Level 4
21

than 10 working days after a cancellation of a
permit takes effect.
A Permit Holder who

commits the offence
Fine at Level 1
26
Fails to comply with any of the directions given

under section 22 or, where the directions are
varied under section 23, any of such directions
as varied.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine at Level 3
29

than 10 working days after a suspension of a
permit takes effect.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine at Level 1
A2-16
Offence

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Hazardous Chemical
Control Ordinance
(Cap. 595) 2008
32
A person who:
1 Without reasonable excuse, fails to comply
with a requirement made under subsection
(2)(a) or (b); or
2 Wilfully obstructs an authorized officer in the
exercise of any power conferred under
subsection (1) or (2).
A person who
commits the offence
Fine at Level 3
33
A person who:
1 Without reasonable excuse, fails to comply
with a requirement made under subsection
(1)(b) or (c); or
2 Wilfully obstructs an authorized officer in the
exercise of any power conferred under
subsection (1).
A person who
commits the offence
Fine at Level 3
40
A person who:
1 Produces any document or provides any
information that he knows to be misleading,
false or inaccurate in a material particular;
2 Recklessly produces any document or
provides any information that is misleading,
false or inaccurate in a material particular;
or
3 Produces any document or provides any
information that he has no reasonable
ground to believe to be true or accurate; or
4 When required to produce any document or
provide any information in respect of any
matter to an authorized officer in the
exercise of his powers under this
Ordinance, withholds the document or
information.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine at level 3
A2-17
Offence

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Ozone Layer Protection

1997

1997
Manufactures a scheduled substance

(does not apply where the scheduled substance
is manufactured solely for the purpose of
research or academic instruction and the person
manufactures no more than 1 kg of the
substance in any 12 month period).
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $1,000,000
Imports or exports a scheduled substance

without a licence.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $1,000,000
Contravenes a condition of a licence.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $1,000,000
13
A person who:
authorized officer in the exercise of any
powers conferred on him by or under this
Ordinance;
with any requirement made by an
authorized officer under section 10, 11 or
12;
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $100,000
Offence
Fine of $100,000 for each
day on which the offence
continues

any such requirement produces a record or
document which is incorrect or inaccurate in
a material respect and which he knows to
be incorrect or inaccurate or does not
believe to be correct or accurate; or
which is incorrect or inaccurate in a material
respect or withholds information as to any of
the matters in respect of which information
is required to be given under this
Ordinance.
A2-18

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence

(Controlled
Refrigerants)
Regulation (Cap. 403B)
1993
Allows or causes any controlled refrigerant used

or intended for use in a refrigeration equipment
or motor vehicle air-conditioner to escape into
the atmosphere.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $100,000

(Controlled
Refrigerants)
Regulation (Cap. 403B)
1993
Recover, recycle or otherwise treat or cause or

allow to be recovered, recycled or otherwise
treated a controlled refrigerant unless:
1 Refrigerant recycling equipment approved
by the Director of Environmental Protection
under section 4 is used for recovering or
recycling the controlled refrigerant; and
2 Equipment is used(i)
in accordance with any instruction
issued by the manufacturer of the
equipment; and
(ii)
in a manner as may be specified by
notice in the Gazette by the DEP.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $100,000
A2-19
Offence

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence

(Products Containing
Scheduled Substance)
(Import Banning)
Regulation (Cap. 403C)
1993
A person who:
1 Import a controlled product from any
country or place which is not bound by the
terms of the Protocol unless the Director of
Environmental Protection is satisfied that
the country or place is in full compliance
with the relevant requirements of the
Protocol.
2 Import a portable fire extinguisher from any
country or place, whether or not bound by
the terms of the Protocol, unless the
Director of Environmental Protection after
consulting the Director of Fire Services
certifies that the portable fire extinguisher is
required for essential applications relating to
emergency situations or where lives are at
risk.
A person who
commits the offence
Offence
Fine of $200,000
{Does not apply to a controlled product or

portable fire extinguisher imported into Hong
Kong by a vessel, aircraft or vehicle if the
controlled product or portable fire extinguisher is
(a)
the necessary equipment or part of the
necessary stores of the vessel, aircraft
or vehicle;
(b)
an item of personal property
reasonably required for the personal
use of the crew or passengers of the
vessel, aircraft or vehicle;
(c)
an used item imported for the personal
use of an owner who is taking up
residence in Hong Kong; or
(d)
imported by a passenger of the vessel,
aircraft or vehicle in his personal
baggage or carried by him.}
A2-20

Legislation Related to Water Pollution Control

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Water Pollution Control

1980
8(1), 8(2),
9(1), 9(2)
Discharge any waste or polluting matter into

the waters of Hong Kong in a water control
zone.
1.
The Occupier of
premises or
vessel; or
Discharge any matter into any inland waters

in a water control zone which tends (either
directly or in combination with other matter
which has entered those waters) to impede
the proper flow of the water in a manner
leading or likely to lead to a substantial
aggravation of pollution.
Discharge any matter into a communal
drain in a Water Control Zone (WCZ) or
communal drain in a WCZ other than the
discharge of domestic sewage into a
communal sewer and the discharge of
unpolluted water into a communal
sewer/drain for carriage of surface drainage
water.
2.
The person
having
command or
charge of the
vessel; or
A Person
causing the
discharge
Discharge any poisonous or noxious matter

into the waters of Hong Kong.
1.

into any inland waters in a WZC.
into a communal drain in WCZ.
8(1A), 8(2),
9(1), 9(2)
3.
2.
3.
A2-21
The Occupier of
premises or
vessel; or
The person
having
command or
charge of the
vessel; or
A person
causing the
discharge
$200,000
Offence
$400,000
Fine of $400,000 and

imprisonment for 1 year
Fine of $1,000,000 and

imprisonment for 2 years

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence

1980
35
A person who:
with the requirement of notice from
Authority (DEP); or
a notice from Authority makes any
statement which he knows to be false in a
material particular or recklessly makes any
statement which is false in a material
particular or knowingly omits any material
particular; or
3 In an application makes a statement or
gives an estimate which he knows to be
false in a material particular or who
recklessly makes a statement or gives an
estimate which is false in a material
particular or knowingly omits a material
particular from the application.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $10,000
40
A person who:
1 Wilfully obstructs an authorized officer in
exercise of any power conferred on such
officer; or
with the requirement duly made by officer
under WPCO; or
any requirement produces any drawing,
document or record which he knows to be
incorrect or inaccurate in a material
particular or does not believe to be correct
and accurate.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $10,000
A2-22
Offence

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence

1980
40A
A person who:
1 Tampers or interferes with a device that is
used for sampling any matter;
2 Tampers or interferes with a sample
obtained;
3
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $10,000
Offence
Diverts an effluent stream away from

installed device that is used for sampling
discharges;
Does anything in relation to an effluent
stream for the purpose of causing a
misleading sample to be taken from an
installed device that is used for sampling
discharges.

1980
46
A contravention of any specified provision of

regulation or of a license or a notice under
WPCO.
Depends on different
provision
Fine of $200,000

(Cap. 358D) 1986
17(2)
Complete the form prescribed in Second

Schedule, makes a statement or gives an
estimate which he knows to be incorrect in a
material particular or recklessly makes a
statement or gives an estimate which is incorrect
in a material particular or knowingly omits a
material particular.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $10,000
17B
A person who contravenes any provisions of a

licence.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
A2-23


Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
Offence
First offence
Dumping at Sea
1997 #
25 (1)
A person who:
1 Does anything without required permit; or
2 Causes or allows another person to do
anything for without required permit.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
25 (2) & (3)
A person who:
1 Makes a statement which he knows to be
false in a material particular;
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
2
3
Fine of $500,000 and to

imprisonment for 2 years,
Further fine of $10,000 for
each day that the court is
satisfied that the operation
has continued.
Recklessly makes a statement which is

false in a material particular; or
Intentionally fails to disclose a material
particular.
In order to procure the issue of a permit or in

purporting to comply with a condition imposed
on him under a permit.
25 (6)(a)
Fails to cease the operation as specified in the

marine pollution abatement notice.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
Further fine of $10,000 for each
day that the court is satisfied
that the failure to cease the
operation has continued.
25 (6)(b)
Fails to comply with a marine pollution

abatement notice served on him in any other
case.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $200,000
A2-24

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Dumping at Sea
1997 #
25 (7)
A person who:
1 Intentionally obstructs the Authority or an
authorized officer in the performance of his
functions under this Ordinance;
with a requirement made or direction given
by the Authority or an authorized officer in
the performance of his functions under this
Ordinance; or
3 In purporting to give information required by
the Authority or an authorized officer for the
performance of his functions under this
Ordinance(a)
Makes a statement which the person
knows to be false in a material
particular;
(b)
Recklessly makes a statement which is
false in a material particular; or
(c)
Intentionally fails to disclose a material
particular.
A person who
commits the offence
Offence
Fine of $200,000
#Remark: Liability for prosecution under the ordinance for an offence may include body corporate, management of the firm, the partner or the firm.
A2-25

Legislation Related to Environmental Impact Assessment

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
Offence
First offence
Environmental Impact
Assessment Ordinance
(Cap. 499) 1997
9, 26
Construct or operate a designated project or

decommission a designated project:
1
Without an environmental permit for the

project; or
Contrary to the conditions set out in the

permit.
A person who
commits the offence
Fine of $2,000,000
offence continues
(For summary conviction)
Fine at Level 6
offence continues
A2-26
Fine of $5,000,000
(For summary conviction)
Fine of $1,000,000
1 year imprisonment

Maximum Penalties
Legislation
Section
Activity / Source
Liability
First offence
Environmental Impact
Assessment Ordinance
(Cap. 499) 1997
23, 27
A person who:
1
Wilfully resists, obstructs, or delays any

public officer in the exercise of a power
conferred by section 23 which he is
authorized to exercise;
Fails without reasonable excuse to comply
with a requirement duly made by a public
officer in the exercise of a power under
section 23 which he is authorized to
exercise;
A person who
commits the offence
Offence
Fine at Level 5

a requirement of a public officer under Part
VII produces a drawing, record or document
which he knows to be incorrect or
inaccurate in a material respect or does not
believe to be correct;
matter for which information is required to
be given under Part VII.
A2-27

Appendix 2.2.1
MA 6 Sustainable Timber Calculation Sample
No.
Component
Quantity
Total Timber
Cost
Sustainable
Timber?
Total Sustainable
Timber Cost
1
2
3
4
e.g. Door frame 1

e.g. Door 1
e.g. Timber floor
e.g. 8
e.g. 8
e.g. 2
e.g. 6,400
e.g. 8,000
e.g. 2,000
e.g. No
e.g. Yes (FSC)
e.g. Yes (FSC)
e.g. 0
e.g. 8,000
e.g. 2,000
Total:
16,400
Sustainable
Timber %
10,000
61.0%
* The exact full list of regional material items should be project specific, which should be suggested by the
project BEAM / LEED consultant.
A2-30

Appendix 2.2.2
MA 8 Ozone Depletion & Global Warming Potential calculation
HVAC&R
equipment
No. of
Units
Q
unit
(kW)
Refrigerant
GWPr
ODPr
Rc
(kg/kW)
Life
(yrs)
Lr
(%)
Mr
(%)
Total Q
unit
(kW)
Tr
(Lr x Life
x Mr)
LCGWP
LCODP
RAI
TRAI
11.2
R410a
1,890
0.76
10
2.0%
10%
11.2
30.0%
43.03
43.03
481.95
22.4
R410a
1,890
0.38
10
2.0%
10%
89.6
30.0%
21.52
21.52
1927.80
15.5
R410a
1,890
0.55
10
2.0%
10%
93
30.0%
31.09
31.09
2891.70
22.4
R410a
1,890
0.38
10
2.0%
10%
67.2
30.0%
21.52
21.52
1445.85
15.5
R410a
1,890
0.55
10
2.0%
10%
31
30.0%
31.09
31.09
963.90
Total Q
292
Total RAI
7711.20
Average RAI
26.41
* The exact full list of regional material items should be project specific, which should be suggested by the project BEAM / LEED consultant.
A2-30

Appendix 2.2.3
MA 9 Regional Materials Sample Checklist
No.
Items
Distance between
project site and
manufacture
Location of
Manufacturing
(km)
1
Product Cost
Within 800km
(HK$)
Concrete
e.g.PRC - Guangdong
e.g. 100
e.g. 4,000,000
Yes
Steel Bar
e.g.PRC - Guangdong
e.g. 100
e.g. 8,990,000
Yes
Structural steel
e.g.PRC - Guangdong
e.g. 100
e.g. 10,000,000
Yes
Gypsum
e.g.PRC - Guangdong
e.g. 100
e.g. 200,000
Yes
Masonry
e.g.PRC - Guangdong
e.g. 100
e.g. 300,000
Yes
Aluminum Profile
e.g. PRC - Shanghai
e.g. 950
e.g. 1,800,000
No
Timber Product
e.g. PRC - Shanghai
e.g. 950
e.g. 400,000
No
Glass
e.g. PRC - Shanghai
e.g. 950
e.g. 3,500,000
No
Total Cost of all materials
HK$ 29,190,000
Total Cost of regional material
HK$ 16,300,000
Percentage of regional material
55.8%
* According to BEAM Plus Guidelines, building material taken into account in MA 9 credit is defined as the
final product at the point of manufacturing, not raw material at the point of extraction, harvest or recovery
A2-30

Appendix 2.2.4
WU 1 Annual Water Use saving calculation sample
Flow Devices
Model
Watering Duration
(sec)
Design
Baseline
Number of
Occupancy
Freq. of use
per occupant
per day
Flow Rate of fitting

(l/min)
Design b
Baseline
Annual
Operation
Day
Annual Water Use (l)

Design
Baseline
Pantry
Faucet
example
15
15
100
8.3
365
Sub-total =
45,625
75,738
45,625
75,738
Showers
Showerhead
example
300
300
100
0.1
9.5
365
Sub-total =
109,500
173,375
109,500
173,375
Restroom Faucet
Faucet
example
10
10
100
5.8
8.3
365
176,417
252,458
Sub-total =
176,417
252,458
Total Annul Water Consumption=
331,542
501,571
Annual Water Saving =
33.9%
Remarks:
a
Flow devices include water taps for bath, basin, pantry, kitchen, and also shower heads and exclude water closet, urinal, water features, appliance and irrigation. There
should be separate entries for water use in male and female facilities.
b
Design flow rate is base on the equipment catalogues provided.
A2-30

Appendix 2.2.5
EU 3 Embodied Energy Sample Checklist
No.
Items
Product Model
Quantity
Unit
Concrete
m3
Reinforcement Steel
kg
Structural steel
kg
Fenestration of curtain wall
m2
Spandrel of curtain wall
Louvre
m2
Aluminum cladding
*Data input from the checklist will be used to calculate the total embodied energy of the building structural
elements
A2-30

Table of Contents
PROJECT PLANNING ................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1
3.2
3.3
Stage 1 Tendering ........................................................................................................ 3-1

Stage 2 Contract Award ................................................................................................ 3-5
Stage 3 Construction..................................................................................................... 3-7
List of Table
Table 3.1
Items Requiring Budget Allocation for Equipment / Material with Respect to Different
Environmental Issues ...................................................................................................... 3-3
List of Appendices
Appendix 3.1
Recommended Items to be included in the Project Budget ............................................. A3-1
Appendix 3.2
Checklist for Project Programming ................................................................................. A3-6
Appendix 3.3
Checklist for Site Planning ............................................................................................. A3-8
A2-30

Chapter 3 Project Planning
Project Planning
In order to complete a project in an environmentally

friendly
manner,
environmental
protection
measures should be considered during each stage
of the project. The key stages covered by this
section include:
Tendering
Contract Award
Construction
3.1
Stage 1 Tendering
During the project tender stage, environmental

measures should be considered for the following
tasks/areas:
Tender Document Review and Pay for
Environment
Budgeting
Programming
Method Statement Preparation adopting a
Proactive Approach
Preparation and Review of Sub-Contractor
Tender Documents
Selection of the Sub-Contractor
3.1.1
Tender Document Review and Pay for

Environment
The Contractor should carefully check the
Specification and Bill of Quantities (BQ) to
understand the precise environmental requirements.
Those may include:
Implementing an Environmental Policy and
Environmental Management System
Maintaining environmental performance records
Maintaining
registers
of
environmental
legislation and in-house rules to be followed
Implementing specific requirements laid down
in the EIA Report and Environmental Permit (for
Designated Projects only)
Preparing
an
outline
Environmental
Management Plan
Appointing designated staff to be responsible
for environmental management
Restricting certain processes, activities and
materials to be used
Deploying green working practices and
equipment
3.1.2 Project Budgeting
The budget for the implementation of environmental
management requirements on site should be
allocated. Budgeting includes two key areas:
3-1
Human resources to be employed who are

responsible for environmental management or
protection; and
Specific working practices, equipment and
facilities necessary to carry out practical
mitigation measures for environmental impacts.
Costing of human resources should include:

Environmental management staff such as an
Environmental Officer to oversee environmental
issues on site;
Supervisory staff such as Environmental
Supervisors and Foremen to supervise the
implementation of environmental control
measures;
Personnel such as skilled labour for carrying
out the environmental control measures
including operation of environmental facilities
such as a wastewater treatment plant; and
Provision of internal and external training for
workforce and staff on environmental protection
issues.
The budgeting for working practices, equipment
and facilities (where applicable) is particularly
important during the tendering stage. It may involve
procurement and installation of an automatic wheel
washing machine or special configuration of a noise
barrier to suit the construction methodology.
Table 3.1 shows the items which may require
budget allocation for equipment and material with
respect to different environmental issues. The
Contractor may take into account that there is
deduction for specified capital expenditure incurred
in relation to environmental protection facilities,
which include Quality Powered Mechanical
Equipment (QPME) system, air pollution control
machinery or plant, waste treatment plant and
wastewater treatment plant with the requirement
under respective ordinance.
Details can be
referred to the Revenue Ordinance 2008.
Appendix 3.1 shows a pricing schedule for

recommended items to be included in the project
budget.

Table 3.1
Environmental Issues
Environmental Issue
C&D Material Management
Chemical Waste Management
Dust and Air Pollution Control
Noise Control
Items Requiring Budget Allocation
Storage facilities for waste and segregated materials
On-site sorting of C&D waste
Delivery of C&D Materials
Deposit for Billing Account for construction waste disposal
Disposal charges to governments facilities
Storage (including containers and enclosures)
Drip trays
Labelling
Packaging
Chemical waste producer registration
Collection cost of chemical waste
Disposal costs for chemical wastes
Spill clean-up and emergency response equipment
Vehicle washing facilities (e.g. automatic, use of recycled water)
Spray devices e.g. sprinkler system
Dust suppression chemicals
Hoardings
Paving of haul roads and site exits
Impervious sheeting for covering materials/hoists
Enclosures and storage facilities
Air quality monitoring equipment (if required)
Hard paving
Use of ULSD fuel
Position of ventilation outlet (away from sensitive environmental

receivers nearby)
Maintenance of plant and equipment
Quality Powered Mechanical Equipment
Maintenance of plant and equipment
Noise barriers
Noise enclosures
Absorption materials
CNP applications
Noise monitoring equipment (meter and calibrator) (if required)
3-3

Table 3.1
Environmental Issues (Continued)
Environmental Issue
Wastewater Control
Items Requiring Budget Allocation
Wastewater treatment plant/sedimentation tanks
Coagulant and neutralization agents
Perimeter cut off drains
Temporary site drainage
Chemicals for treatment processes
Licence applications
oil interceptors
Sand bags
Water quality monitoring and analysis
Submersible pumps and water pipe
Sludge disposal
Provision of chemical toilets and maintenance
Sewage treatment facility (if required)
3-4

3.1.3 Programming
Good project planning involves developing a
programme that takes account of the sequencing of
construction activities to minimise environmental
impacts and allows the time necessary for
establishing environmental mitigation measures.
For example:
No construction activities can proceed during
restricted hours without a Construction Noise
Permit (note that a Construction Noise Permit
may not be issued if the predicted noise levels
exceed the standards set in the Technical
Memorandum, so avoid programming work in
restricted hours, whenever possible);
Avoid noisy activities during sensitive hours (e.g.
during school examination periods);
Select working practices and equipment that is
environmental friendly, e.g. using quieter plant
such as Quality Powered Mechanical
Equipment;
Sequence construction activities to minimise
land disturbance to reduce dust impact;
Schedule compaction and hydroseeding such
as soil stabilization to prevent environmental
impacts caused by heavy rain;
Schedule the procurement and installation of
pollution control equipment;
Schedule licence and permit applications; and
Schedule environmental monitoring, inspection,
training and meetings.
Appendix 3.2 shows the items to be considered in
project programming.
Method
Statement
Preparation
Adopting a Proactive Approach

It is important to demonstrate a commitment to
environmental protection and to provide proposals
to minimise environmental impacts that may be
caused by the Contractors construction methods.
Comprehensive proposals showing commitment to
environmental protection can provide a competitive
advantage in the tendering process. The following
initiatives are examples of how the Contractors
environmental capability can be demonstrated:
Establish a policy on environmental protection
endorsed by top management
Prepare environmental management plan
Establish an environmental team
Adopt environmentally friendly construction
methods, e.g. using modern well maintained
plant
3.1.4
3-5
Use environmentally friendly construction

materials and products, e.g. reusable metal
scaffold instead of bamboo scaffold
Consider options for green purchasing
Implement HKCA Clean Air Charter
3.1.5 Sub-contract Tender Document

In preparing the tender documents for subcontractors, the main contractor should make sure
that sub-contractors are made aware of their
environmental duties and responsibilities for the
project. The sub-contract tender document may
include:
Reference to the environmental management
plan developed for the project
Designating a person to act as the subcontractors environmental representative
Statements requiring the sub-contractor to
perform
construction
works
strictly
in
accordance with the environmental legislation in
Hong Kong
Environmental requirements and specifications
for the project that the sub-contractors should
meet
Particular significant environmental aspects and
sensitive areas of the project
Incentive/promotion schemes for environmental
good practice
3.1.6 Selection of the Sub-contractor
The main contractor undertakes the environmental
duties and responsibilities specified in the main
contract document. In selecting sub-contractors, the
main contractor should also evaluate the subcontract tenders on environmental grounds. The
following evaluation criteria are suggested when
selecting a sub-contractor:
Does the sub-contractor have their own
environmental policy and environmental
management system?
Does their method statement demonstrate
commitment to environmental protection?
What is their previous performance records and
experience?
Can they provide competent and experienced
environmental staff?
3.2
Stage 2 Contract Award
Upon award of the contract, the following should be

carried out:
Site planning for environmental protection
Set up performance targets on resources
management for specific construction site
Green purchasing policy

Document Environmental Management Plan

Immediate training needs
Notifications
and
permit
and
licence
applications to EPD
3.2.1 Site Planning

The following should be considered during site
planning:
Identify significant environmental aspects and
associated impacts;
Identify environmentally sensitive areas and
receivers;
Carry out baseline survey and monitoring if
necessary; and
Develop environmental mitigation and control
measures to address significant environmental
impacts.
Appendix 3.3 provides a checklist of items to be
considered during site planning.
3.2.2 Green Purchasing Policy
Green purchasing is becoming more important and
should be adopted in the project planning stage to
make
sure
the
requirements for
using
environmental friendly products agreed in the
tender document are obtained. The following
approaches may be considered:
Adopting alternative environmentally friendly
construction methods, e.g. off-site fabrication in
controlled conditions and on-site assembly can
minimise waste generation and local nuisance
Adopting
more
environmentally
friendly
construction material, e.g. using metal scaffold
and formwork of timber from sustainable
managed forests
Using more environmentally friendly machinery
and equipment like QPMEs, in which QPME
system is administered by EPD.
The
Contractor may be beneficial from the
deduction for specified capital expenditure as
mentioned in Section 3.1.2.
Returning surplus material to the supplier for
reuse rather than disposal
Agreeing take-back service with supplier for
material packaging and pallets
contracts and E&M contracts, with a contract sum

greater than $20 million and contract period longer
than 6 months).
The content of the EMP should include:
Environmental policy
Organizational structure for environmental
management
Environmental duties and responsibilities of
different levels of staff
Environmental training
In-house rules and regulations
Environmental committees
Performance monitoring
Promotion
Review of legal and other requirements
Nuisance abatement measures
Emergency preparedness procedures
Waste reduction targets
Waste management measures
Environmental records and their control
3.2.4 Training
To ensure a consistent high-level of environmental
performance on both the construction project,
training should be provided to the project team and
workforce to raise their environmental awareness,
knowledge and skills. The training provided should
target the significant environmental aspects relating
to the project. Refer to Chapter 15 of this Guide for
more details on training resources.
3.2.5 Promotion
The
Contractor
may
consider
organizing
competitions which serve as another mean to
increase their environmental awareness. Besides,
incentive schemes could be considered to be
provided to front line site staffs on different
environmental initiatives, such as resources saving
and good site practices to enhance their
commitments and environmental performance.
3.2.6
3.2.3 Environmental Management Plan

An Environmental Management Plan (EMP) should
be prepared to address the potential significant
environmental aspects and impacts and to propose
appropriate mitigation measures. Preparation of an
EMP is a requirement of ETWB TC 19/2005 for
capital works contracts (including Design & Build
Notifications and Licence and Permit

Application
As soon as practicable following award of the
contract and prior to the commencement of
construction work, the following should be
undertaken, as necessary:
Notify EPD of the commencement dates of
construction work relating to construction dust
(Notifiable Work)
Open a billing account for disposal of
construction waste (within 21 days of contract
award)
Register as a chemical waste producer
3-6

Application to EPD for licence for conducting

Specified Processes, if necessary
Application to EPD for permit for dumping at
sea, if necessary
Apply for an effluent discharge licence
Apply for a Further Environmental Permit, if
necessary
Apply for a Construction Noise Permit, if
necessary
Planning for Emergencies related to

Environmental Issues
Emergency situations identified on construction
sites may include:
Accidental spillage of fuels, oil or other
chemicals to land or to water bodies causing
pollution
Surface water run-off due to rainstorms causing
flooding and pollution
members of the emergency team. That information

should be posted permanently on-site.
3.2.8 Carrying out Baseline Monitoring
Environmental monitoring is usually required to be
carried out at designated locations under an EM&A
programme and/or the specification. It is also
considered best practice to conduct voluntary
monitoring in other cases when the project is
situated close to sensitive receivers.
3.2.7
When planning how to response to an

environmental emergency situation, the following
should be addressed:
Identify all environmental hazards that could
cause an emergency situation.
A risk
assessment can assist in this process;
Develop suitable emergency preparedness and
response plans and procedures;
Carry out regular emergency drills; and
establish an emergency team and communicate
to all personnel.
The emergency team should be provided with
appropriate training to handle the predicted
emergency situations. The emergency team should
be lead by a senior staff member.
The responsibilities of the Emergency Team include:
Implementing the emergency plans and
procedures including preventing pollution
impacts when it is safe to do so
Notifying emergency services and authorities as
appropriate
Providing first-aid when needed before
emergency services arrive
Conducting a debriefing after the emergency to
review procedures for their continued
effectiveness
An emergency contact list should be prepared
including the emergency hotline numbers of the
relevant utilities (e.g. electricity, gas and water
supply),
appropriate
government
agencies
(ambulance, police, fire service and EPD) and
3-7
Baseline monitoring should be carried out before

main construction works starts so it is important to
establish monitoring stations as soon as possible.
Environmental monitoring is carried out to ascertain
the baseline and to establish compliance levels with
respect to parameters such as dust and noise.
3.3
Stage 3 Construction
During construction the following should be

undertaken:
Implement EMP
Carry out impact monitoring
Maintain public relations
Implement emergency response procedures
3.3.1 Implement EMP
During the construction stage it is essential to
effectively implement the plan.
All personnel
should be made aware of their responsibilities
under the EMP. The EMP should be regularly
reviewed to make sure it reflects current site
activities. The implementation of the EMP should
include:
Recognizing legal and other requirements
Site management should be fully aware of the
legal, contractual and other requirements
relevant to the construction project
Significant environmental aspects should be
identified and appropriate mitigation measures
and operational controls determined
Enforcing mitigation measures
Make sure all mitigation measures are in place
and in good condition and are capable of
reducing environmental impacts to comply with
relevant standards
Allocate personnel and resources to maintain
facilities and equipment

Monitoring and reporting

Conduct monitoring and inspection of the site
and perimeter on a regular basis, check
compliance and take action when necessary
Meet with relevant parties and sub-contractors
to resolve any sub-standard performance both
on an ad-hoc and regular basis
Regularly
report
performance
to
top
management.
Continual improvement
Identify opportunities to improve performance
through regular analysis and review of
performance data, including reviewing on
performance targets on resources management
Establish corrective action plan to improve the
environmental performance if necessary.
3.3.2 Impact Monitoring
During the course of construction, impact
monitoring should be carried out in accordance with
the EM&A Manual (if any) and/or the specification
or on a voluntary basis.
Should there be any exceedance of the compliance
levels, the situation should be investigated and
corrective action taken when necessary.
Consider posting results of environmental

inspections and monitoring to demonstrate
performance.
3.3.4 Emergency Response Procedure

Emergency response procedures established for
each potential emergency situation should be
implemented. Practice drills should be conducted
on a regular basis and also before high-risk periods
(e.g. conduct rainstorm drills before summer wet
season).
Typical procedures for typhoon events and
heavy rainstorms
Precautions to be taken prior to wet season:
Check and maintain all silt removal facilities,
channels and manholes and remove any
deposited silt and grit or other blockage
regularly;
Provide intercepting channels along the
crest/edge of excavation to prevent storm runoff
from washing across exposed soil surfaces; and
Excavate and backfill trenches in short sections.
Measures should be taken to minimize the
ingress of rainwater into trenches.
A suggested public relations strategy can be

developed and implemented using the following
approaches:
Actions to be taken when a typhoon or rainstorm is

imminent or forecast:
Check silt removal facilities, channels and
manholes to ensure that they can function
properly;
Minimize open stockpiles of construction
materials such as aggregates, sand and fill
materials on site; and
Secure all temporary covers to stockpiles.
Set up clear communication channels

Display environmental hotline at prominent
locations along the site boundary
Provide contact details to key sensitive
receivers such as schools and residential
buildings nearby
Deploy designated personnel to be responsible
for receiving, investigating and responding to
enquiries and complaints in a timely manner.
Actions to be taken during or after typhoons or

rainstorms
Avoid an unnecessary risk during typhoons and
rainstorms; personnel should take care not to
put themselves at risk; and
Check and maintain silt removal facilities,
channels and manholes after typhoons or
rainstorms to ensure they are clear of silt and
debris.
Meet with relevant stakeholders

Explain details of the construction project
Organize
activities
and
environmental
promotion to engage with the public and
neighbours
Show the mitigation measures such as noise
barriers, dust suppression, treatment facilities
being implemented on site
Typical procedures for chemical spill

Alert all personnel in the work area and inform
the Emergency Team. Consult the MSDS to
determine safe handling and disposal
procedures.
3-8
3.3.3 Maintaining Public Relations

It is important to maintain good relations with
neighbours close to the site and the general public.

Assess the severity of the spillage, the

Emergency Team Leader should determine
whether emergency services such as the Fire
Services Department should be informed to
handle the incident.
If it is safe to do so, the Emergency Team
should take the following immediate actions:
- Stop the spill;
- Confine the spill with earth barriers or
similar;
- Contain the spill inside the work area and
prevent it from entering waterways or
drainage systems; and
- Remove all heat and ignitable sources.
The Emergency Team should take the following
action if safe to do so:
- Use the chemical spill kit;
- Absorb the spill with soil, sawdust or
absorbent;
- Pack the used absorbent into plastic bag
and label it; and
- Dispose the labelled plastic bag in
chemical waste store for subsequent
collection by licensed waste collector.
If the chemical properties of the spilt material are

not known and/or the spill is large, extra care must
be taken. Personnel should be evacuated from the
area and await the emergency services.
3-9

Appendix 3.1: Recommended Items to be included in the Project Budget

Tender No.
Project Name :
Budget Schedule
Item
Description
Quantity
Unit
GENERAL
1.1
Preparation of an Environmental
Management Plan for the project
Item
1.2
Update Environmental
Management Plan
Month
1.3
Arrange and attend weekly

environmental walk with reporting
Week
1.4
Provide Environmental Officer on

site
Month
1.5
Provide Environmental Supervisor

on site
Month
1.6
Arrange and attend Site Safety

and Environmental Committee
Meeting
Month
1.7
Arrange and attend Site Safety

and Environmental Management
Committee Meeting
Month
1.8
Provide environmental induction

training to all staff and workers
Item
1.9
Provide environmental toolbox talk

to all workers
Item
1.10
Incentive schemes for construction

site staffs to enhance their
involvement in various
environmental initiatives
Item
1.11
Various environmental award

schemes
Item
A3-1
Rate
Amount (HK$)

Item
Description
Quantity
Unit
DUST CONTROL
2.1
Provision and maintenance of

vehicle washing / water recycling
facilities at site exit
Item
2.2
Paving of main haul road
2.3
Application of water/dust
suppression chemicals for dust
control
Job
2.4
Establishment of dust monitoring

equipment
Item
2.5
Monitoring and reporting of dust

level
Month
2.6
Dismantling of dust monitoring

equipment
Item
2.7

hoarding
2.8
Provision of covering of dusty

materials
Item
AIR POLLUTION CONTROL
3.1
Application of licence for

conducting Specified Processes
Item
3.2
Handling of asbestos containing

materials
Job
3.3
Use of non/low VOC products
Item
3.4
Use of ULSD fuel
Litre
CHEMICAL WASTE
4.1
Provision of chemical waste

storage facilities
Rate
Amount (HK$)
Item
A3-2

Item
Description
Quantity
Unit
4.2
Designated staff to manage

chemical wastes
Job
4.3
Disposal costs for chemical waste
Job
4.4
Emergency Spillage Kit
Item
4.5
Fee for register as chemical waste

producer
Item
4.6
Conducting chemical spillage drills
Item
WASTEWATER CONTROL
5.1

perimeter ditch and site drainage
5.2
Provision of wastewater treatment

system to treat the construction
wastewater to the required
discharge standards
Unit
5.3
Operation/maintenance of
wastewater treatment system
Month
5.4
Monitoring and analysis of effluent

discharge quality
Month
5.5
Provision of chemical toilets with

inclusion of maintenance and
desludging contracts throughout
the project period
Item
5.6
Fee for application for discharge

licence
Item
NOISE CONTROL
6.1
Establishment of noise monitoring

equipment
Item
6.2
Monitoring and reporting of noise

level
Month
A3-3
Rate
Amount (HK$)

Item
Description
Quantity
Unit
6.3
Dismantling of noise monitoring

equipment
Item
6.4
Provision of suitable noise barriers

or enclosures
Item
6.5
Provision of Quality Powered

Mechanical Equipment (QPME)
Item
WASTE MANAGEMENT
7.1
Application for permit for sea

dumping
Item
7.2
Provision of waste sorting

containers
Item
7.3
Delivery of C&D waste, recyclable

materials
Ton
7.4
Deposit for Billing Account of

construction waste disposal
Job
7.5
Charge of disposal of C&D waste

to landfill
Tonne
7.6
Charge of disposal of public fill to

public filling facility
Tonne
TREE PROTECTION
8.1
Carry out tree survey
Item
8.2
Tree transplanting
Item
8.3
Tree felling
Item
8.4

protective fence for individual tree
Item
8.5
Routine preservation of protected

tree within site
Month
A3-4
Rate
Amount (HK$)

Item
Description
Quantity
Unit
COMMUNITY RELATIONS
9.1
Provide environmental bulletin

board
Item
9.2
Prepare and publish

environmental performance report
Item
9.3
Organise environmental campaign
Item
9.4
Handle public complaints against

pollution nuisances arising from
the construction sites
Rate
Sub-total
A3-5
Amount (HK$)
HK$

Appendix 3.2: Checklist for Project Programming

Item
Considered in
programme
Yes
No
Schedule for baseline environmental monitoring
Schedule for environmental training
Schedule for inspections
Schedule for environmental meeting
Schedule for meeting requirements stipulated in the

Environmental Permit for Designated Project
Submission of Form NA - Notification of Commencement of

Construction Works included
Application to conduct a Specified Process (e.g. concrete

batching plant)
Erection of hoarding prior to carry out construction works
Scheduling of earthworks during dry season
Purchase or hire and delivery of air pollution control equipment

(e.g. wheel wash, sprinkler systems)
Installation of air pollution control equipment and associated

facilities
Maintenance of air pollution control equipment
Purchasing or hire of necessary plant (e.g. QPME)
Maintenance of plant and mechanical equipment
Purchase and installation of noise barriers or enclosures
Limit working hours between 0700 and 1900 on weekdays
Carry out no works in restricted hours without Construction

Noise Permit issued by EPD
Application periods for Construction Noise Permits considered?
Percussive piling requiring CNP considered?
Application for Effluent Discharge Licence
Remarks
GENERAL
AIR
NOISE
A3-6

Item
Considered in
programme
Yes
No
Installation of site temporary drainage facilities
Purchase or hire of wastewater control facilities
Installation and commissioning of wastewater control facilities
Maintenance of wastewater control and site temporary

drainage facilities
Registration as a Chemical Waste Producer
Application for a billing account for construction waste and

obtain chits
Application for permit for dumping at sea
Frequency of the disposal of chemical wastes
Selection and engaging licensed waste collectors at the early

stage of the project
Select and establish suitable chemical waste storage area on

site to avoid relocation at the later stages of the project
Select and establish suitable areas on site for waste

segregation and sorting
Frequency for the collection of C&D waste and the recyclables
Handling of contaminated land issues
Time allowed for tree survey (if required)
Time allowed to obtain approval for tree transplantation or tree

felling
Schedule tree transplantation/ tree felling /on-site protection
Remarks
WATER QUALITY
WASTE MANAGEMENT
TREE PROTECTION
A3-7

Appendix 3.3: Checklist for Site Planning

Planned
Remarks
Yes
No
Consider site and surrounding environment, location of nearby

sensitive receivers
Use site offices and containers as barriers to shield sensitive

receivers
Establish environmental emergency team and procedures
Erect signboards (e.g. for publicity and environmental hotline

numbers)
Select suitable haul road routing and site entrance/exit
Erection of hoarding
Provide dust screen on scaffold and impervious sheeting on

material hoist
Provide water supply for dust suppression
Control vehicle speed (speed bumps and speed limit signs)
Provide dust control for demolition works, debris handling, drilling,

blasting or other dusty operations
Provide areas available to store stockpile of dusty materials
Locate and provide sufficient space to install wheel washing

facility at each site exit
Provide space and location to accommodate air pollution control

facilities
Determine work schedule to minimise dust emission
Select suitable plant and equipment to reduce sound power level

(e.g. use of QPME)
Use silencers and mufflers
Minimise the number of concurrent noisy activities
Site or orientate noisy equipment and activities away from

receivers
Locate where noise barriers or enclosures are required
GENERAL
AIR
NOISE
Schedule activities to prevent work being carried out in restricted

hours
A3-8

Planned
Remarks
Yes
No
Design site temporary drainage system
Locate and provide sufficient space for wastewater treatment

facility
Identify location of wastewater discharge point
Provide adequate supply of chemicals for water treatment
Establish monitoring schedule for checking quality of water

discharge
Schedule work activities to minimise water pollution (e.g. minimize

exposed ground surface)
Seal hoarding to prevent surface water entering site
Provide cut off drainage to prevent surface water leaving the site
Locate waste collection points (including, inert C&D Material,

recyclables and C&D Waste) and provide access route
Locate waste segregation and sorting areas
Locate chemical waste storage area and provide access route
Determine routing for transport of wastes
Locate segregation bins for general waste (e.g. paper, cans)
Establish trip-ticketing system for waste disposal
Establish Waste Flow Table (i.e. to identify and record expected

quantities of waste to be managed)
Provide chemical spill kits
Arrange and conduct spill drills
WATER QUALITY
WASTE MANAGEMENT
TREE PROTECTION
Establish tree management plan
A3-9

Chapter 4 Construction Dust Management
Table of Contents
CONSTRUCTION DUST MANAGEMENT .................................................................................... 4-1

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Terminology ..................................................................................................................... 4-1

Major Source of Construction Dust ................................................................................... 4-1
Licence and Notification Requirements ............................................................................ 4-1
Construction Dust Control ................................................................................................ 4-2
List of Appendices
Appendix 4.1
Site Inspection Checklist ................................................................................................ A4-1

Construction Dust Management
4.1
Terminology
Construction Dust
Dusty materials produced as a result of construction
work being carried out. This may include cement,
earth, pulverized fuel ash, aggregates, silt, stone
fines, sand, debris, sawdust and wooden chips.
Notifiable Work
Notifiable Work under the Construction Dust
Regulations includes:
Site formation
Reclamation
Building demolition
Work to be carried out inside a tunnel where it
is within 100m from the portal
Construction of building foundation
Construction of building superstructure
Road construction
Regulatory Work
Regulatory Work under the Construction Dust
Regulations includes, but is not limited to, road
opening or resurfacing, external renovation and
slope stabilization works.
Emergency Work
Emergency Work under the Construction Dust
Regulations is works required in an emergency
situation where human life or building safety is
being threatened. It also includes repair work that is
required as a result of a failure of utility services,
road collapse or road blockage.
Excluded Work
Excluded Work includes, but is not limited to,
internal renovation, a specified process, cleansing
and inspection of underground utilities, and works
to be carried out entirely under water.
For notifiable, emergency, regulatory and

excluded work, the Contractor shall
implement the relevant specified dust control
measures as stipulated in the Regulation.
Total Suspended Particulates (TSP)

Small airborne particulates such as dust, fumes and
smoke with a diameter of less than 100
micrometres. The observed human health effects
of TSP include breathing and respiratory symptoms,
aggravation of existing respiratory disease and
damage to lung tissues.
4.2
Major Source of Construction Dust
Construction dust arises from a variety of activities

as shown in the graphic below. Preventing dust at
source is the most effective method of mitigation.
The following sections provide further details of
those methods.
Sand/Grit
Conveyor System
Truck
Movements
Concrete
Batching
Building
Demolition
ACTIVITIES
GENERATING DUST
Soil
Excavation
Piling
Material
Handling/
Storage
4.3
Site
Clearance
Mobile plant e.g.

bulldozer, crane,
crusher
Licence and Notification

Requirements
4.3.1
Licence Requirements for Conducting a

Specified Process
A licence is required to carry out any Specified
Process such as cement works.
Details of
Specified Processes and their licence requirement
can be found in Chapter 5, Section 5.2 of this Guide.
4.3.2
Control Requirements for Notifiable

Work
Under the Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust)
Regulation (Refer to Chapter 2 for details), the main
contractor responsible for a construction site where
notifiable work is proposed to be carried out has to
give notice to EPD before the commencement of
the work.
Air Sensitive Receivers

Air sensitive receivers are locations that are
susceptible to air pollution, such as:
Human environment (e.g. residential dwellings)
Natural environment (e.g. parks, playgrounds
and ecologically sensitive areas).
The main contractor also needs to give notice to

EPD of any proposed change relating to the
particulars given in the previous notice(s) before the
proposed change takes effect. Giving notice to
Environmental Protection Department enables them
4-1

to carry out checks of the construction site to verify

that the control measures as stipulated in the
regulation have been properly implemented.
The notification procedure is shown below:
Notify EPD prior to the

commencement of any notifiable
work
4.4
Construction Dust Control
4.4.1 Planning Dust Controls

During the planning stage of the project, the
elements to consider when determining effective
dust controls are shown in the graphic below and
described in this section:
I
Identification
of Dust
Impacts
IX
Mitigation Measures
for Dust Control
New
site?
New
construction site
or change of
notifiable
works?
Change?
VIII
Communication
CONSIDERATIONS
DURING THE
PLANNING STAGE
Complete Form
NA enclosed with
site location map
II
Programming of
Works
IV
Site Planning
Complete Form
NB
VII
Training
V
Water Supply
and Storage for
Dust
Suppression
Notification to EPD under the regulation is free of

charge. Notification is not required for Emergency
Work, Excluded Work and Regulatory Work.
III
Identification of
Dust Mitigation
Facilities
VI
Licence Application for
Specified Process and
Notification of
Commencement of Works
I Identification of Dust Impacts

In order to determine the likely dust impacts arising
from the construction works, the construction
activities that may produce dust should be identified
together with the location of the nearest air
sensitive receivers in relation to the construction
site. Construction activities that involve generating
and handling of dusty materials, include:
Grinding
Breaking concrete
Excavation
Vehicle movements
Other considerations include the direction of the
prevailing winds in relation to the site and the
weather conditions.
II Programming of Works
Dust impacts can also be reduced by careful
programming of works:
Schedule the work with consideration of the
potential major dust generating activities to
minimise the exposure period and exposed
area of dusty stockpiles/materials;
Backfill and reinstate the excavated area as
soon as possible; and
4-2

If possible, arrange trucks to transport the dusty

materials during off-peak hours
III Identification of Dust Mitigation Facilities

Identify dust mitigation facilities required, e.g.
water lorry, wheel-washing facilities and water
sprinkler system.
Work out the cost effectiveness of those
facilities. For instance:
- timer control for the sprinkler system along
the haul road (water could be mixed with
dust suppression chemicals to enhance
performance); and
- sprinkling areas manually that cannot be
reached by the sprinkler system.
The haul road surface should be kept wet at all
times. As a rule of thumb, water spraying
should be conducted at least every 2 hours
during hot and dry conditions when evaporation
of water is greatest. More frequent water
spraying should be conducted as and when
necessary.
IV Site Planning
To reduce dust impacts:
Avoid conducting construction activities such as
handling dusty material near to sensitive
receivers;
Consider the prevailing wind direction; avoid
handling dusty materials upwind of sensitive
receivers;
Locate activities or processes that may
generate dust as far away from sensitive
receivers as possible (e.g. haul roads and
stockpiles.)
Locate temporary structures such as site offices
and containers to act as dust barriers;
Pave site areas as far as possible; and
Regularly review construction activities to make
sure mitigation is effective.
V Water Supply for Dust Suppression
A consistent supply of water for dust suppression
purposes should be made available, make sure:
Adequate quantities of water are available;
Water is available at each area requiring dust
suppression;
Reuse and recycling of water is promoted;
Supply of reused water is segregated from
potable water supply;
Water is stored to avoid risk of mosquito
breeding;
Label water tanks to identify contents; and
Distribution system is provided.
4-3
Encourage reuse of the treated water from the

wastewater treatment facility and construct a
rainwater harvesting system on site to provide
water for dust suppression.
VI Licence Application for Specified Process
and Notification of Commencement of
Works
For application of specified process licence,
refer to Section 4.4.7 and Section 5.2 for details;
and
For notifiable work, refer to Section 4.3 for
details.
VII Training
All personnel should receive training relevant to
their needs. It is particularly important for
supervisors and workers to be made aware of:
dust impacts resulting from their activities; and
how to control dust on site in terms of using the
dust control facilities and good housekeeping
practices.
Training material such as The Environmental
Toolbox Training Kit developed by the Hong Kong
Construction Association (HKCA) is referenced in
this Guide. Refer to Chapter 15 for details.
VIII Communications
Pro-actively
obtain
feedback
about
effectiveness of the implementation of
mitigation measures from sensitive receivers.
the
dust
IX Mitigation Measures for Dust Control

Dust control requirements under the Air
Pollution Control (Construction Dust) Regulation
should be followed throughout the construction
period.
Modifications to the mitigation measures may

be required to suit actual site conditions.
An instruction video showing construction site dust

management can be viewed at EPDs website.

Exemption
Some construction works are exempted
from certain dust control measures
because of the physical constraint in the
construction site in adopting the required
control measures:
Road construction work
Exempt from hoarding requirement.
Road opening or resurfacing work
Exempt from vehicle washing facilities

and hoarding requirements.
Cleaning trucks before leaving the site
Slope stabilization
4.4.2
Exempt from vehicle washing facilities

requirement; and
Exempt from hoarding requirement if

the site boundary adjoins road for
vehicular traffic.
Dust Control Measures
Good Housekeeping
A good housekeeping checklist for construction
dust is attached in Appendix 4.1.
Site Boundary, Entrance and Hoarding
Except for road opening or resurfacing work or
construction work carried out in a construction site
that is completely paved or completely covered with
hardcore:
Vehicle washing facilities with high pressure
water jet are to be provided
Provide 2.4 m high hoarding along the site

boundary that is accessible to the public except
for a site entrance or exit, it is recommended to
seal the base of the hoarding and provide cutoff drainage to prevent water run-off
Road Opening/Resurfacing Work

Spray water or dust suppression chemical on
the working surface where piling, drilling, cutting,
polishing or other mechanical breaking
operations causing dust emissions are carried
out
In addition, isolate the work site appropriately
using impervious sheets so as to minimise
uncontrolled dust dispersion to surrounding
public areas
Dust barrier using impervious sheeting

Using high-pressure water for vehicle cleaning
Water for vehicle washing should be recycled

Wastewater should be treated prior to discharge
The road between the vehicle washing facilities
and the site exit should be paved with concrete,
bituminous materials or hard core
4-4

The main contractor is responsible for

making sure trucks leaving the site comply
with regulations such as cleaning vehicles
and covering loads of dusty material.
As a good practice, the Contractor should
erect a drop bar or deploy a security guard
at every site exit to allow checking. Only
those vehicles that are clean and have their
dusty loads covered should be allowed to
leave the site. Photos or video could be
taken to provide record of compliance.
The Contractor would not be responsible
under the Regulation for any vehicles
running on the road with its load not
entirely covered or whose bodies and
wheels are not clean. Such cases will be
controlled by FEHD and the Police under
other relevant ordinances.
Excavation or Earth Moving

Activities where materials are excavated or
transferred are subject to control:
Spray excavation or earth with water or dust
suppression chemical immediately before,
during and immediately after the operation so
as to maintain the entire surface wet
Site Clearance
The work area for the uprooting of trees, shrubs,
or vegetation or for the removal of boulders,
poles, pillars or temporary or permanent
structures should be sprayed with water or dust
suppression chemical immediately before,
during and immediately after the operation so
as to maintain the entire surface wet
All demolished items which are likely to
dislodge dust particles when exposed should be
covered entirely by impervious sheeting or
placed in an area sheltered on the top and three
sides
Exposed Surface in Open Areas
Monitor the exposed surface condition and
spray with water or dust suppression chemicals
as necessary
Carry out compaction, turfing, hydroseeding
and vegetation planting as far as practicable to
protect the exposed surface
Do not place stockpiles of dusty materials
outside the construction site/hoarding
Compacting and hydroseeding slopes and open areas prevents

dust
Water browser tanker can be used to spray water over a large

construction site, especially for civil construction
Water should be sprayed regularly to avoid dust emission.

Automatic sprinkler system should be considered to reduce
manpower required
4-5
Exposed Dust Generating Stockpile

Exposed stockpile and debris should be
dampened or covered entirely by impervious
sheets or stored in a sheltered debris collection
area, i.e. with covers on the top and three sides.
Minimise the number of stockpiles
Allocate suitable locations for placing stockpiles
of dusty materials
Store materials away from the site boundary
and downwind of sensitive areas
Compact stockpile surfaces
Minimise storage time on site
Haul Roads and Access Roads
Except for road opening or resurfacing work:
The main haul road (with 4 or more vehicles
passing in any 30 minutes) shall be:

(i) paved with concrete, bituminous materials,

hardcore or metal plates, and kept clear of
dusty materials; or
(ii) compacted and sprayed with water or a dust
suppression chemical to maintain the entire
road surface wet.
Impose a reasonable vehicle speed limit such
as 8 kph within the site
The portion of any road only leading to a
construction site that is within 30m of a vehicle
entrance or exit should be kept clear of dusty
materials
Mechanical covers on dump trucks have environmental and
safety benefits
Concrete Production
For production of concrete or any other
substances using bagged cement or dry
pulverised fuel ash, the de-bagging, batching
and mixing processes should be carried out in
an area sheltered on the top and three sides
Storage of 20 or more bags of cement should
be either covered or enclosed in an area
sheltered on the top and the 3 sides
Providing a paved road prevents dust impacts and keeps the site
clean
Loading and Unloading of Dusty Materials

Except for cement and pulverised fuel ash and
special cases when dusty materials are to be
maintained dry, all dusty materials shall be
sprayed with water or dust suppression
chemical immediately prior to loading and
unloading operations
Cover the dusty materials loaded in trucks with
impervious sheeting before leaving the site. As
a good practice, mechanical cover for dump
truck should be considered for more effective
mitigation
To promote the use of mechanical covers, the
Government has reserved budget in those
public works contracts which have adopted the
Pay for Safety Scheme (PFSS) or Pay for
Safety and Environment Scheme (PFSES) to
pay the installation costs of mechanical covers
on the dump trucks serving these contracts.
The Government requires the contractors to pay
to the owners of the concerned dump trucks
serving the respective public works contracts.
Dump Truck owners must have their dump
trucks installed with mechanical covers and
registered in the Scheme at CEDD. For details,
please refer to CEDDs webpage.
4-6
Providing an enclosure and dust extraction equipment when

conducting dusty activities
Disposal of Dusty Material

Cement, pulverized fuel ash or any other dusty
materials collected by fabric filters or other air
pollution control system or equipment should be
disposed of in totally enclosed containers
Debris handling
Any debris shall be covered entirely by
impervious sheeting or stored in a debris
collection area sheltered on the top and the 3
sides

Where a debris chute discharges into a skip or

container, it should be enclosed with impervious
sheeting or sprayed with water
Before debris is dumped into a debris chute, it
should be sprayed with water
Pneumatic or power-driven drilling, cutting and

polishing
Water or a dust suppression chemical shall be
continuously sprayed on the surface where any
pneumatic or power-driven drilling, cutting,
polishing or other mechanical breaking
operation that causes dust emission is carried
out, unless the process is accompanied by the
operation of an effective dust extraction and
filtering device
Blasting
Wet the area within a radius of 30m prior to
blasting
No blasting should be carried out during the
strong wind signal or tropical cyclone warning
No.3 or higher is hoisted unless prior
permission of the Commissioner of Mines is
obtained
Erect a dust screen or blast door
Control of Dark Smoke
Dark smoke from any plant (for example diesel
generators) can be reduced by:
Maintaining plant and equipment properly
Using better quality diesel fuel that enhances
combustion efficiency
Adding a precipitator at the exhaust
Refer to Chapter 5 of this Guide for more details of
these controls.
Implementing Dust Suppression Measures
Select most suitable dust suppression method
Allocate resources to apply suppression
Monitor performance by recording frequency of
application and review its effectiveness
Amend frequency or method when necessary to
improve effectiveness
Avoiding Bad Practice
Make sure air pollution control systems are
operating correctly, when such a system is
required
Do not place any stockpile of dusty materials
beyond the pedestrian barriers, fencing or traffic
cones when carrying out road opening or
resurfacing works
4-7
Compressed air jets shall not be used for

cleaning or clearing dust from any vehicle or
equipment
4.4.3
Construction Dust Mitigation

Techniques
Physical Barriers
Use of physical barriers to reduce dust dispersion:
Erect hoardings to contain the dust within the
site
The height of the hoarding should not be less
than 2.4m
Noise barriers can also serve as a barrier to
reduce dust emission
To increase the effectiveness of the barrier, it
should be placed as close to dust generating
activities as possible, and should shield against
the wind
The site hoarding can act as an general barrier against

construction dust dispersion
Positioning of Barrier to Reduce Dust Emission

Predominant
Wind
Direction
Source (dust
generating
activity)
Barriers could be equipped with

fine water spray facilities installed
at the top of the barrier for dust
suppression
Shield the dusty activity from the
wind
If the wind direction varies during the dust emitting

activity, barrier(s) should be placed to provide
maximum shielding to the closest sensitive

receivers, or to shield activities from the more

prevalent wind direction.
Use of Covers
In some cases, dust mitigation may be more
efficient if the dusty material is dampened
before placing the cover
An impervious sheet (e.g. tarpaulin) can
enclose the dusty materials, and retain moisture
within the material
For production of concrete using bagged
cement or dry pulverized fuel ash, the
debagging, batching and mixing process shall
be carried out in an area covered on top and 3
sides
Some construction sites use recycled/treated water for cleaning
Use of Sprinkler System for Dust Suppression

The use of fixed sprinkler systems is effective to
suppress dust in situations including:
Large construction sites
Haul roads where there is considerable
distance to the public pavement
Aggregate storage areas (be aware of any
moisture content implications)
Systems may be automated by using timers or trip
switches.
Sprinkler systems do have limitations including:
Wind affects
Limited area coverage, normally up to 5 m
radius
Obstruction of construction activities
Dust enclosure
Covers are used to minimise dust emission at construction sites,

especially for locations near sensitive receivers
Use of Recycled Wastewater for Dust

Suppression
Recycled water is ideal for dust suppression.
Wastewater that has been treated should be
retained for reuse
Water tanks or holding ponds are used to store
the treated water temporarily but they should be
regularly checked to avoid mosquitoes breeding
Fine water spray used to suppress dust at waste discharge point

(Photo is extracted from EPDs website)
4-8
The water spraying system installed laterally on the

waste collection bins provides a water mist to
suppress dust emission. Equipped with sensors at
the access doors of the chutes, the water
consumption of the water spraying system can be
minimized while remaining effective.

Heavy duty metal grating may also be provided so

that dust and sand can drop off from the vehicles
when they move slowly over the grating.
A tank can be installed under the grating facility to
retain washed sand and water.
The use of automatic wheel-washing facilities can
be very efficient and cost effective but do require
maintenance. They often need to be built-in so are
less flexible when the site arrangement needs to
change regularly.
Sprinkler System is an Effective Mitigation Measure for Dust
Suppression at Large Construction Site
Use of Chemicals for Dust Suppression

An alternative solution for the mitigation of dust
emissions. They have the following characteristics
for effective results:
Aqueous acrylic vinyl acetate polymer emulsion
5 50% (weight) acrylic and vinyl acetate
polymer
50 90% (weight) water
specific gravity 1.01 to 1.15
non-hazardous
non-combustible
acrylic odour
low toxicity
Wheel Wash Bay at Site Exit
Suggested application frequency is shown below:

Traffic
Situation
Frequency
Dosage
Heavy Traffic
Once every 2 4
weeks
0.5 0.7 litre/m
Moderate
Traffic
Once every 2 6
weeks
0.4 0.5 litre/m
Light Traffic
Once every 2 8
weeks
0.3 0.4 litre/m2
Grating
Use of Wheel-Washing Facilities

A wheel wash facility needs to be established at all
exit points that are used by construction traffic. The
facilities should include as a minimum:
high pressure water jet, and
cut off drainage to prevent water entering
existing drainage.
The washing area should be laid to a fall so that
wastewater can be collected for reuse or treatment.
4-9
Install Grating to Further Remove Sand and Dust from the

Vehicles
Belt Conveyor System

A belt conveyor system is an effective way to
transfer large quantities of material on or off
construction site (see photo below). They can be
useful in transferring excavation material such as
soil during earth work and site formation work. To
mitigate dust:
Enclose belt conveyors by covering its top and
two sides
Enclose all transfer point between belt
conveyors
Install belt scrapers and bottom plates
Limit the vertical distance between the end of a
belt conveyor and the material landing point

Cover the unloading area (e.g. a storage bin, a

truck or a barge should be covered on the top
and the three sides)
Example of Conveyor Belt System
4-10

4.4.4
Site Examples
Good Practices
Bad Practices
Stockpile and Exposed Slope
Dusty stockpile is properly covered to avoid windblown dust

emission
Dusty stockpile is not covered, leading to potential

windblown dust emission
Haul Road
Water spraying is applied on haul road to suppress dust

emission
Haul road is dry and dusty
Site Exit
Wheel-wash facility is provided at site exit to remove sand /

dust from vehicles
4-11
Washing facility at site exit is not provided leading to

deposition of soil and dust on the public road

Good Practices
Bad Practices
Handling of Dusty Material
Dusty loading on dump truck is properly covered to avoid

dust emission during transportation
Loading is higher than the side and tail boards of the

vehicles, resulting in dust emission during transportation
Dusty Operation
Water spraying and covering are applied during drilling work
No water spraying and covering during drilling work,

resulting in dust emission
The breaking surface is wetted to suppress dust during

breaking work
No water spraying is applied during breaking work,

resulting in local dust emission
4-12

4.4.5
Building Works
Debris Chute
Any debris shall be covered entirely by
impervious sheeting or stored in a debris
collection area sheltered on the top and the 3
sides
Where a debris chute discharges into a skip or
container, it should be enclosed with impervious
sheeting or sprayed with water
Before debris is dumped into a debris chute, it
should be sprayed with water
Building Superstructure
Building Demolition
The area demolition work takes place shall be
sprayed with water or a dust suppression chemical
immediately prior to, during and immediately after
the demolition activities. Wet the working area prior
to, during and immediately after demolition.
Dust Screen along Site Boundary
Impervious Sheeting as Dust Screen for Building Work
Water Spraying for Demolition Work
Effective dust screens

Where scaffolding is erected around the perimeter
of a building under construction or renovation of the
outer surface, the following measures should be
provided:
Effective dust screens;
Sheeting or netting should be provided to
enclose the scaffolding from the ground floor
level of the building. Impervious sheeting can
provide better dust screening effect yet wind
load should be considered to avoid collapsing
of the scaffolding during windy day; and
If a canopy is provided at the first floor level,
sheeting or netting should be provided from the
first floor level, up to the highest level of the
scaffolding.
For any wall of the building to be demolished that

abuts or fronts upon a street, service lane or other
open area accessible to the public, the following
additional measures should be provided:
Impervious dust screens or sheeting should be
used to enclose the whole wall to a height at
least 1m higher than the highest level of the
structure being demolished
Skip Hoist
Enclose the skip hoist by impervious sheeting
4-13

Typical requirements for monitoring air quality are

provided in Environmental Monitoring and Audit Guidelines for Development Projects in Hong Kong.
If your project has an EM&A Manual, the

monitoring locations, numbers,
measurement frequency, etc are normally
given in the manual.
Consult your Environmental Team (ET)
Leader or Environmental Officer as prior to
commencement of the works if you are not
clear about the requirement.
Impervious Sheeting as Dust Screen for Demolition Work
Dusty materials remaining after a stockpile is

removed shall be wetted with water and cleared
4.4.6 Tunnelling Works

In case where works to be carried out in any part of
a tunnel that is within 100m of any exit to the open
air, any relevant requirements mentioned in Section
4.4.2 should be met.
4.4.7 Air Quality Monitoring
Air quality monitoring can provide an early
indication of deteriorating of air quality and confirm
the effectiveness of established mitigation
measures.
Air Quality Parameters

in Construction Site
Aims to measure the

short term construction
impact over a short
period of time during
construction activities
Contractual Requirements
Preparation of an Environmental Management Plan
(EMP) for construction projects has become a
common practice for the construction industry as
requested by some clients. The EMP may include
the requirements for construction dust mitigation
and the associated dust monitoring.
Some projects will require baseline
monitoring for consecutive days (normally 14
days) prior to starting the construction works.
Air Quality Parameters in Construction Site
1-hour
TSP
Statutory Requirements
Monitoring as specified under an EP for Designated
Projects is usually carried out in accordance with
the approve EM&A Manual. Those guidelines are
used in developing EM&A Programmes under the
EIAO.
It is advisable to check your Contract,

Particular Specification or Environmental
Monitoring & Audit (EM&A) Manual (if any) to
confirm requirements.
For a Designated Project, baseline monitoring
is normally required. It can be arranged by the
Employer or through the Contractor under the
Contract.
24-hour
TSP
Aims to measure the
long term
construction impact
over a longer period
of time during
To avoid delaying the commencement of

construction works, baseline monitoring
should be arranged as soon as possible once
the award of the construction contract is
confirmed.
4-14

Can I dispose of waste or generate smoke for

expelling mosquito on a construction site by
means of open burning?
The disposal of construction waste or the clearance

of a site in preparation for construction work or
generation of smoke by open burning is prohibited
under the Air Pollution Control (Open Burning)
Regulation.
Can I apply for a permit for open burning of

construction waste?
EPD will not entertain any application for permit for

open burning of construction waste or for the
purpose of site clearance, which are prohibited by
the Air Pollution Control (Open Burning)
Regulation.
4-15

Appendix 4.1: Site Inspection Checklist

Site Inspection Checklist Dust
Implemented
Yes
No
Unpaved areas (e.g. unpaved main haul road)
Access roads
Construction areas
Any dusty materials before loading and unloading
Stockpile of dusty materials
Debris chute
Water sprays are either fixed or mobile to allow individual areas to be

wetted as and when required
Application of suitable wetting agents (e.g. dust suppression chemicals)

is used in addition to water if necessary
Debris is covered entirely by impervious sheeting or stored in a debris

collection area sheltered on the top and the 3 sides
Every debris chute shall be enclosed by impervious sheeting or similar

materials
Conveyor belts are fitted within windboards
Conveyor transfer points and hopper discharges are enclosed
Drop heights are minimised from all conveyors
Materials that have the potential to create dust are totally enclosed
10
Storage time of materials on site is minimised
11
Bulk crushing and/or material storage takes place inside sheds
12
Skip hoist is enclosed by impervious sheeting
13
Debris chute is enclosed by impervious sheeting
14
Debris collection area is sheltered on the top and the 3 sides
Remark
Material Handling
1
Watering is undertaken whenever necessary for the following:
Hoarding / Dust Screen

15
Hoarding of not less than 2.4 m high from ground level is provided along
the building site boundary
16
Effective dust screens, sheeting or netting is provided to enclose any

scaffolding built around the perimeter of the building under construction
17
Screening of dust generating activities through the use of wind breaks
A4-1


Implemented
Yes
No
Remark
Excavation
18
Working area of any excavation or earth moving operation is sprayed

with water immediately before, during and immediately after the
operation
19
Exposed earth is properly treated by compaction, turfing, hydroseeding,

vegetation planting or sealing with suitable surface stabiliser within 6
months after the last construction activity on the site
20
Any spoil, debris or material and silt are removed and the affected land
and areas are restored to the natural state
Vehicle Dust / Emission

21
Heights from which excavated materials are dropped during

loading/unloading are minimised
22
Three-sided roofed enclosure with a flexible curtain across the entry is

provided when dusty materials are discharged to vehicles from a
conveying system at a fixed transfer point
23
Surface of the areas within the site where there is regular movement of
vehicles are paved and any loose surface material is removed
24
Vehicles within the site are restricted to a maximum speed of 8 kph and
speed limit signage is put up at appropriate locations
25
Haulage and delivery vehicles are confined to designated roadways

inside the site
26
Materials transported off-site by vehicles are covered by tarpaulin, with

the cover properly secured and extended over the edges of the side and
tailboards
27
Dusty materials are dampened before transportation
28
Vehicle washing facility(ies) is/are provided at all site exist(s) to wash

away any dusty materials from vehicle body and wheels before they
leave the site
29
A hard-surfaced road between any washing facility and the public road is
provided
30
Wheel washing facilities are inspected, maintained and cleaned on a

regular basis
31
Vehicles are inspected regularly and well maintained to ensure that they
are operating efficiently and that exhaust emissions are not causing
nuisance
32
Vehicle engines are turned off when they are not in use
33
Settling silt/sediment in wheel washing bays is removed regularly
34
Any earth, mud and debris at the site exit is removed
A4-2


Implemented
Yes
No
Remark
Demolition Works
35
Any area in which demolition work takes place is sprayed with water
immediately prior to, during and immediately after the demolition
activities to maintain the entire surface wet
36
Impervious dust screens or sheeting is used to enclose the whole wall to

a height of a least 1m higher than the highest level of the structure being
demolished
37
Any dusty materials remaining after a stockpile is removed are wetted

with water and cleared from road surfaces
38
Use of enclosed chutes for dropping demolition materials to ground level

and the chutes are dampened regularly
39
If asbestos is found in the buildings or structure, special procedures as

detailed in the Code of Practice on the Handling, Transportation and
Disposal of Asbestos Waste must be followed
Drilling and Blasting

40
Spray water during breaking of rock or concrete
41
Areas within 30m from the blasting area shall be wetted with water prior
to blasting
42
Blasting operations are well arranged and appropriate precautions are

taken (e.g. use of blast nets, canvas covers and watering)
A4-3

Chapter 5 Air Pollution Control
Table of Contents
AIR POLLUTION CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Plant and Equipment Emissions ....................................................................................... 5-1

Best Practice to Reduce Emission.................................................................................... 5-2
Specified Processes ........................................................................................................ 5-2
Volatile Organic Compounds ............................................................................................ 5-4
Prohibition on Open Burning ............................................................................................ 5-4
HKCA Clean Air Charter .................................................................................................. 5-5
List of Figures
Figure 5.1
Application Procedure for Specified Process Licence ....................................................... 5-3

5.1
Plant and Equipment Emissions
5.1.1 Statutory Requirements

Under the Air Pollution Control (Smoke) Regulation,
dark smoke shall not be emitted continuously for
more than 3 minutes or more than 6 minutes in any
period of 4 hours from any chimney or industrial
plant. Dark smoke means smoke with intensity
equal to or darker than shade 1 on a Ringelmann
Chart.
Machinery commonly found on construction sites,
such as excavator, air compressor and bulldozer
fall under the control of this regulation.
An owner of any premises who operates any
chimney or relevant plant in such a manner
described above commits an offence and is liable:
(a) on first conviction, to a fine of $20,000 and in
addition to a fine of $100 for every 15 minutes
during the whole or any part of which such
offence is knowingly and wilfully continued; and
(b) on any subsequent conviction, to a fine of
$20,000 and to imprisonment for 3 months and
in addition, to a fine of $100 for every 15
minutes during the whole or any part of which
such offence is knowingly and wilfully continued.
Under the Air Pollution Control (Furnaces, Ovens
and Chimneys) (Installation and Alteration)
Regulations, diesel generators in a construction site
that are used as a fixed installation including standby generators for tunnelling works and bio-piles for
soil remediation have special control requirements
if they also met the following criteria:
The total diesel consumption of the generator
exceeds 25 litres per hour;
The total capacity of the generators is below 5
MW; and
The generators are not part of a Specified
Process.
Prior approval is required from EPD to install this
type of equipment. Application is free of charge but
must be made at least 28 days in advance of
commencing the related works.
The application should be submitted with an
elevation and plan view of the proposed installation
prepared by an Authorized Person (i.e. an architect,
engineer or surveyor on the authorized persons'
5-1
register kept under section 3 of the Building

Ordinance) or a Qualified Engineer (i.e. a registered
professional engineer in the building services, gas,
chemical, marine or mechanical engineering
disciplines under the Engineers Registration
Ordinance).
Under the Air Pollution Control (Fuel Restriction)
(Amendment) Regulation 2008, no person shall use
diesel fuel that has a sulphur content of more than
0.005% by weight or a viscosity of more than 6
centistokes at 40oC in any relevant plant.
5.1.2 Contractual Requirement
In accordance with ETWB TCW 19/2005, for landbased constructional plant driven by internal
combustion engines such as an air compressor and
generator, the Contractor shall ensure that the
smoke emission does not exceed Shade 1 on a
Ringelmann Chart continuously for 30 seconds at
any time.
Smoke includes:
dust or fumes, and
soot, ash, grit or gritty particles emitted in
smoke or steam.
Monitoring parameter includes:
Smoke density, and
Visual assessment by Ringelmann chart.
Ultra-low-sulphur diesel (ULSD) (defined as diesel
fuel containing not more than 0.005% by weight of
sulphur) shall be used in all diesel-operated
construction plant on most of Government projects.
This can help reduce the emission of sulphur
dioxide. Note that this contractual requirement
became a legal requirement from October 2008.
Exhaust fumes should be directed away from
sensitive areas such as where workers are present
or where there is an interface with the public.
Where the public can be affected by exhaust fumes
or smoke emission from any construction plant or
activities, the related activities shall be shielded by
an incombustible screen such as corrugated sheet.
The screen should be of at least 2m in width and
1.8m in height such that the emission source can
be effectively shielded.

5.2
5.3.1
Best Practice to Reduce Emission
The following practices can help reduce and control

emissions:
Construction Plant and Equipment
Switch off the engine of construction plant when
idling and place reminder notices near the
switches.
Implement preventive maintenance for plant
and equipment and maintain stock of regularly
required replacement parts.
Hire plant and equipment of adequate size and
power output. Do not overload the plant.
Use cleaner fuel such as ULSD in dieseloperated construction plant to reduce sulphur
dioxide emission.
Use power supplied from power utilities when
practicable (e.g. to replace generators).
Install catalytic converters or particulate traps
on plant exhausts to reduce soot emission.
Extend the exhaust pipe to point away from
sensitive receivers.
Erect screen to shield the emission source from
Site Office and Workplace
To improve environmental performance in the
workplace the following should be implemented:
Set a comfortable room temperature for site
offices.
Use high efficiency fluorescent tubes, e.g. T5
tubes or LED, for lighting.
Switch off air conditioning and lighting for
conference room and other functional room
when not in use and place reminder notices
near the switches.
Switch off unnecessary lighting and equipment
after working hours.
Arrange dedicated mass transport (e.g. shuttle
bus) or car pooling to remote projects to
minimize individuals need to drive to work.
5.3
Examples Relevant to the Construction

Industry
Cement Works
Works in which the total silo capacity exceeds 50
tonnes and in which cement is handled or in which
argillaceous and calcareous materials (fine dusty
materials) are used in the production of cement
clinker, and works in which cement clinker is
ground.
Concrete Batching Plant
Tar and Bitumen Works

Works of the following kinds in which the installed
capacity exceeds 250 kg per hour and in which: gas tar or coal tar or bitumen is distilled or is
heated in any manufacturing process; or
any product of the distillation of gas tar or coal
tar or bitumen is distilled or heated in any
process involving the evolution of any noxious
or offensive gas; or
heated materials produced from gas tar or coal
tar or bitumen are applied in coating or
wrapping of iron or steel pipes or fittings.
Specified Processes
The major stationary air polluting processes such

as power plant, incinerator, concrete batching plant,
which are classified as Specified Processes in the
Air Pollution Control Ordinance, are subject to a
more stringent emission control. A licence is
required for the operation of these processes under
Part IV of the Ordinance. The list of these thirty
processes and their definitions are contained in the
Schedule 1 of the Ordinance.
5-2
Bitumen Plant

Mineral Works
Works in which the processing capacity exceeds
5000 tonnes per annum and in which: Metallurgical slag; or
pulverised fuel ash; or
Minerals, other than moulding sand in foundries
or coal at electricity works.
are subjected to any size reduction, grading or
heating by a process giving rise to dust, not being
any works described in any other specified process.
5.3.2 Application Process

The application procedure for a Specified Process
Licence is shown in Figure 5.1.
Figure 5.1 Application Procedure for Specified
Process Licence
Complete of Form 1
Sent the filled Form together with

other relevant application
documents* to EPD for processing
The application process for a Specified

Process Licence requires at least 3 months.
Therefore, it is advised to submit the
application as soon as practicable to avoid
any delay to the subsequent construction
programme.
Notify public of the application by

placing advertisement in both English
and Chinese
Under Section 12 of the APC Ordinance, the owner

of the premises conducting a specified process
shall use best practicable means (BPM), to prevent
noxious or offensive emissions.
The EPD will also use the published guidance
notes when assessing a licence application.
The List of Guidance Notes on Best Practicable
Means can be found at EPDs webpage.
The application forms prescribed in the Second

Schedule to the Air Pollution Control (Specified
Processes) Regulations and guideline is provided
on the EPDs website.
A separate application form is required for

each process. If more than one process is
being conducted in the same premises
requiring a licence to be renewed, use a
separate application form for each process.
Obtain the Licence from EPD
* Relevant application document

include:
5-3
Application payment
Air pollution control plan (2 copies)
A block plan, drawn to a scale of
1:500 and prepared & endorsed by
an authorized person (i.e. an
architect, engineer or surveyor
whose name for the time being on
the authorized persons' register kept
under section 3 of the Building
Ordinance) (2 copies)
Schematic diagrams of process flow
prepared & endorsed by a qualified
engineer (i.e. a registered
professional engineer in the building
services, gas, chemical, marine or
mechanical engineering disciplines
under the Engineers Registration
Ordinance) (2 copies)
2 copies of Business Registration
Certificate (BRC) and Certificate of
Incorporation (COI) of the applicant

5.4
Volatile Organic Compounds
5.4.1 What are Volatile Organic Compounds?

Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) are organic
chemical compounds that have high enough vapour
pressures under normal conditions to significantly
vaporize and enter the atmosphere. VOCs are
present in paints and solvents and upon use, are
released inadvertently to the ambient air
contributing to photochemical smog pollution that
reduces visibility.
There are 51 types of architectural paints/coatings,
7 types of printing inks, 6 broad categories of
consumer products, 14 types of vehicle refinishing
paints/coatings, 36 types of vessel paints/coatings
and pleasure craft paints/coatings, and 47 types of
adhesives and sealants being regulated under the
Air Pollution Control (Volatile Organic Compounds)
Regulation.
Architectural paint/coatings are widely used in
construction site. The list of these regulated paints
and their corresponding limit of VOC content can be
found in Schedule 1 of the VOC Regulation.
It is the importers and manufacturers obligation to
comply with the VOC limit of the regulated paint.
The Contractor can help by switching to using zeroor low-VOC paint products.
5.4.2 Best Practices to Reduce VOC Emission
The following practices can help reduce VOCs
emission at construction site:
Painting work
Use water-based paint over solvent-based paint.
Use low-VOC content retarder or high pressure
water jet to remove old paint instead of using
high-VOC content stripping chemicals.
Adopt the little and often practice to prepare
paint on site. Paint can evaporate as VOCs
and be wasted.
Avoid spraying; where possible use brushes or
rollers for painting instead. When spraying is
necessary, use HVLP (high-volume lowpressure) spray guns to reduce the amount of
thinner and any overspray.
Consider the use of pre-painted items instead
of painting on site. Emission from the coating
of pre-painted items in a factory environment
can be more effectively controlled than spraying
on site.
5-4
Storage of VOC chemicals

Accurately estimate the amount of chemicals to
be used, do not over order.
Keep records of chemicals in stock to help
identify wastage.
Store chemicals in lidded, light-colour
containers in a cool place away from strong
sunlight.
Keep the lid on containers as much as possible
to prevent evaporation. Seal with adhesive
tape if necessary to store long term to prevent
vapour loss.
Avoid spills.
5.5 Prohibition on Open Burning

5.5.1
Air Pollution Control (Open Burning)

Regulation
Open burning means burning of any materials in
the open air without any enclosure nor any chimney
to direct the smoke away so generated.
The Air Pollution Control (Open Burning)
Regulation is introduced to prohibit open burning of
construction waste, the clearance of a site in
preparation for construction work, tyres, and open
burning for the salvage of metal.
5.5.2 Activities Exempted from the Regulation
The following activities are exempted from the
regulation.
burning of incense, candle sticks, joss paper for
ritual purposes.
fires for cooking of food such as barbecue for
amenity purposes se water-based paint over
solvent-based paint.
fires set for fire testing, training and education
by any Government fire fighting force or agency.
agricultural burning of materials grown on site,
solely for weeding, land disinfection, pest
control, or burning to make firebreaks in the
countryside.
open burning required for emergency situations
to ensure public safety.
5.5.3 Application for Open Burning Permit
If opening burning is required, application form
should be submitted to EPD for their approval. A
permit will be granted only if the Authority is fully
satisfied that there is no viable alternative to
achieve the purpose.

Practical Means to Prevent Illegal Open

Burning at Construction Site
In this section, the following practical means is
suggested to prevent illegal open burning at
construction site:
Establishment and contributions to targets:

To establish specific energy consumption and
air emissions targets, contribute to achieving
them, and to share good practices and air
quality expertise with their counterparts.
Refraining from carrying out prohibited open

burning activities.
Advise your staff and others to abide by the
regulation by disseminating tool-box talks.
Remind all staff and others not to repel
mosquito by burning of papers.
To be
proactive, good housekeeping should be
maintained to prevent mosquito breeding in
construction site.
Any waste should be properly disposed of at
landfills or recycled at a recycling plant with
emission control equipment.
Review and continual improvement: To

review and monitor energy efficiency/emissions
reduction results in a consistent manner, to
map
out
appropriate
strategies
for
enhancement and to report appropriate
information to all levels of management and
employees.
5.5.4
5.6 HKCA Clean Air Charter

The Clean Air Charter program was launched by
HKCA in August 2007. Participating organizations
and companies are expected to abide by the
following principles when they implement their
energy/emissions
management
system
on
construction sites under their stewardship.
Corporate
priority:
To
recognize
energy/emissions management as among the
highest corporate priorities; to establish policies,
programs and practices that make sustained
improvement to air quality on every site.
Integrated management: To fully integrate the

policies, programs and practices into each
business area as an important element in the
corporate management agenda.
Process of improvement: To improve the

performance of reducing air pollution of
participating projects, taking into consideration
technological
developments,
legislative
changes and community expectations.
Benchmarking: To use benchmarking as an

effective way of identifying areas that could be
improved and hence prioritized in energy
efficiency and emission reductions.
Training and promotion: To raise the

awareness and knowledge of all levels of
management and employees of the project
team on the Clean Air Policy by supporting
training initiatives.
5-5

Chapter 6 Noise Impact Control
Table of Contents
NOISE IMPACT CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
Terminology ..................................................................................................................... 6-1

Statutory and Non-Statutory Requirements ...................................................................... 6-2
Liability of Directors under the Noise Control Ordinance (NCO) ........................................ 6-2
Good Management Practices to Prevent Violation of NCO ............................................... 6-2
Construction Noise Source............................................................................................... 6-3
Construction Noise Permit................................................................................................ 6-3
Noise Emission Label (NEL) ............................................................................................ 6-7
Quality Powered Mechanical Equipment (QPME) ............................................................. 6-7
Noise Control ................................................................................................................... 6-9
Noise Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 6-14
Case Studies ................................................................................................................. 6-15
List of Tables
Table 6.1
Permitted Hours of Operation for Percussive Piling (Not involving the use of diesel,
pneumatic and/or steam hammers) .................................................................................. 6-5
Table 6.2
Provisions of Special Cases for CNP Application.............................................................. 6-6
Table 6.3
Sound Pressure Level of Some Commonly Used Quiet Plant 2 ....................................... 6-11
Table 6.4
Sound Power Level of Some Quality Powered Mechanical Equipment (QPME) .............. 6-11
Table 6.5
Sound Insulation Materials for Machine Enclosures ........................................................ 6-12
List of Appendices
Appendix 6.1
Flowchart to Determine the Need of a CNP for the use of PME ...................................... A6-1
Appendix 6.2
Sound Power Levels for Items of Powered Mechanical Equipment (PME) ...................... A6-2
Appendix 6.3
Summation of Noise Levels............................................................................................ A6-5

Noise Impact Control
6.1
Terminology
Acceptable Noise Level (ANL)

Acceptable Noise Level (ANL) is the term used in
Technical Memoranda for assessing a Construction
Noise Permit (CNP) application. The ANL is a level
determined by considering the location of a noise
sensitive receiver (NSR), duration of the CNP and
multiple permit situations.
Construction Noise
Noise associated with construction activities at:
Domestic premises (e.g. domestic renovations);
Public places (e.g. roadworks); and
Construction sites and other places (e.g.
renovation of offices).
Examples of construction activities include
installation,
construction,
alteration,
repair,
maintenance and demolition. This type of noise
also tends to be temporary and transient.
Excessive noise will lead to hearing loss and
mental stress and irritation. It can also interfere with
daily activities such as doing homework, watching
television and talking on the telephone.
Corrected Noise Level (CNL)
Corrected Noise Level (CNL) is the term used in
Technical Memoranda for assessing a Construction
Noise Permit (CNP) application. In general, it is
determined by considering the summation of SWL
of all PME, the distance and existence of
substantial barriers between the PME and NSR,
and acoustic reflection from the NSR. In normal
situations, a CNP may be granted only when the
CNL is found to be equal to or less than the ANL.
Influencing Factor
Influencing Factor (IF) for classification of Area
Sensitivity Rating (ASR) of an area.
As defined by the Technical Memoranda (TM) of
Noise Control Ordinance (NCO), any industrial area,
major road or area within the boundary of Hong
Kong International Airport shall be considered to be
an IF.
The term major road means a road which has a
heavy and generally continuous flow of vehicular
traffic and, in normal circumstances, means a road
with an annual average daily traffic flow in excess
of 30,000. Where a major road has an unusually
low traffic flow rate (< 300 veh./hr.) at the time of
day under consideration, it shall not be considered
as an IF at that time.
Noise Sensitive Receiver (NSR)
Noise Sensitive Receiver (NSR) means any
domestic premises, hotel, hostel, temporary
housing accommodation, hospital, medical clinic,
educational institution, place of public worship,
library, court of law, performing arts centre etc. Any
other premises or place, not being in the nature of
either industrial or commercial premises, which is
considered by the Authority to have a similar
sensitivity to noise as the premises and places
above shall also be considered to be a Noise
Sensitive Receiver. Any premises or place shall,
however, be considered to be a Noise Sensitive
Receiver only when it is in use for its intended
purpose.
Control of SPME and PCW will apply in a

Designated Area.
Powered Mechanical Equipment (PME)

Powered Mechanical Equipment (PME) is defined
under the Noise Control Ordinance as any machine
or device driven by electrical, chemical or thermal
energy including energy transmitted by compressed
air, steam, or hydraulic means; a principal function
of which is to produce mechanical movement. Items
of PME include generators, drills, breakers,
excavators and cranes. The use of PME during
restricted hours (between 1900 and 0700 hours and
any time on a general holiday, including Sunday)
within any Hong Kong territories shall be under the
Construction Noise Permit control mechanism.
6-1
Designated Areas
Designated Areas are areas that have further
controls imposed under the NCO. They are mostly
the urban areas of Hong Kong SAR and are set out
on plans held by EPD and available to view at
Regional Offices of EPD and at EPDs website. The
Designated Areas have been extended under laws
which will come into effect on 1 January 2009.

Prescribed Construction Work (PCW)

Prescribed Construction Work means the
construction work prescribed for the purpose of
section 6(2) of the Noise Control Ordinance. PCW
is:
Erection or dismantling of formwork or
scaffolding;
Loading, unloading or handling of rubble,
wooden boards, steel bars, wood or scaffolding
material; and
Hammering.
The conduction of PCW during restricted hours
(between 1900 and 0700 hours and any time on a
general holiday, including Sunday) within the
Designated Areas shall be under the Construction
Noise Permit control mechanism.
Restricted Hours
Restricted hours means the time between 1900 and
0700 hours on normal weekdays and any time on a
general holiday, including Sunday.
Sound Power Level (SWL)
Sound power level is a logarithmic measure of the
sound power in comparison to a specified reference
level. The sound power level is, generally, given the
symbol Lw or SWL and is measured in "dB(A)".
Specified Powered Mechanical Equipment
(SPME)
Specified Powered Mechanical Equipment means
those items of PME as specified in Table A.3 of
Annex A in the Technical Memorandum on Noise
from Construction Work in Designated Areas.
SPME are hand-held breaker, bulldozer, concrete
lorry mixer, dump truck and hand-held vibratory
poker.
6.2
Statutory
and
Requirements
Non-Statutory
Refer to Chapter 2 of this Guide with respect to the

Noise Control Ordinance (NCO) for details of
subsidiary
regulations
and
non-statutory
requirements.
6.3
Liability of Directors under the

Noise Control Ordinance (NCO)
There is a provision in the NCO that a companys

director may be liable for conviction under the NCO.
Under the NCO Section 28A, where an offence
under this Ordinance has been committed by a
body corporate, any person who at the time of the
offence was:
6-2
a director concerned in the management of the

body corporate;
a director who has delegated his authority for
the management of the body corporate to an
officer;
an officer mentioned in the second point above;
or
an officer:
- concerned in the management of the body
corporate; and
- acting under the immediate authority of a
director of the body corporate,
shall be guilty of the like offence.
Top management should implement good
management practice to prevent violation of the
NCO. A Code of Practice on Good Management
Practice to Prevent Violation of the Noise Control
Ordinane is issued by EPD providing general
guidance to the construction industry.
6.4
Good Management Practices

Prevent Violation of NCO
to
Good management practices to prevent violation of

NCO include:
Prepare and issue a Noise Control Policy
statement
Establish Management System to address NCO
issues
Establish noise management responsibility for
different levels of staff
Keep top management up to date on noise
control activities
Include noise control matters on the agenda of
top management meetings
Establish regular meeting to review construction
noise incidents
Top management to check and review noise
control activities to ensure compliance with
NCO
Prepare report to top management advising
whether noise concerns are properly addressed
Promptly notify top management of noise
incidents
Take actions to correct any noise incident and
non-compliance with NCO
Ensure top management is fully aware of the
implementation of corrective action
Liaise and communicate with affected
neighbours on an ongoing basis

If the main contractor is the CNP holder but

has handed over the site to a sub-contractor,
which party would then be responsible for a
noise offence spotted at the site?
Each suspected offence case under the NCO

should be considered on its own merits. EPD would
consider all available information to ascertain
whether there is any real non-compliance under the
NCO. Concerned parties should approach EPD to
provide all necessary background case information
where appropriate to facilitate the investigation of
any alleged offence.
6.5
If your works only involve manual works and do

not involve any PME or PCW, the works could be
carried out without a CNP.
If PME (e.g. generator for lights, electric
grinder/drill/water pump) is required, a valid CNP
must be obtained prior to commencement of the
works.
Construction Noise Source
6.5.1 Noise Generating Activities

Noise generating activities at a construction site
can broadly be grouped into:
i) General Construction Work, which includes the
use of PME and operation of PCW; and
ii) Percussive Piling.
6.6
Can I carry out some minor preparatory

works on Sundays, such as tiling works,
painting or wall plastering?
If your construction site is located inside

Designated Areas and the works involve PCW, a
valid CNP shall be obtained prior to
commencement of the works.
Use of PME or carrying out of PCW inside
Designated Areas without valid CNP is an offence
under NCO.
Construction Noise Permit
6.6.1
When is a Construction Noise Permit

Needed?
It is the statutory requirement under Section 6 of
the NCO that a CNP is required for the following
situations:
PME is used during restricted hours
PCW is carried out in a Designated Area during
restricted hours
Percussive piling is carried out
Flowcharts identifying when it is necessary to apply
for a CNP are provided in Appendix 6.1.
6.6.2 Construction Noise Permit in Force

The CNPs, which are in force, can be viewed from
EPDs website.
Checking the existence of other CNPs in force in

the vicinity of the site prior to application for CNP is
important. Any new CNP issued by EPD shall in
result increase the noise influence to nearby NSR(s)
such that the chance on getting additional CNP
from EPD would be reduced.
6.6.3 Application for a CNP
EPD provides guidance notes for CNP application.
Those notes can be viewed at EPDs website.
Percussive piling is prohibited during

restricted hours such that CNP will not be
granted by EPD.
Application forms can be downloaded from EPDs

website:
General Construction Work
Percussive Piling
CNPs can also be applied for through an on-line

application process.
6-3

Time for Application for a CNP

Under the NCO, EPD shall notify their decision of
the CNP application within 28 days after receiving
the application.
However, since 2004, EPD aims to handle CNP
applications within 14 days provided that the given
information is adequate and comprehensive.
Assessment tool for General Construction

Noise
Assessment tool for Percussive Piling
Case 1: General Construction Work - Site not

within a Designated Area
CNP is required for use of PME during
restricted hours
The acceptable noise level depends on the
area sensitivity rating of the concerned area
More details can be found from Technical
Memorandum on Noise From Construction
Work Other Than Percussive Piling
What information do I need to submit to

EPD apart from the completed application
form for CNP?
1 copy of Business Registration Certificate;

2 copies of the site plan(s) (preferably 1:1000)
showing the construction site and the noise
sensitive receivers;
2 sets of photograph (3R size) for each item of
powered mechanical equipment to be used (No
photograph is required for the application of CNP
for percussive piling); and
1 copy of the Noise Emission Label for any air
compressor and/or hand held percussive breaker
to be used.
What are the fees for the application or

renewal of a CNP? Can the fee be refunded
if my application is refused?
The fees required for the application of CNPs can

be found at EPDs webpage.
Case 2: General Construction Work Site within

a Designated Area
Apart from the use of PME during restricted
hours, the use of SPME and carrying out of
PCW are regulated at Designed Areas during
restricted hours
PCW is generally not permitted inside a
Designated Areas during restricted hours
For use of SPME, the Acceptable Noise Levels
are more stringent being 15 dB(A) less than
those listed in the Technical Memorandum on
Noise From Construction Work Other Than
Percussive Piling before a CNP may be
issued;
More details can be found from Technical
Memorandum on Noise from Construction Work
in Designated Areas
The effect of reducing the number of the

same plant items by half results in a 3 dB(A)
reduction in SWL
The fees for renewal of CNPs are the same as

fresh applications.
The fees are not refundable even if your
application is refused.
EPD have established self-assessment tools to

help applicants carry out a preliminary calculation.
The Contractor is recommended to assess the
construction noise level to determine the likelihood
of getting CNP before application.
6-4
Case 3: Percussive Piling

Under the NCO, Percussive Piling means piling:
By sinking or driving a pile by direct/indirect
hammering; or
By other percussive means including use of a
drop hammer, diesel hammer, double acting
hammer, single acting hammer, internal drop
hammer, pneumatic hammer, steam hammer or
other percussive device other than a device that

is portable and designed for operation while

held by hand without any form of support.
The permitted hours of operation for percussive
piling are shown in Table 6.1.
Table 6.1 Permitted Hours of Operation for
Percussive Piling
(Not involving the use of diesel, pneumatic
and/or steam hammers)
Amount by which CNL
exceeds ANL
Permitted hours of
operation on any day
not being a holiday *
10 dB(A) < CNL-ANL
0800 0900; and

1230 1330 and
1700 1800
0 < CNL-ANL 10 dB(A)
0800 0930; and

1200 1400; and
1630 1800
CNL-ANL 0 dB(A)
0700 1900
6.6.4
Factors Considered in a CNP

Application
The following issues will be considered by EPD in
assessing an application:
Other CNPs concurrently in force;
Whether the site is located within a Designated
Area (not applicable to PP-CNP);
The Area Sensitivity Rating (ASR) of the NSR
(not applicable to PP-CNP);
Whether the NSR is with/without windows,
other openings, central air conditioning system
(for PP-CNP only);
Noise generated by either General Construction
Work or Percussive Piling;
Any complaint history associated with the
construction noise; and
Any prosecution records associated with the
applicant.
6.6.5
*The Authority may vary the timing (but not the total duration)
of the permitted hours of operation if it considers that such
variation would be justified by the nature or requirements of
any NSR which may be affected or of the percussive piling
under consideration.
Issuing of a CNP for percussive piling will be based

on the results from the assessment described in
Technical Memorandum on Noise from Percussive
Piling.
If I use vibratory hammers for piling, do I

need a Percussive Piling-CNP for work?
No.
If you use a vibratory hammer for piling, it does
not involve the motion of driving a pile by
direct/indirect hammering. So you do not need to
have a Percussive Piling-CNP for the work.
If I use an excavator mounted breaker for

driving sheet piles, do I need a
Percussion Piling-CNP for work?
Yes.
The use of excavator mounted breaker for driving
sheet piles will involve percussive hammering
actions and you do need to have a PP-CNP for
the work.
6-5
Strategies for Successful Application of

CNP
The following strategies can help increase the
likelihood of obtaining a CNP from Environmental
Protection Department:
Surrender CNPs no longer in use. If you have
other valid CNP on hand that will not be used
concurrently with the new CNP being applied,
state it clearly in the application. This
information can help reduce the negative
correction for multiple CNP situations on ANL.
Check area sensitivity rating and correction for
multiple CNP situations from EPD to obtain upto-date ANL of the surrounding NSR.
PME will not always be used concurrently
throughout the entire construction sequence.
Try to break down the PME list into small
groups of equipment that must be used at the
same time. State clearly in the application that
different groups of PME will not be used
concurrently.
Minimize the working area so as to maximize
the distance from the nearest NSR.
The correct and exact boundary of the working
area should be defined clearly to facilitate the
Authority to assess the potential noise impact
arising from the construction activities
concerned. Any change in working area
boundary should be justified.
Take advantage of existing topographic feature
of the construction site. If there are large solid
objects in between the construction site and the
NSR such that none of the PME will be visible
as viewed from the NSR, take photos of the
situation and state it clearly in the application.

Construct an acoustic barrier or enclosure to

screen the PME. Take photos of the barrier/
enclosure and state it clearly in the application.
A negative correction on the noise level could
be gained.
Focus on mitigating the PME with the highest
SWL first.
Discuss your assumptions on noise correction
with EPD prior to submitting the application.
Special Case
or other topographical features.

Unavoidable
constraints on
working hours
(not applicable
to PP-CNP)
EPD has prepared a series of on line reference

materials and tools to facilitate the application of
CNP. For details, please refer to the web links as
below:
Demonstrated to EPD that the

quietest practicable working
methods (use of silenced PME,
acoustic screens) have been
exhausted.
Note: EPD may lay down additional
conditions in a CNP to restrict the
use of noisy road-breaking
equipment and other particularly
noisy work during certain time
periods.
Checklists
Guidelines
Examples
Level (ANL)
On line application of CNP
6.6.6 Special Cases
EPD may consider special cases for acceptance of
a CNP application. The provisions for special cases
are tabulated in Table 6.2.
Table 6.2 Provisions of Special Cases for CNP
Application
Special Case
Quiet working
method or
other special
factors for
PME
Quiet working
method or
other special
factors for
PCW
Descriptions
Use of Quality Powered Mechanical
Equipment (QPME) (see Section 6.8
for details);
Provide sufficient details of
particularly quiet PME or percussive
piling methods, e.g. a sound power
measurement report prepared by a
qualified person; or
Provide special noise mitigation
measures, e.g. enclosure or barrier
CNP may be granted for disposal of
rubble through plastic chutes as it is
considered as a quiet working
method; or
EPD is satisfied that location of the
work is effectively screened by
barriers, acoustic screens, buildings
6-6
Provide sufficient evidence to

demonstrate to the satisfaction of
EPD that carrying out the work
during restricted hours would cause
less public annoyance or
inconvenience than during nonrestricted hours.
Examples: there may be serious
interruption or disruption to road
user, rail or other forms of transport,
utilities (water supply, gas or
electricity, etc) or work governed by
tidal conditions.
The Contractor will need to demonstrate that

systems are in place to implement the above.
Tools to estimate the Acceptable Noise
Descriptions
Construction
work having
important
social
implications
Refusal to grant a CNP may not be

in public interest or granting of a
CNP may arouse considerable
public concern, EPD may refer the
matter to the Secretary for the
Environment for advice.
Designated
geological
difficult areas
(PP-CNP only)
EPD may consider a CNP

application to use diesel hammers if
the site is situated in Schedule Areas
2 and 4 in the Fifth Schedule of the
Buildings Ordinance (Chapter 123)
in which these areas are designated
as Geologically Difficult Areas.
A CNP may not be issued for construction work

which is to be carried out on or within a building
which is either:
A Noise Sensitive Receiver (NSR) either wholly
or partially in use for its intended purpose at the
time of the proposed construction work; or
Directly adjoining a building which is an NSR.
The sound power levels of different types of PME
taken from Technical Memoranda are shown in
Appendix 6.2.
6.6.7 Actions after Obtaining a CNP
After obtaining a CNP, the Contractor shall:
Strictly follow CNP conditions, e.g. the number
of equipment permitted to be used on the
construction site;

Strictly follow the time allowed to operate the

equipment;
Carry out the activities in accordance with the
conditions stipulated in the CNP, e.g. use of
noise barrier; and
Renew the CNP if it is expired before
continuation of the works; and
Establish communication channel with affected
neighbours (e.g. notify date and time of the
construction works and provide manned
complaint hotline to address concerns from
affected neighbours).
6.7.2 Application for a NEL

You should ensure that a valid NEL is available
before any items listed in Section 6.7.1 is used in a
construction site at any time. In fact, you do not
normally need to apply for a NEL, especially for
new equipment. The manufacturers or agents
normally had already applied for one during the
import of the equipment.
In case the original NEL is lost, a duplicate NEL can
be applied by completing a prescribed form:
Form for Breaker
Under the NCO, there is no statutory control

on the noise from general works during the
unrestricted hours (i.e. 7 am - 7 pm on
weekdays). Contractor should fully utilize
the unrestricted hours, which are less noise
sensitive. People living near the site have
the right of peace during night time and
holidays.
Form for Air Compressor

Form for Duplicate of NEL
6.7.3
If I have a CNP, but I have not fully utilized
the plant list permitted in the CNP. Can I use
a PME, with a lower sound power level, to
substitute the permitted PME which I have
not used?
It would be an offence if you use any PME that is

not on the list of PME permitted/specified under
the CNP. If there is any expected change in the
list of PME to be used, you can apply for a new
CNP from EPD. EPD would assess each
application of CNP on its own merits, and in
accordance with the provisions under the NCO.
After obtaining a NEL, the NEL shall be fitted onto

the equipment when it is being used in Hong Kong.
Do I need a second NEL if the noise of the

equipment deteriorates?
No. The NEL is good for the life of the equipment.

If the equipment is properly maintained and
operated, the noise should not deteriorate much.
Or else, the equipment is at fault and would need
to be repaired.
Some workers do not like to attach the NEL

to the breaker when it is being used. Can I
provide the NEL to EPD staff for inspection
afterwards?
EPD considers that the granting of a CNP is

an exception rather than the norm.
6.7
Actions after Obtaining NEL
The NEL should be put in a weather proof jacket

and affix it on the air compressor or the hand-held
percussive breaker.
Noise Emission Label (NEL)
6.7.1 When is a Noise Emission Label needed?

A Noise Emission Label (NEL) is required for the
following items when used in a construction site at
any time.
Any Hand Held Percussive Breaker weighted
above 10kg; and
Any Air Compressor capable of supplying
compressed air at 500 kPa pressure or above.
6-7
If the NEL is adhere onto equipment. Do not

detach it from the equipment even you find
it loosening. You may put it in a weather
proof jacket and reaffix it firmly onto the
equipment.

6.8
Individual items of equipment registered with EPD

as QPME will be issued with a QPME label.
Quality Powered Mechanical

Equipment (QPME)
6.8.1 What is QPME?

QPME is equipment that is recognized by EPD as
new, notably quieter, more environmentally friendly
and efficient.
Typically, QPME is:
certified to comply with the European Council
(EC) Directive 2000/14/EC;
issued with Low Noise or Super Low Noise
Emission Label by the Ministry of Land,
Infrastructure and Transport of Japan (MLIT);
complies with other equivalent or better
environmental standards; or
for a piece of equipment with years of services
(counting from the date of manufacture) less
than 6 years, the validity period of the first label
will be diminishingly apportioned in accordance
with Table 6.3 shown below; or
for those QPME with validity of labels to be
expired, the applicants may re-apply, within 6
months before the date of expiry, for the label
with the provision of the following documents to
demonstrate that the QPME still maintains with
quality noise emission complying with the
prevailing requirement implemented by the
relevant parties.
Table 6.3 Validity Period of QPME Label
Age of Equipment (i.e. years between
date of application and the date of
manufacture)
Validity Period
of QPME Label
(from the Date
of Issuance)
Less than one year of age since

manufacture
6 years
Over 1 year but not exceeding 2 years of

age since manufacture
5 years
Over 2 years but not exceeding 3 years

of age since manufacture
4 years

3 years

2 years

1 year
6.8.2 Application for a QPME Label

A QPME label for individual item of equipment can
be applied by submitting a completed application
form to EPD. The application is free of charge and
will be processed within 28 days. The following
documents should be submitted with the application
form: PME photos in hard or soft copy showing the
serial number, the CE and SWL marking for EU
equipment or the low noise/super low noise
emission label for Japanese equipment;
manufacturers documents showing equipment
model
type/number,
serial
number,
manufacturing location and the commissioning
date; and
either (a) EC Declaration of Conformity or (b)
Japan MLIT letter together with the relevant
noise test report/certificate attached.
6.8.3 Actions after Obtaining a QPME Label
If the application is successful, the equipment will
be registered into the QPME database and the
applicant will be assigned with a QPME User
Account.
User can login on to EPD QPMEs website with the
assigned User Account. Print out the QPME label of
the corresponding QPME on a piece of white paper
then laminate with clear plastic. Then, affix the label
to the corresponding QPME.
6.8.4 Merits of QPME System
The SWL for each of the QPME would be
recognized by the EPD for purposes of a CNP
application assessment. As the SWL of QPME is
normally lower than its traditional PME counterpart,
the relevant CNP application is more likely to be
successful.
The QPME system supports the "Pay for Safety
and Environment" concept of the Works Branch of
the Development Bureau. As from April 2008, the
capital expenditure on QPME can be deducted from
Profits Tax.
There are currently 12 types of equipment

commonly used in building work, road work and
general construction work that are included in the
QPME system.
From the communities' point of view, the wider use

of QPME would help reduce the noise from
construction works.
6-8

When replacing older plant, the Contractor should

consider the manufacturing standards of the new
plant as part of its procurement strategy.
6.9
Noise Control
A number of strategies can be adopted by the

Contractor to control noise resulting from its
activities.
Those
strategies
incorporate
administration, system and physical controls.
Examples of those strategies are provided.
6.9.1 Noise Policy and Programme
The development and implementation of a noise
policy and programme with the aim to: Minimize noise levels and annoyance to the
NSRs
Ensure adequate protection to the staff working
in excessive noise environments
Ensure compliance with all legislation so as to
promote a better image to the public and EPD
The noise policy may cover:
Goals for daily noise exposure levels (for staff
health) and peak noise levels in existing and
new work areas
Selection, hire or purchase of quiet plant
Noise controls in temporary noisy areas and
situations
Agreements with all staff in terms of
responsibilities for noise control and provision
of information on noisy processes
Periodic review of the noise control programme
A Noise Control Action Programme should:
Assign a person responsible for implementing
and monitoring the programme
Conduct a preliminary noise assessment to
determine whether the noise exposure level will
exceed the noise standards
Develop a programme for the selection of new
plant or replacement of plant which can further
minimise exposure to noise when necessary
Decide whether or not engineering noise control
measures are practicable and what priorities
should be given to different noisy situations
(refer to Section 6.9.2 and 6.9.3 of this Guide)
Decide suitable administrative noise control
measures (refer to Section 6.9.4 of this Guide)
Identify, with the use of appropriate signs,
hearing protection areas
Provide on-going training to employees for
noise control
Develop monitoring procedures to check the
effectiveness of the noise control measures and
6-9
that those measures are maintained in good

order and in position during operations
Maintain relevant records such as CNP, NEL
and noise monitoring records
Establish a patrol team to ensure legal
compliance
Implement best practice such as turning off
plant that is either with long idling or waiting
time
6.9.2 Source Control

Controlling or mitigating the actual noise source is
the most effective way of managing noise on the
construction site. Some examples of common
controls are described in this section.
Hand-held Breakers
Hand-held breakers should be:
Fitted with mufflers to minimise the exhaust
noise (sudden release of exhaust air) through a
longer exhaust passage and to reduce the body
radiated noise that originates from the cylinder
enclosure
Handheld percussive breaker attached with Noise Emission

Label
Mufflers can reduce exhaust noise and body

radiated noise by up to 15 dB(A) and 6 dB(A)
respectively.
Fitted with dampening layer with steel collars to
minimise ringing noise caused by the steel bit
vibration and to keep the damping material in
place and protect it from abrasion. About 3
dB(A) reduction can be achieved by using this
control.

Idle equipment should be turned off or

throttled down to reduce noise, emissions
and to save energy.
Excavator-mounted breakers
Excavator-mounted breakers are amongst the
noisiest items of general construction equipment.
To reduce noise from excavator-mounted breakers,
use of a hammer bracket (the bracket is made of
special alloy and the inside of it is lined with sound
insulation material). A noise reduction of up to 10
dB(A) can be provided.
Equipment with Internal Combustion Engines
Equipment with Internal Combustion Engines
include stationary and mobile plant, examples
include:
Stationary Plant: compressors, generators,
concrete pumps and welding sets
Mobile Plant: excavators, bulldozers, loaders
and dump trucks
The nature of the noise emissions relating to this
kind of equipment includes exhaust noise, cooling
system noise and engine noise. Control measures
for these include:
Exhaust Noise
- Install suitably designed exhaust silencers
Cooling System Noise (including noise from
water pumps, belts, pulleys and cooling fans)
- Replace poor fan blade design or damaged
fan blades with an aerodynamic model
- Install a contoured fan shroud or cowl with a
close fan tip-to-shroud clearance
- Remove all obstructions such as bars and
pipes from the inlet airflow
Engine Noise
- Installing a vibration isolator for individual
components to reduce transmission of
engine noise
- Installing specially designed partial or full
acoustic enclosures for individual noise
generating components. Partial or full
enclosures can result in a reduction in the
overall noise level of up to 5 and 10 dB(A)
respectively
- Apply damping material to vibrating panels
It is essential to regularly maintain and service all
mechanical plant and equipment:
6-10
Implement
a
preventive
maintenance
programme to ensure equipment is operating in
good order and not emitting abnormal noise
Make sure stocks of regularly required spare
parts are available
Piling
Typical noise sources for percussive piling include:
Ringing noise (radiated from the surface of the
pile);
Impact noise; and
Exhaust noise (created by the release of
pressurized gases from exhaust ports).
Control measures for piling include:
Use non-percussive piling techniques such as
pre-bore, vibratory hammers or hydraulic
hammer for driving steel piles.
Use resilient packing and dolly
- For percussive piling, the head of the pile
should be protected by a helmet fitted with
resilient packing over the top of the pile and
a dolly which cushions the blow of the
hammer.
Use of a shroud
- Enclose the complete pile and the pile
driver. The shroud should consist of a
robust framework fitted with an acoustically
designed cladding or acoustic panels.
- Alternatively, a flexible acoustic curtain of
appropriate thickness can be suspended to
enclose the whole length of the exposed
pile and pile driver.
Joint Cutter / Stone Saw
Noise mitigation measures that can be fitted to a
joint cutter and stone saw include:
A metal hood to screen the operator from the
machine;
Anti-vibration mounts between the engine/motor
and the support frame; and
A small pad supplied with water (for cooling the
blade) to serve as a viscous damping layer
between pad and blade.
Demolition and Concrete Breaking Works
Noise mitigation measures for demolition and
concrete breaking works include using nonpercussive equipment such as a hydraulic crusher
and quiet plant. The sound pressure level of some
commonly used quiet plant is shown in Table 6.3.
Hydraulic concrete cutter and crushers can
replace
excavator-mounted
percussive
breakers in demolition work resulting in noise

reduction of around 8dB(A). More information

with the construction industry on the use of
Hydraulic concrete crusher can be found from
the Housing Authoritys website.
Hydraulic rock drill with a SWL not exceeding

110dB(A) can replace conventional crawler
mounted pneumatic rock drill resulting in noise
reduction of up to 20 dB(A)1.
Quiet Construction Equipment for Road
Opening Works during Non-Sociable Hours are
given in ProPECC PN 1/96.
Sound Pressure
Level in dB(A) at 7
m from equipment
Modern Breakers (Mounted on

demolition robot)
89 91
Modern Saw (power wire saw,

or modern wall saw)
76 81
Kick Ripper, Saw - and lift

method
78 80
Bursting System
70 72
Hydraulic crusher (hand-held or

mounted on demolition robot)
67 69
Pipe Jacking
60 65
Non-explosive chemical agent

(for site formation)
60 65
Reference: Best Practice Guide for Environmental Protection

on Construction Sites, HKCA
Table 6.5 Sound Power Level of Some Quality

Powered Mechanical Equipment (QPME)
Sound Power Level
in dB(A)
102 116
Bulldozer, wheeled
110 114
Excavator, tracked/wheeled
93 114
Loader tracked
106 112
Loader, wheeled
104
Asphalt paver
101 112
95 113
Power rammer (petrol)
108
Compactor, vibratory
102 109
Crane, mobile
94
Generator
87 102
* Reference: Quality Powered Mechanical Equipment (QPME)

list from EPD, http://www.epd.gov.hk/cgibin/npg/qpme/index.pl?lang=eng
The noise reduction performance of those controls

depends on the materials, design, configurations
and distance between noise source and receivers
and between the noise source and the noise
barriers / enclosures.
Bulldozer, tracked
Roller, vibratory
6.9.3 Sound Transmission Path Control

Two common options to control sound transmission
path are: Noise Enclosures fully enclose the
equipment
Noise Barriers prevent sound path reaching
receivers
reference from BS5228:Part 1:1997
QPME
95 109
Disposal of rubble through

plastic chute is considered
as a quieter working
method for carrying out
PCW.
Table 6.4 Sound Pressure Level of Some

2
Commonly Used Quiet Plant
Quiet Plant
Road roller
6-11
Noise Enclosures
An enclosure can be constructed from a variety of
materials and the maximum achievable noise
reductions for some materials are shown in Table
6.4. To achieve desirable results, material with
superficial density/surface mass of at least
2
10kg/m should be used.
In addition to effective materials used, the
enclosure should also be so constructed and
maintained that there is no noise leakage due to
defects (such as gaps, poorly sealed joints).

and the sensitive receiver. However, sound will still

be transmitted at a reduced level by refraction and
reflection. Noise barriers are most effective when
they are placed close to the noise source.
Barriers can either be fabricated on site from readily
available construction materials or can be
constructed from proprietary acoustic panels to
achieve the maximum screening effect.
Depending on the material used and the design of
the noise barriers, an overall reduction of between
5 to 10 dB(A) can be achieved.
Carrying out of concrete breaking work inside noise enclosure
(Figure is extracted from BS5228: Part 1:2007)
Max. achievable
noise reduction
dB(A)
Superficial
density (Kg/m2)
Material
Thickness (mm)
Table 6.6 Sound Insulation Materials for

Machine Enclosures
Brickwork
113
220
35 40
Compressed
strawboard
50
17
28
Chipboard
18
12
26
Plasterboard
13
12
26
To ensure the noise barrier, is effective:-
Fibreboard
12
18
Plywood
21
Proprietary
product - Barrier
Composite
25
2.5
6-46*
Proprietary
product - Barrier
Composite
51
4.9
10-49*
It should be gap-free; even a small gap

or opening will substantially decrease
the noise reduction performance.
Special design should be applied to
mobile noise barriers to ensure that
there is no noise leakage due to different
positionings or settings (e.g. uneven
ground levels or frequent movements of
the equipment being shielded).
It should be of sufficient size and placed

close to the noise source such that the
direct line of sight from the NSR can be
completely screened.
Noise Barrier for Breaking Work
* reduction depends on frequency of noise

Remark: Actual noise reduction subject to design of
enclosure and agreement with EPD
Source: BS 5228:Part 1:1997 Table B-2.
Doors of an operating air compressor

should always be kept properly closed to
prevent excessive noise.
Noise Barriers
Noise barriers reduce sound transmission by
breaking the direct path between the noise source
6-12
A noise barrier is most effective when there is a

single noise source and it can be totally shielded.
However, there are likely to be several noise
sources at different areas within a construction site
and the noise barrier may not be able to shield the
noise completely from all these sources. If this is
the case, erection of a large barrier close to the
NSR may be considered such that the direct line of
sight from all the noise sources can be screened.

Alternatively, the barrier should be used to shield

the dominant noise source to maximize reduction.
6.9.4 Administrative Site Control

Apart from reducing noise through good
engineering, administrative noise control measures
can further reduce the noise impact from
construction sites. Those measures include:
Scheduling construction work carefully to
maximize any required noisy work during less
sensitive hours (e.g. lunch time, outside school
hours and avoiding exam periods), and for
unavoidable night works with a Construction
Noise Permit, carefully schedule noisy works at
locations close to any sensitive receiver so as
to minimize sleep disturbance
Minimising the cumulative noise sources from
various activities
Keeping residents informed of what is being
planned and do so that they are more likely to
accept the inevitable impact noise, resulting in
fewer complaints
Establish a communication channel (e.g.
manned hotline) to address concerns from the
affected neighbours, so that immediate
responsive actions could be taken to reduce
adverse noise impact
Limiting the time workers spend in noisy areas
by moving them to quiet work before their daily
noise exposure becomes excessive
Switching off noisy equipment when not in use
locating noisy equipment as far away as
possible from any NSRs
Selecting quieter equipment
Using electricity supply from public utility for all
machinery if possible, to avoid generator noise
Using stockpiles of earth as an additional
natural sound barrier whenever possible
Providing regular and effective maintenance for
all PME in order to prolong the life of equipment
as well as to reduce noise emission
Undertaking regular site supervision and
training to promote good site practice
unnecessary noise disturbance created from
shouting, colliding of materials or striking of
steel bars can be avoided
Taking care when loading and unloading
vehicles, dismantling scaffolding or moving
materials, to reduce unnecessary noise impact
Using alternative methods, such as a totally
enclosed conveyor belt system to avoid the use
of noisier plant such as dump trucks
6-13
Arranging
delivery
of
noisy/bulky
equipment/material to avoid disturbance to
surrounding NSRs and within permitted hours
Providing adequate planning with contingency
to ensure that lengthy operations e.g. concrete
pours, can be completed within the permitted
hours
Avoiding carrying out noisy operation in early
morning. Schedule such operation after 9:00am
as far as practicable
Fabricating units off site to minimise impacts on
site, when practicable
Planning routes for construction vehicles
carefully, to reduce noise to nearby NSRs
Maintain equipment in good condition. Using
lubricant to reduce noise impacts
Monitoring noise on site regularly. If there is an
exceedance, further mitigation measures may
be necessary
Maintaining a good security system especially
at the site entrance to avoid unauthorised entry
of workers in restricted hours
Setting up a restricted hours patrol team to
ensure compliance with the NCO.
Requesting sub-contractors to obtain prior
permission (e.g. through a permit-to-work
system) before carrying out work during
restricted hours
Seek professional advice on noise control
measures
6.9.5 Noise Calculation

Addition of sound pressure levels from noise
sources can be calculated by the following equation:
SPLi
n
SPL T 10log10 (10 10 )

i 1
where
SPLT
n
i
=
=
=
Total Sound Pressure Level

number of SPL acting together,
number of PME
Example 1
Addition of sound pressure levels of 2 PMEs;
SPL1 = 90dB and SPL2 = 95dB.
Method 1: by Equation
SPLT
= 10 log10(1090/10 + 1095/10)
= 96.0dB(A)

Method 2: by referring Table
measures such as noise barriers. An outline of the

typical requirements relating to statutory monitoring
is set out below.
Refer to Table A6.3.1 Summation of Noise

Levels attached in Appendix 6.3.
Difference in dB(A) between two noise levels to
be summed = 5 dB(A)
Instrumentation
Sound level meters need to comply with
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
Publications 651:1979 (Type 1) and 804:1985
(Type 1) (as referred to the GW-TM).
Amount in dB(A) to be added to the higher

noise level = 1 dBA
Total sound power level = 95dB(A) + 1dB(A) =
96 dB(A)
Other
noise
measuring
instrumentation shall be of
professional quality.
Example 2
Addition of sound pressure levels of N identical
PMEs each with SPLi dB(A)
Calibration Requirements
Immediately prior to and following each noise
measurement, the accuracy of the sound level
meter shall be checked using an acoustic calibrator
generating a known sound pressure level at a
known frequency. Measurements may be accepted
as valid only if the calibration levels from before and
after the noise measurement agree to within 1.0 dB.

SPLT
= 10 log10(N x 10SPL/10)
= SPLi + 10 log10N
Keep the noise sources away from sensitive

receivers as far as possible. Distance attenuation of
a noise source can be calculated by the following
equation:
Distance Attenuation = (20logD + 8)
where
D = Distance (m) between the noise source and the
point 1m from the faade of the receiver
Example 3
Distance between the opening of the noise source
and 1m from the faade of R = 6m,
Method 1: by Equation
Distance Attenuation = (20logD + 8),
= 23.6dB(A)
~ 24dB(A)
Method 2: by referring Table
Refer to Table A6.3.2 Correction Factors to Obtain
the PNL from Sound Power Level at Given
Distances attached in Appendix 6.3.
Correction is 24dB(A)
6.10
and
analysis
a comparable
Measurement Locations
When carrying out measurements at the
assessment point, the following requirements
should be observed:
For a building, the assessment point should
normally be at a position 1m from the exterior of
the building facade but may be at any other
point considered to be appropriate by EPD
For a place other than a building, the
assessment point shall be at a position 1.2m
above the ground, at a particular point
considered appropriate by Environmental
Protection Department
The construction noise levels shall be
measured in terms of A-weighting equivalent
continuous sound pressure level (Leq)
measured in decibels dB(A)
Measurement Parameters
The measurement parameters for different time
periods are set out below:
A-weighted equivalent sound pressure level over a
30-min, Leq(30min), should be used as the
monitoring parameter for the time period
between 0700-1900 hours on normal weekdays.
For all other time periods, when applicable, Aweighted equivalent sound pressure level over any 5min. period, Leq(5min), should be employed for
Noise Monitoring
Noise monitoring is often required to verify

performance such as under an EM&A programmes
or to validate the effectiveness of mitigation
6-14
comparison with the NCO criteria.

Other Requirements
All noise measurements shall be rounded to the
nearest whole dB(A), with values of 0.5 or more
being rounded upwards.
Noise measurements should be made in
accordance with standard acoustical principles and
practices in relation to weather conditions.
Some projects require baseline monitoring
on consecutive days (normally 14 days)
prior to starting the construction works. It is
advisable to check your Contract, Particular
Specification or Environmental Monitoring &
Audit (EM&A) Manual (if any) to confirm
requirements.
For a Designed Project, baseline monitoring
is normally required. It can be either
arranged by the Employer or through the
Contractor under the contract.
To avoid delaying the commencement of
construction works, baseline monitoring
should be arranged as soon as possible
once the award of the construction contract
is confirmed.
Should operation of a barging point be

classified as a construction work?
Operation of a barging point that is established for
provision of public fill exclusively to a particular
construction site or project is a kind of "construction
work". Its noise emission is controlled under section 6
of the NCO.
Should electric arc welding device be

classified as a PME?
Powered Mechanical Equipment (PME) is defined
under the NCO as any machine or device driven by
electrical, chemical or thermal energy including energy
transmitted by compressed air, steam, or hydraulic
means; a principal function of which is to produce
mechanical movement.
As the principal function of an electric arc welding
device does not involve mechanical movement, the
device itself should not be classified as a PME.
Nonetheless, if a diesel generator is used, the
generator is a PME.
Please note that the arc welder with cooling fan is to be
regarded as a PME since it is a composite device of
welder + fan.
If your project has an EM&A Manual, the

monitoring locations, numbers and
measurement frequency are normally given
in the manual.
When I need to work during restricted

hours, do I need to apply for a CNP if the
works do not involve operation of a PME?
If your site is outside a Designated Area and no PME is
used, then no CNP is required. If your site is within a
Designated Area and your works involve Prescribed
Construction Work (PCW), or use of SPME or PME,
then a CNP is required.
Consult your Environmental Team (ET)

Leader or Environmental Protection Officer
prior to commencement of the works if you
are not clear about the requirements.
6.11
Should operation of a concrete batching

plant be classified as construction work?
The production of concrete in a concrete batching plant
for sale or supply to clients of different construction
sites is similar to other industrial processes and its
noise emission is controlled under section 13 of the
NCO. If a concrete batching plant is established for
supplying concrete to a particular construction site or
project, its operation is a kind of construction work"
and its noise emission is controlled under section 6 of
the NCO.
Case Studies
Case 1: Sheet Piling Works

A silent piler has been used in a number of
projects for sheet piling works. The silent piler is a
hydraulic machine for vibration-free installation or
extraction of sheet piles. It operates by gripping
previously driven piles to provide reaction force for
pressing in the next pile As it involves no
percussive motion emission of impact noise are
reduced.
Innovations in material usage made this silent pile
capable of pressing in U piles, H piles, tubular steel
sheet piles and precast concrete piles. The pressin technology has also advanced into hard ground
subsoil where sheet piles can be installed into rocks
using an integrated auger.
6-15

Wire
saw
for
concrete
The photo is extracted from EPDs website
Super silent piler for sheet piling works

The photo is extracted from EPDs website
cutting
works
Case 2: Demolition Works

Use of hydraulic concrete crusher (HCC) in
demolition works is one of the potential solutions to
minimize construction noise impact. The working
principle is to crushing the element by hydraulic
closing actions of the jaws. Noise sources from the
crusher are mainly from the excavator on which the
crusher is mounted.
Hydraulic concrete crusher for demolition works
Case 3: Use of Wire Saw for Concrete Cutting

Modern wire saws for concrete cutting achieve a
16dB(A) reduction when compared to an excavator
mounted breaker.
6-16

Appendix 6.1: Flowchart to Determine the Need of a CNP for Percussive Piling or the use of
PME/PCW
Construction work planned?
Yes
Do your
involve percussive piling?
No
Is the construction site

within Designated Areas?
Yes
Will PME be used or PCW # be

carried out at restricted
hours*?
No
No
Will PME be used in restricted
hours*?
(App. 6.2)
No
Yes
CNP is not required
Yes
CNP is required
CNP is required
CNP is required
Complete Form
EPD 75(s)
according to TM1
Complete Form
EPD 74A(s)
according to TM2
Complete Form
EPD 74A(s) and
according to TM3
For details refer to Section 6.6.3
TM Technical Memorandum on Noise from Percussive Piling

2
TM Technical Memorandum on Noise from Construction Work Other Than Percussive Piling
TM3 Technical Memorandum on Noise from Construction Work in Designated Areas
*Restricted hours: The time between 1900 and 0700 hours on normal weekdays and any time on a general holiday
including Sunday
# PCW: Erecting or dismantling of formwork or scaffolding; Loading, unloading or handling of rubble, wooden boards,
steel bars, wood or scaffolding materials; and Hammering
A6-1

Appendix 6.2: Sound Power Levels for Items of Powered Mechanical Equipment (PME)
Identification Code
CNP 001
CNP 002
Description
Sound Power Level (dB(A))

3
Air compressor, air flow <= 10m /min

3
100
3
Air compressor, air flow > 10m /min and <= 30m /min
3
102
CNP 003
Air compressor, air flow > 30m /min
104
CNP 004
Asphalt paver
109
CNP 021
Bar bender and cutter (electric)
90
CNP 022
Batching plant
108
CNP 023
Breaker, hand-held, mass <= 10kg *
108
CNP 024
Breaker, hand-held, mass > 10kg and < 20kg *
108
CNP 025
Breaker, hand-held, mass >= 20kg and <= 35kg *
111
CNP 026
Breaker, hand-held, mass > 35kg *
114
CNP 027
Breaker, excavator mounted (pneumatic)
122
CNP 028
Breaker, excavator mounted (hydraulic)
122
CNP 029
Ballast tamper, hand-held (electric)
105
CNP 030
Bulldozer *
115
CNP 041
Conveyor belt
90
CNP 042
Concrete corer
117
CNP 043
Chipper, hand-held (pneumatic)
112
CNP 044
Concrete lorry mixer *
109
CNP 045
Concrete mixer (electric)
96
CNP 046
Concrete mixer (petrol)
96
CNP 047
Concrete pump, stationary/lorry mounted
109
CNP 048
Crane, mobile/barge mounted (diesel)
112
CNP 049
Crane, tower (electric)
95
CNP 050
Compactor, vibratory
105
CNP 061
Derrick barge
104
CNP 062
Dredger, chain bucket
118
CNP 063
Dredger, grab
112
CNP 064
Drill, percussive, hand-held (electric)
103
CNP 065
Drill/grinder, hand-held (electric)
98
CNP 066
Dumper
106
CNP 067
Dump truck *
117
CNP 081
Excavator/loader, wheeled/tracked
112
CNP 101
Generator, standard
108
CNP 102
Generator, silenced, 75 dB(A) at 7 m
100
CNP 103
Generator, super silenced, 70 dB(A) at 7 m
95
CNP 104
Grader
113
CNP 121
Hoist, passenger/material (pneumatic)
108
CNP 122
Hoist, passenger/material (electric)
95
CNP 123
Hoist, passenger/material (petrol)
104
A6-2

Identification Code
Description
CNP 141
Lorry
112
CNP 161
Paint line marker
90
CNP 162
Piling, diaphragm wall, bentonite filtering plant
105
CNP 163
Piling, diaphragm wall, hydraulic extractor
90
CNP 164
Piling, large diameter bored, grab and chisel
115
CNP 165
Piling, large diameter bored, oscillator
115
CNP 166
Piling, large diameter bored, reverse circulation drill
100
CNP 167
Piling, earth auger, auger
114
CNP 168
Power pack for hand-held items of PME
100
CNP 169
Power rammer (petrol)
108
CNP 170
Poker, vibratory, hand-held *
113
CNP 171
Planer, wood, hand-held (electric)
117
CNP 181
Rock drill, crawler mounted (pneumatic)
128
CNP 182
Rock drill, crawler mounted (hydraulic)
123
CNP 183
Rock drill, hand-held (pneumatic)
116
CNP 184
Road planer or miller
111
CNP 185
Road roller
108
CNP 186
Roller, vibratory
108
CNP 201
Saw, circular, wood
108
CNP 202
Saw, chain, hand-held
114
CNP 203
Saw/groover, concrete (petrol)
115
CNP 204
Scraper
119
CNP 221
Tug boat
110
CNP 222
Tractor
118
CNP 241
Ventilation fan
108
CNP 261
Winch (pneumatic)
110
CNP 262
Winch (electric)
95
CNP 263
Winch (petrol)
102
CNP 281
Water pump (electric)
88
CNP 282
Water pump (petrol)
103
CNP 283
Water pump, submersible (electric)
85
Classified as Specified Powered Mechanical Equipment (SPME). A more stringent Basic Noise Level is applied to the
different Area Sensitivity Rating for the use of SPME at the construction site in Designated Areas.
A6-3

Sound Power Level for Other Commonly Used PME

Identification Code
Description
CNP 005
Agitator (electric)
90
CNP 006
Air blower (electric)
95
CNP 031
Breaker, mini-robot mounted
115
CNP 051
Concrete burster
90
CNP 052
Concrete crusher, mini-robot mounted
94
CNP 053
Concrete crusher, hand held
97
CNP 054
Concrete pump (electric)
109
CNP 055
Concrete crusher, excavator mounted
103
CNP 056
Cutter, circular, steel (electric)
112
CNP 070
Dredger, suction
103
CNP 071
Drill, hand held (battery)
89
CNP072
Drill rig, rotary type (diesel)
110
CNP 082
Excavator, mini-robot mounted
94
CNP 105
Grout mixer
90
CNP 106
Grout pump
105
CNP 107
Generator, portable
100
CNP 131
Jig-saw, hand held, wood (electric)
99
CNP 172
Piling, vibrating hammer
115
CNP 173
Poker, vibratory, hand held (electric)
102
CNP 174
Power pack (diesel)
100
CNP 175
Power swivel
100
CNP 176
Paint line marker (low pressure)
87
CNP 177
Paint line remover
104
CNP 187
Road grinder (petrol)
108
CNP 188
Road sweeper
107
CNP 189
Road ripper, mini-robot mounted
97
CNP 190
Road ripper, excavator mounted
105
CNP 205
Saw, wire
101
CNP 206
Soil pump
103
CNP 284
Water jetting unit (diesel), silenced
94
CNP 285
Water jetting unit (diesel), standard
107
CNP 141
Lorry, gross vehicle weight > 38 tonne
112
CNP 142
Lorry, 5.5 tonne < gross vehicle weight < 38 tonne
105
CNP 143
Light goods vehicle, gross vehicle weight < 5.5 tonne
101
CNP 144
Lorry, with crane/grab, gross vehicle weight > 38 tonne
112
CNP 145
Lorry, with crane/grab, 5.5 tonne < gross vehicle weight <
38 tonne
105
CNP 067
Dump truck, gross vehicle > 38 tonne
117
CNP 068
Dump truck, 5.5 tonne < gross vehicle weight < 38 tonne
105
CNP 069
Dump truck, with grab, 5.5 tonne < gross vehicle weight <
38 tonne
105
A6-4

Appendix 6.3: Summation of Noise Levels

Difference in dB(A) between two noise levels being summed
Amount in dB(A) to add to the higher noise level
0 0.5
1.0 1.5
2.0 3.0
3.5 4.5
5.0 7.0
7.5 12.0
> 12.0
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
Table A6.3.2 Correction Factors to Obtain the PNL from Sound Power Level at Given Distances
Distance
(m)
Correction
(dB(A))
Distance
(m)
Correction
(dB(A))
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 16
17 18
19 21
22 23
24 26
27 29
8
8
14
18
20
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
30 33
34 37
38 41
42 47
48 52
53 59
60 66
67 74
75 83
84 93
94 105
106 118
119 132
133 148
149 166
167 187
188 210
211 235
236 264
265 300
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
This table is valid for distances of up to 300m. For distances greater than 300m, the EPD shall calculate appropriate
correction factors having regard to standard acoustical principles and practices.
A6-5

Chapter 7 Water Pollution Control
Table of Contents
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ................................................................................................ 7-1

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
Terminology ..................................................................................................................... 7-1

Main Source of Site Discharges ....................................................................................... 7-1
Wastewater Management ................................................................................................ 7-2
Wastewater Treatment Technology .................................................................................. 7-3
Design of Wastewater Treatment Facilities....................................................................... 7-7
Application for Licence ..................................................................................................... 7-9
Water Quality Monitoring................................................................................................ 7-11
Site Examples................................................................................................................ 7-12
Propriety Wastewater Treatment Packages .................................................................... 7-14
List of Tables
Table 7.1
Pollutant Load of Wastewater from Different Types of Construction Works ....................... 7-8
Table 7.2
Commercial Wastewater Treatment System Characteristics ........................................... 7-14
Table 7.3
Summary of Field Tests ................................................................................................. 7-15
List of Figures
Figure 7.1
Composition and Nature of Construction Site Wastewater ................................................ 7-2
Figure 7.2
Typical Flow of Construction Wastewater Treatment Process ........................................... 7-4
Figure 7.3
Design Parameters of Wastewater Treatment Facilities .................................................... 7-7
Figure 7.4
Determination of Necessity to Apply for a Licence ............................................................ 7-9
Figure 7.5
Application Procedures for Obtaining a Water Discharge Licence ..................................... 7-9
Figure 7.6
Commercial Wastewater Treatment Plant ...................................................................... 7-14
List of Appendix
Appendix 7.1
Site Inspection Checklist-Wastewater............................................................................ A7-1

7.1
Terminology
Any discharge or deposit (including waste,

wastewater and effluent), except the discharge of
unpolluted water into communal stormwater drain
and discharge of domestic sewage into communal
foul sewer system, is subject to the control under
the Water Pollution Control Ordinance.
Wastewater
It comprises liquid waste discharged by domestic
residences, commercial properties, industry, and/or
agriculture and can encompass a wide range of
potential contaminants and concentrations. In the
most common usage, it refers to the municipal
wastewater that contains a broad spectrum of
contaminants resulting from the mixing of
wastewaters from different sources.
For a construction site, it includes the contaminated
surface runoff and wastewater generated from
dewatering, cleaning activities and sewage.
Effluent
Effluent is an outflowing of water from a natural
body of water, or from a man-made structure.
Effluent in the man-made sense is generally
considered to be pollutted, such as the outflow from
a sewage treatment facility or the wastewater
discharge from industrial facilities. An effluent sump
pump, for instance, pumps waste from toilets
installed below a main sewage line.
Under the Water Pollution Control Ordinance
(WPCO), effluent means any discharge or deposit
subject to control. These include effluents from all
types of industrial, manufacturing, commercial,
institutional and construction activities.
discharge of suspended solids in water body will

increase the turbidity and affect aquatic organisms.
Oil and Grease
Oil and grease (O&G) is a parameter to measure
how much oily matter is in the water. Construction
activities seldom introduce O&G in water. The
main sources of O&G are spillage of oil and fuel
from storage and plant maintenance and food
waste from canteens.
Chemical Oxygen Demand
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) is a measure of
organic matter in water.
Such matter on a
construction site may include diesel and other
chemicals. Contamination of water with sewage
may also increase COD in water.
5-Day Biochemical Oxygen Demand
5-Day Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD5) is also
a measure of organic matter in water but
biodegradable part only. BOD5 in construction site
mainly come from food waste and sewage.
pH
pH is a measure of acidity. A low pH value is
associated with acidity while high pH value with
alkalinity. The pH value for neutral solution such as
drinking water is about 7.
7.2
Main Source of Site Discharges
Construction site wastewater can be divided into

trade effluent, sewage effluent and contaminated
surface runoff.
The major sources of these
wastewaters and their general nature are shown in
Figure 7.1.
Sewage/Foul Water
It is the subset of wastewater that is contaminated
with feces or urine, but is often used to mean any
waste water. "Sewage" includes domestic,
municipal, or industrial liquid waste products
disposed of, usually via a pipe or sewer or similar
structure.
Suspended Solids
Suspended solids (SS) is an indicator on how many
unsettled particulates are the in water, which also
affects the transparency of water. The major
source of SS on a construction site is silt. The
7-1

Figure 7.1 Composition and Nature of

Construction Site Wastewater
A beneficial outcome of reducing wastewater

generation includes:
Minimising the cost of installation and operation
of treatment plant; and
Conserving water resources.
Construction Site
Wastewater
Record and analyse the daily consumption of water at

individual water supply point
Trade
Effluent
Mainly
generated
from
On-site
cleaning
activities;
Groundwater
released
during piling,
foundation;
and civil and
building
works
General
Nature:
muddy water
pH varies
May contain
O&G
Considerabl
e amount of
COD due to
the SS and
O&G
Surface
Runoff
Main source
is from
Rainwater
which falls
onto the
site area
which runs
off the site
or needs to
be pumped
General
Nature:
silty water
pH (neutral
to alkaline)
Sewage
Effluent
Mainly
generated
from
Toilet
waste
Canteen
Effluent
Determine the point(s) with particularly high water

consumption rate
Identify the causes of large water consumption rate at

particular points
General
Nature:
cloudy
water
Moderate
level of
organic
matter
(e.g.
BOD5
and
COD)
High level
of E.Coli
May
contain
O&G
Determine whether there is any leakage or

uncontrolled use of water by comparing the water
consumption rate by self-monitoring and that recorded
in water bill
7.3.2
Installation of Wastewater Treatment

System
A number of factors should be considered when
determining what type of wastewater treatment
system is required in order to make sure that
discharge standards are met.
7.3
Wastewater Management
As a basic requirement, a Site Drainage

Management Plan, covering the collection,
treatment and disposal of effluent, should be
incorporated as part of the Environmental
Management Plan of the construction project
concerned. It should be prepared, regularly
reviewed and implemented under the close
supervision of qualified environmental site staff.
7.3.1
Minimisation
of
Generation
of
Wastewater
Water consumption on site should be monitored to
minimise wastewater generation. This can be
achieved by installing water meters to monitor and
control usage.
To identify opportunities to minimize water
consumption, the following flowchart can be used.
7-2
Considerations when selecting a Wastewater Treatment System on

Site
Those considerations are shown in the figure below.

Notes:
SS Suspended Solids
O&G Oil & Grease
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand
BOD5 5-Day Biochemical Oxygen Demand
Select the type of Wastewater Treatment

System to be used on site (refer to Field Tests
section on the practicality of different systems)
Determine the required capacity and location

of the system
Provide adequate drainage to collect

wastewater within the site
Ensure designated staff are familiar with the

operation of the system
Adjust the dosage of chemical used in the

system, whenever necessary
Ensure the effluent quality compliance to the

requirements of licence
Request technical support from the supplier,

whenever necessary

7.3.3 Reuse of Treated Wastewater

Treated effluent from the wastewater treatment
facilities can not only be used for water testing of
pipelines and non-portable water tanks, it can also
be reused for some construction operations, such
as wheel-washing and dust suppression. In doing
so, it is necessary to:
(a) Treat the wastewater properly before reuse;
(b) Provide temporary storage tank(s) for the
treated effluent, (beware of mosquito breeding
in the tank(s) and place mosquito warning sign
on the tank(s)); and
(c) Provide adequate drainage to discharge excess
treated effluent to avoid flooding.
Benefit
Water conservation
Minimise water bill and effluent surcharge
7.3.4 Management of Rainwater
Rainwater is, one of the major sources of
wastewater generated by a construction site, if not
properly managed. Rainwater can be a valuable
resource that when properly harvested on site
reducing the water bill. However, contaminated
rainwater will generate a large amount of
wastewater to be treated before it can be
discharged offsite.
The contractor is encouraged to make frequent
reference to the weather forecasting and rainstorm
warning features by the Hong Kong Observatory to
vigoroously prepare for any forthcoming adverse
rain fall conditions. The Site Drainage Management
Plan should be adjusted and proactive preventive
measures should be implemented to carter for the
possible huge influx of contaminated runoffs.
Rainwater Harvesting
For civil engineering construction sites, rainwater
harvesting system can be depolyed at strategic
locations such as a cascaded channel or temporary
site office roof to collect uncontaminated rainwater.
The rainwater harvesting system consists of piping,
water tanks and pumping systems to collect
rainwater and deliver it for use on site.
Pipework receiving
rainwater from
cascade channel
Pumping
System
Water Storage Tank
Rain Water Harvesting System
Rainwater Discharge
The temporary site drainage system including
perimeter channels, catchpits and pumping system
should be provided on site to divert contaminated
rainwater to wastewater treatment facilities for
treatment prior to discharge.
If heavy rainfall results in large quantities of
wastewater being produced at a
construction site, would the contaminated
water need to be treated before discharge?
Yes, all contaminated runoff is required to be treated
before discharge to meet the statutory requirements.
The Contractor should take all necessary preventive
measures, to avoid the contamination of surface runoff
e.g. covering stockpiles of materials with sheeting.
7.4
Wastewater Treatment Technology
Construction
site
wastewater
is
mainly
contaminated by interaction with soil and resulting
in high level of suspended solids and alkalinity.
Wastewater treatment systems deployed on site
are often required to remove suspended solids and
to neutralize alkaline water.
7.4.1
General Design of a Wastewater

Treatment System for Construction
Sites
The typical flow of the construction wastewater
treatment process is shown in Figure 7.2.
All wastewater on site will first be collected to a
reception tank or catchpits via the site drainage
system such as perimeter channels.
The collected wastewater is then pumped to a
primary sedimentation tank for preliminary
sedimentation. Part of the suspended solids will be
removed in catchpits and primary sedimentation
tank. Primary tanks also enable the flow to be
7-3

balanced to prevent irregular water flow to the main

treatment tanks.
Wastewater is then pumped to chemical-enhanced
sedimentation tanks for further treatment.
Coagulant such as polyaluminium chloride and
polyacrylamide is added to wastewater for further
removal of suspended solids.
7.4.2 Reception Tank

A reception tank in the form of an underground tank
or catchpit is primarily used to collect wastewater
from the site.
The size and numbers of tank should be sufficient
to hold the site wastewater and rainwater for
diversion to the primary sedimentation tank without
it overflowing out of the site.
After removal of suspended solids, the wastewater

will be diverted through a neutralization tank to
reduce the alkalinity (pH) by adding acid such as
sulphuric acid or citric acid.
Figure 7.2 Typical Flow of Construction
Wastewater Treatment Process
Influent
Reception Tank / Catchpits
An Underground Tank Used as a Reception Tank
7.4.3 Primary Sedimentation Tank

A primary sedimentation tank is used to remove
large particle size settleable solids. Although the
sedimentation efficiency is not high, those tanks are
inexpensive and easy to relocate to different
locations when required.
Primary Sedimentation Tank
The longer the hydraulic retention time (HRT), the

higher the settling efficiency, but the space
requirement of the treatment plant will increase.
From field tests carried out at local construction
sites, primary sedimentation tank designed for 30 to
50 minutes HRT can achieve satisfactory
sedimentation performance.
Chemical-Enhanced Mixing and

Final Sedimentation Tank
Neutralization Tank
Effluent
Primary Sedimentation Tank
7-4

The following figure shows a three-chamber

primary sedimentation tank. In this setting, part of
suspended solids will be removed when wastewater
is passing through from Chamber 1, 2 and then 3.
Primary sedimentation tanks can reduce the
suspended solids entering the later components of
the treatment system, in particular the more
sophisticated final sedimentation tank.
The
sedimentation efficiency of this type of tank is
higher but may require more frequent removal of
sludge.
Chamber
1
Sludge
Zone
Chamber
2
Sludge
Zone
Chamber
3
Sludge Zone
Three-chamber Primary Sedimentation Tank
7.4.4 Chemical-enhanced Sedimentation

The efficiency of suspended solids removal by the
primary sedimentation tank itself is usually very low,
especially with very small particles and the
discharge limit cannot be met.
To enhance suspended solids removal, chemicals
can be added as an aid to the physical
sedimentation process.
Coagulation and flocculation may be achieved by
adding coagulant and flocculent chemicals
respectively to the wastewater treatment system.
Chemical Enhanced Mixing Tank
Key design parameters:

Chemicals: The common coagulant is
Polyaluminium Chloride (or PAC, alum) and
flocculant is Polyacrylamide (or PAM, polymer).
Coagulant Dosage: Normally at 5% to 10%
concentration is available market. Dosage is
normally at 40 ppm to design the dosing pump.
Flocculant Dosage: Normally at 0.2% to 2%
concentration is available market. Dosage is
normally at 2 ppm to design the dosing pump.
Mixing: Static mixers include baffled piping,
baffled channel or hydraulic jumps; mechanical
mixers include paddle, turbine or propeller. The
mixers may be installed either in-line or in a
separate small basin.
7.4.5 Final Sedimentation
After mixing the wastewater with chemicals,
sufficient hydraulic retention time should be allowed
in the final sedimentation tank for the enhanced
sedimentation process.
To achieve better mixing performance, the chemical

should be added at the inlet of the mixing tank.
A tube / plate settler is one common configuration

used in the final sedimentation process. The
settlers are shallow settling devices consisting of
stacked off-set trays or bundles of small plastic
tubes. They are used to enhance the settling
characteristics of the sedimentation tank. The
settlers are inclined in order to promote selfcleaning. Wastewater passes upward through the
tube/plate modules and exits from the tank above
the modules. The solids that settle out within the
tubes or plates move downward by means of
gravity and out of the tube modules to the tank
bottom.
7-5
Coagulation refers to feeding of chemical

coagulants into wastewater to form microfloc
particle. Flocculation refers to the process of gently
mixing the smaller particles to contact with each
other to form larger particles called flocs. Large
flocs are then settled in a sedimentation tank.

Clarified
Liquid
Influent
Settled solids
discharged
from tube
Tube Settler for Final Sedimentation

Common tube size: Ranges from 30 mm to 50
mm with a hexagonal cross-section.
Angle of inclination: The angle is usually set
between 45 and 60 above horizontal. Sludge
will tend to accumulate within the plates or
tubes if the angle is less than 45. The sludge
removal efficiency will decrease if the angle is
above 60.
The discharge standard to a storm drain of
30 mg/L for Suspended Solids appears to be
very stringent. What is the rationale behind
this?
The permissible discharge standards are determined
for each discharger by making reference to the
Technical Memorandum issued under the WPCO. It
takes into consideration the location of the site and the
maximum flow rate of the effluent discharge as well as
the water quality objectives that need to be achieved in
the receiving water body.
7.4.6 Neutralization
The permitted range of effluent pH value (usually
from 6 to 9) is stipulated in the Discharge Licence.
On a construction site, wastewater is usually
alkaline due to contamination with cement from
concrete and grout. Therefore neutralization with an
acid is required using a pH neutralization tank.

HRT: 10 15 min. with mixer speed of 200 rpm.
Acid Dosing: Either Sulphuric acid (H2SO4) at
10% to 20% concentration or citric acid at 50%
concentration should be adopted. The weaker
Citric action is preferable from a safety and
toxicity perspective. Dosage is normally set at
400 ppm for design of the dosing pump.
pH sensor: A pH sensor is used to measure the
pH value. It should have a submersible fitting
and sufficient length of cable.
Choice of Acids for Neutralization
Although sulphuric acid is inexpensive

and very effective in neutralizing alkaline
construction site waste water, it is a
strong acid that is corrosive and toxic.
Sulphuric acid should be handled very
carefully to avoid potential safety
hazard.
Citric acid is a better alternative as it is a

relatively weak acid with less toxic
characteristics.
7.4.7
Maintenance of Wastewater Treatment

Facilities
Trained personnel should be engaged to properly
operate and maintain all wastewater treatment
facilities. Such operational and maintenance works
include:
Removal of sand and silt deposited on water
channels and catchpits.
Repairing and replacement of damaged water
hose.
Removing sludge from wastewater treatment
plants.
Replenishment of coagulant and neutralisation
agent.
Calibration of pH sensor of neutralization tank.
Monitoring and testing of effluent.
Standby equipment should be available on site or
alternative arrangements should be planned to
guard against failure of major treatment equipment.
pH Neutralization Tank
7-6

The Licencee should notify and explain to

EPD within 24 hours upon the occurrence of
an accidental discharge, any emergency
bypass, an overflow of untreated
wastewater or an operation failure which
places the discharge in a temporary state of
non-compliance with the discharge licence.
The Licencee should also within 7 days
following the incident, submit to EPD a
detailed report in writing on the cause and
duration of the non-compliance and steps
taken or to be taken to reduce, eliminate, or
prevent recurrence of such non-compliance.
7.5
Design of Wastewater Treatment

Facilities
Wastewater treatment facilities include temporary

site drainage and wastewater treatment plants. A
number of parameters should be considered during
the design of wastewater treatment facilities as
shown in Figure 7.3.
Figure 7.3 Design Parameters of Wastewater
Treatment Facilities
Determine
Wastewater Flow
To reduce the amount of rainwater that may run on

to the site, the rainwater channels entering the site
should be diverted at the beginning of the
construction work and the hoarding sealed at its
base.
Groundwater
Groundwater is another source of wastewater,
especially for civil engineering and foundation
construction works. The amount of groundwater
depends on the geological characteristics of the site.
Contamination of groundwater can be prevented by
in-situ pumping out of the water so as to avoid
disturbing the water thus reducing the pollutant load.
Wastewater from construction activities
The flow of wastewater from different types of
construction works vary.
In general, the
wastewater flows for civil and foundation works are
much higher then building construction works.
Wastewater will be generated from different
activities such as wheelwashing, cleaning and
concreting curing. Construction wastewater should
be reused or recycled as far as practicable to
reduce flow.
7.5.2 Temporary Drainage Layout
In designing the temporary drainage layout, the
following items should be considered:
Determine temporary
Drainage Layout
Site logistics
The temporary site drainage should be arranged
through the entire site area such that all the
wastewater can be collected and delivered to
treatment facilities.
Determine Pollutant
Load
Determine Type and

Size of Wastewater
Treatment Plant
7.5.1 Wastewater Flow

In determining the wastewater flow, the following
aspects should be considered:
Rainfall
Rainfall is one of the significant sources of
wastewater if it is contaminated by soil on site. In
estimating the amount of rainfall, the catchment
area of the construction site should be measured
and the statistical figure on average rainfall
obtained from the Hong Kong Observatory for
determination of rainwater to be received on site.
7-7
Temporary water channels and catchpits should be

constructed on site to effectively divert site
wastewater to wastewater treatment facilities. In
general, construction of perimeter U-channels
surrounding the site area is recommended so as to
avoid site wastewater running off to outside site
area.
Catchpits should be constructed at low points of the
site with water pumps deployed as necessary to
convey collected site wastewater to wastewater
treatment facilities.
Site topography and existing drainage
The advantage of site topography and existing
drainage should be taken such that the wastewater

can flow by gravity or via existing drainage thereby

reducing the construction of new temporary
drainage and the need to use pumping systems.
Manholes of communal storm drains and foul drains
within the site boundary should be identified and
protected by bunding or temporary sealing to avoid
site wastewater from accidentally entering the
manholes.
Location of discharge points
Discharge points should be identified within the site
area.
Wastewater treatment plant should be
located near the discharge points such that treated
water can be discharge offsite immediately without
recontamination.
Manholes of communal storm drain near
wastewater
treatment facilities should
be
designated as Discharge Point for discharge of
treated wastewater. In case there is no manholes
of communal storm drain inside site area, the
nearest gullies of communal storm drain on public
road may be designated as Discharge Point for the
purpose of Licence application.
The discharge point should have the facility to be
able to take water samples to assess legal
compliance.
7.5.3 Pollutant Load
The amount of pollutants present in the wastewater
depends on a number of factors including the type
of construction works, construction programme and
supporting activities at the site:
Table 7.1 below shows the general properties of
wastewater from different types of construction
works.
Table 7.1 Pollutant Load of Wastewater from
Different Types of Construction Works
Civil
Foundation
Building
SS content
Silty
Muddy
Silty
pH
Neutral to
Alkaline
Alkaline
Alkaline
Pollutants from other sources of wastewater such

as on-site plant maintenance and municipal
wastewater should be considered. Wastewater
from toilets and canteens should be collected
separately and discharge to a foul sewer upon
obtaining consent from Drainage Services
Department so as to reduce pollutant load for
treatment. Connection to existing communal foul
sewer is not always available. In many cases, use
of chemical toilets and tankering away of sewage is
more practical. Use of on-site sewage treatment
and disposal facilities could also be considered if
situation and resources permit.
Note that sewage can also be treated through
proprietary
sewage
treatment
plants
and
discharged to a communal drain under a Water
Discharge Licence.
7.5.4 Type and Size of Wastewater Treatment
Plant
The type and size of wastewater treatment plant
should be determined based on the wastewater
flow rate and type of pollutant.
For silty wastewater and low flow (<10m 3/h),
traditional sedimentation tank may be sufficient.
For muddy wastewater and higher flow rate
3
(>10m /h), chemically enhanced sedimentation tank
should be used. Coagulant and flocculant chemical
is added to increase the degree of removal of
suspended solid by enhancing the sedimentation
process.
For wastewater with pH value exceeding 6-9,
additional pH adjustment tank should be coupled
with sedimentation tank for treatment.
There is a specific capital expenditure deduction
under the Revenue Ordinance on environmentfriendly machinery and equipment in the year of
purchase. For details, please refer to Revenue
Ordinance 2008.
The construction programme should be reviewed to

determine the types of activities running
concurrently to give an indication of the maximum
likely pollutant load and type.
7-8

Washing slurry from concrete lorry mixer is

one of the major sources of construction site
wastewater. Such washing slurry is normally
high in alkalinity and suspended solids. As a
best practice, the Contractor should prepare
containers of sufficient size, such as lined
sump pit on ground for large civil site or
metal bins for small building site, at
designated concrete lorry mixer washing
area to receive the washing slurry. After
settling of the slurry, the residual water
should be diverted to wastewater treatment
plant for treatment while the hardened
concrete should be broken down and
disposed of as inert C&D materials.
7.6
Who should apply for WPCO Licence?

Both the Main Contractor and the Sub-contractor can
apply for a discharge licence. According to S.19 of the
WPCO, either the person who makes or authorizes the
discharge; or the owner or occupier of the premises
from which the discharge is made, can apply for the
licence. It should be noted however that even if the
Sub-contractor is the licensee, the Main Contractor
cannot evade their legal liability for causing an illegal
discharge, if any, as they have overall control over the
site.
As a best practice, Main Contractor should apply for
WPCO licence for all the works and areas under his
control.
Application for Licence
This is a statutory requirement under the WPCO

that an effluent discharge licence should be applied
for and obtained from EPD before a new discharge
can start. Figure 7.4 shows the determination of
the necessity to apply for a licence.
Figure 7.4 Determination of Necessity to
Apply for a Licence
The application procedure for obtaining a licence is

shown in the figure below.
Figure 7.5 Application Procedures for
Obtaining a Water Discharge Licence
Completion of Form A
Construction Site Wastewater

Notification to
Public(upon request by
EPD)
Trade Effluent
(including
contaminated
surface runoff)
Discharge to
Foul Sewer or
Storm Drain or
Watercourses
after
appropriate
treatment
Obtain the Licence

from EPD
Sewage Effluent
Discharge to
Storm Drain or
Watercourses
after
appropriate
treatment
Need to Apply for a Licence
7.6.1 Completion of Form A

Application for a licence should be made by
completing Form A and submitting it to EPD. The
same form is used for renewing or varying the
licence.
Discharge to
Foul Sewer
Form A can be obtained from the EPDs website.
The form should be duly completed and provide

information like the volume of effluent discharge,
intended discharge points as specified in the
drainage layout plan and the details of the on-site
wastewater treatment & disposal facilities.
No Need to
Apply for a
Effluent
Discharge
Licence
The completed form should be submitted with the

following documents:
Copies of Business Registration Certificate or
Certificate of Incorporation
Estimation of water flow (Refer to Section 7.5.1)
7-9

Drainage Layout Plan (Refer to Section 7.5.2)
7.6.2 Notification to Public

Public notification is required for making a
discharge directly into the waters of Hong Kong
such as to any river or Victoria Harbour. Notification
means a notice published in English and Chinese
newspapers at the Contractors own expense; the
objection period for the public is 30 days from the
date of notification.
7.6.3 Obtain the Licence from EPD
For new applications, a Licence will be issued
earlier than 40 days after the notification if
objection is received. For applications that do
require public notification, the licence will
granted in about one month.
not
no
not
be
EPD would make reference to the Technical

Memorandum in fixing the conditions of effluent
discharge in the licence. EPD would not normally
impose conditions that are more stringent than
those in the memorandum.
Three important parameters will be described in the
licence:
Maximum Daily Discharge Amount
The licence will consider the information provided
by the applicant to grant the maximum daily amount
of effluent to be discharged.
Effluent Discharge Limit
EPD will consider the construction work to
determine the potential determine and(s) (e.g. pH,
suspended solids and COD) and specify the
discharge limit for the relevant parameters.
Normally, the limit will refer to the Technical
Memorandum.
Monitoring Programme
The licence will specify the required monitoring
work, e.g. collect effluent sample every month,
carry out laboratory analysis of suspended solids
and submit the result to EPD.
The effluent discharge licence granted under the
WPCO is site specific. On the other hand, an
effluent discharge licence may cover multiple
sources of effluents with different discharge points.
The contractor should provide the relevant effluent
discharge information in the licence application
form. If there is any change in discharge condition,
7-10
the contractor should approach EPD for variation of

licence where necessary.
More information concerning the control of
wastewater discharges and basic guidelines for
handling and disposal of construction site discharge
can be referred to the following documents
published by EPD:
A Guide to the Water Pollution Control
Ordinance
Technical Memorandum on Standards for

Effluent Discharged into Drainage and
Sewerage Systems, Inland and Coastal Waters
Practice Note for Professional Person

ProPECC PN1/94 on Construction Site
Drainage
7.6.4 Variation of the Licence Conditions

If there is any change in the effluent discharge,
such as change of flow rate, effluent quality and
discharge point(s), an application for variation of the
licence should be made to EPD.
To avoid variation of licence conditions, flexibility of
discharge details such as numbers and locations of
discharge point should be stated in the original
application, for example the discharge point may be
any communal stormwater drain adjacent to the site.
In applying for a variation, Section D of Form A
should be completed and submitted to EPD. It
takes about 30 days for the application to be
processed.
7.6.5 Renewal of the Licence
The Licence usually has 5 years validity so renewal
is rarely required. If the construction extends
beyond the expiry date of the Licence, make an
application to EPD for renewal of the licence at
least 2 months and not more than 4 months before
the expiry date of the licence.
The same
application procedures set out in Figure 7.5 should
be followed.
7.6.6 Licence Withdrawal
It is recommended that the Contractor advises EPD
at the end of the defects liability period that the
licence is no longer required.

7.7.2 Routine Water Quality Visual Checking

As good practice, a daily visual check of the
discharge effluent quality should be carried out.
Would a less stringent standard be applied

to a construction site when the effluent is
discharged into a foul sewer?
Generally, yes. The standard is stipulated in the
Technical Memorandum issued under the WPCO.
Nonetheless, the Contractor should always collect the
wastewater generated and may still need to provide
proper treatment before discharging into the sewer.
More importantly, approval from the Drainage Services
Department (DSD) should be sought for any discharge
to a foul sewer. It can be done by sending a letter to
DSD requesting for a consent. The Contractor should
minimize the quantity of wastewater to be discharged to
avoid overloading the sewerage system.
To obtain representative turbidity for visual

comparison, the standard solution should be
prepared using silt or grit to simulate the source of
SS in construction site. This standard solution may
be purchased from commercial laboratory at a cost
of about HK$100.
Important Reminders
7.7
The turbidity of the discharge effluent should be

visually checked against a standard solution made
with the licence-permitted discharge concentration
of suspended solids. If the discharge effluent
sample looks more turbid than the standard solution,
it is a good indication that the suspended solids
concentration of the discharge effluent exceeds the
licence requirement.
Apply for a discharge licence before

making a discharge
Strictly adhere to the conditions of the

licence to avoid prosecutions.
Understand the wastewater

characteristics (e.g. pH, suspended
solids, COD etc.)
Plan ahead and install site drainage

including channels, catchpits and
wastewater treatment plant
Minimize wastewater generation
Use suitable wastewater treatment

technology
Operate, regularly maintain and repair

the wastewater treatment facilities using
trained and experienced staff
Conduct regular sampling based on

licence requirement as a minimum
The pH value of the discharge effluent should also

be checked using universal indicator paper daily to
ensure the pH value of the discharge water does
not deviate from the licence requirement.
Water Quality Monitoring
To ensure the quality of the effluent discharged

complies with licence requirements, regular water
quality monitoring should be carried out.
7.7.1 Monitoring required by Licence
The Effluent Discharge Licence usually includes
conditions on water monitoring requirement. The
licensee should take a water sample at the
specified sampling point and have the sample
tested by a HOKLAS Accredited Laboratory. The
analysis report for the required water quality
parameters (usually suspended solids, pH and
chemical oxygen demand) should be kept in the
project records and may need to be submitted to
EPD in accordance with the licence condition.
7-11

7.8
Site Examples
Good Practices
Bad Practices
Temporary Drainage
Drainage is kept clean and tidy
Drainage is blocked by rubbish
Sandbag barrier is erected to protect temporary drainage

channel
Temporary drainage channel is not constructed, leading to

discharge of untreated wastewater
Site Exit
Wheel-wash facility with washing bay and trough to retain

washed sand/dust
7-12
Washing bay and trough are not provided for wheel-wash.

Wastewater may enter into storm drains directly causing
blockages

Good Practices
Bad Practices
Construction Site Runoff
Provide bunding to prevent runoff of wastewater from sites
Insufficient runoff control lead to seepage of wastewater

to public road
Wastewater Treatment Plant
Wastewater treatment plant with regular maintenance
7-13
Wastewater treatment plant without proper maintenance

7.9
Propriety Wastewater Treatment Packages
There are many types of packaged wastewater treatment systems available from the market to treat
construction site wastewater. The use of commercial wastewater treatment plants is recommended for their
higher treatment efficiency and relatively compact size.
Their treatment principles and relevant
characteristics are shown in Figure 7.6 and summarized in Table 7.2 respectively.
Figure 7.6 Commercial Wastewater Treatment Plant
Influent
Coagulation
+
Flocculation
(by either a reaction tank
with mechanical mixer or a
static mixer)
Coagulant:
Polyaluminium
Chloride
Flocculant:
Polyacrylamide
Sedimentation
(with either tube or plate
settler module)
Sludge
Acid:
H2SO4 (Sulphuric
Acid) or Citric Acid
Neutralization
(Optional)
Effluent
Table 7.2
Treatment
[m3/hr]
Commercial Wastewater Treatment System Characteristics

Capacity
Typical Space Requirements [m]

(Length * Width * Height)
10
2.7 * 2.5 * 3.0
20
3.3-3.5 * 2.3-2.5 * 3.0-3.6
40
5.0-5.4 * 2.3-2.5 * 3.0-3.6
80
7.9-8.4 * 2.3-2.5 * 3.4-3.9
120
9.5 * 2.5 * 3.9
Maximum
Suspended
[mg/L]
< 20,000
7-14
Influent
Solids
Treatment Cost per m3 of

Wastewater [HK$]
<1

7.9.1 Field Tests

Three building construction sites, four civil
engineering sites and one bored piling site were
chosen for the field tests to examine the
wastewater treatment setup and performance.
Wastewater treatment facilities were installed in
these sites to treat wastewater generated from
construction activities. Grab samples collected
Table 7.3
from influent, effluent and sedimentation tank

(where possible) were sent to a HOKLAS
Accredited Laboratory for analysis of suspended
solids. Table 7.3 summarises the site conditions,
wastewater treatment systems, sample results and
conclusion.
Summary of Field Tests
Construction Activities
Wastewater Treatment Processes
Suspended Solids
Concentration
Conclusion*
Building
(Site B1)
One reception tank and a primary

sedimentation tank followed by a
Influent: 1284mg/L,
Effluent: 10 mg/L
Effluent quality complies

with
the
discharge
standard.
HRT by the primary sedimentation = 31

min
HRT by the tube settler = 16 min
Building
(Site B2)
One reception tank followed by a

HRT by the reception tank = 19 min
Influent: 182 mg/L,

Effluent: 40 mg/L
Effluent quality does not

comply with the discharge
standard.
It
is
recommended to adjust the
chemical dosing rate and
ensure
regular
maintenance of the system.
Building
(Site B3)
A reception tank and two primary

sedimentation tanks followed by a
HRT by the reception tank and primary
sedimentation = 42 min
Influent: 5520 mg/L,

Effluent: 5 mg/L

with
the
discharge
standard.
Civil Engineering
(Site C1)
One reception tank followed by a

Influent:
12590
mg/L,
Effluent: 4 mg/L

with
the
discharge
standard.
* The discharge standard for the suspended solids of the sites was 30 mg/L.
7-15

Table 7.3
Summary of Field Tests (Continued)
Wastewater Treatment Processes
Suspended Solids
Concentration
Conclusion*
Civil Engineering
(Site C2)
One reception tank with addition of

coagulant
and
followed
by
a

Effluent: 9 mg/L

with
the
discharge
standard.

Effluent: 17 mg/L

with
the
discharge
standard.

Effluent: 16 mg/L

with
the
discharge
standard.
After
2nd
219mg/L,
tank:
After
3rd
207mg/L,
After
4th
149mg/L
tank:
From our observation, there

is a short circuit of
wastewater in each tank.
Wastewater enters at the
inlet and leaves at the
outlet directly.
It is
recommended to install a
baffle between inlet and
outlet of a tank.
Coagulant
dosing
7.5L/min
(proprietary chemical so the dosage
and concentration did not know)
Civil Engineering
(Site C3)
Two primary sedimentation tanks with

addition of coagulant in the first primary
tank followed by a wastewater
treatment system
min
Coagulant dosing 5L/min with dosage
of 40 ppm
Civil Engineering
(Site C4)
The Contractor adopts a self-developed

wastewater treatment system.
The
system
is composed
of
three
sedimentation tanks.
Coagulant is
added into 1st sedimentation tank and
flocculant is added into first chamber of
2nd sedimentation tank.
HRT by the sedimentation = 10 min
Coagulant dosing
dosage of 40 ppm
7.5L/min with
Flocculant dosing 5L/min with dosage

of 2 ppm
Bored Piling
(Site P1)
The wastewater treatment system is

composed of five circular tanks. Due to
the site constraint, the influent and
effluent samples were not collected.
min
tank:
* The discharge standard for the suspended solids of the sites was 30 mg/L.
7-16

Appendix 7.1 Site Inspection Checklist-Wastewater

Implemented?
Yes
No
Exposed soil areas are minimised
All exposed earth are stabilised after completion of earthworks, or

within 14 days of the cessation of earthworks
Dykes are provided at boundary of any critical or low-level areas of

earthworks for flood protection
Sufficient temporary ditches, drainage pipes and/or culverts for

collection of site runoff are provided
Sedimentation tanks are provided for treatment of effluent prior to the

discharge
Sedimentation tanks are of sufficient capacity
Sedimentation tanks are effectively maintained according to planned

schedules with clear records
Reinstate any temporarily diverted drainage to its original condition

when works are completed
Sediment traps are installed upstream and downstream of modified

culvert systems
10
All the sedimentation facilities are inspected, maintained and cleaned

on a regular basis or as necessary
11
Oil interceptors are provided in the drainage system where necessary

and are cleaned on a regular basis or as necessary
12
Oil interceptors serving open area have a peak storm bypass

bypass for oil interceptors serving covered area.)
(No
13
Temporarily exposed slopes are covered by tarpaulin or similar fabric

during rainy seasons
14
Temporary access road is protected by crushed stone or gravel during

surface excavation works
15
Any open stockpiles of construction materials of more than 50m are

covered with tarpaulin or similar fabric during rainstorms
16
Intercepting channels are provided near the drainage system to prevent

washing away of construction material, soil, silt or debris
17
Manholes under construction are covered and temporarily sealed
18
Wheel washing facility is provided at every site exit and maintained
19
Sand and silt in the wheel washing bay are removed regularly
20
Subsequent permanent work or surface protection is carried out

immediately after the final surfaces are formed
Remark
A7-1

Implemented?
Yes
No
21
Trenches are dug and backfilled in short sections if excavation of

trenches in wet seasons is necessary
22
Ingress of rainwater into trenches is minimised
23
Rainwater pumped out from trenches or foundation excavations is

discharged into storm drains via silt removal facilities
24
Discharge of surface runoff into foul sewers is prevented
25
Spent bentonite slurries used in diaphragm wall construction are

reconditioned and reused, wherever practicable
26
Rubbish is cleared from drains and wastewater system
27
Chemical toilets are provided in the case that connection to the existing
foul sewer main is not possible
28
Grease traps are provided to treat wastewater from kitchens or

canteens
29
Vehicles are cleaned before leaving the construction site
30
Treated wash water is reused for non potable use, where possible, like
dust emission control and vehicle washing.
31
Sand and silt in wash-water is settled out or removed before

discharging into storm drains
32
Sewage from toilets and similar facilities is discharged into a foul sewer
if connection to foul sewer can be made
33
If foul sewer cannot be made, on site sewage treatment and disposal

facilities or tinkering away of sewage are provided
34
Drainage serving an open oil filling point is connected to storm drains

via a petrol interceptor with peak storm bypass
35
Vehicle and plant servicing areas and lubrication areas are located
within roofed area as far as possible
36
Drainage in the roofed/covered areas for Item 33 is connected to foul

sewers via a oil trap
37
Prior agreement from Drainage Services Department is obtained before

sewage discharge to foul sewer.
38
Oil leakage or spillage is contained and cleaned up immediately
39
Drainage facilities, erosion and sediment control structures are well

maintained and inspected regularly
40
Site drainage plan being prepared, reviewed and implemented by

qualified environmental site staff
41
Effluent discharge licence is obtained from EPD before any discharge

is made
42
Copy of the effluent discharge licence, together with effluent monitoring

report and maintenance record of the on-site wastewater treatment and
disposal facilities, is placed at site office for checking by EPD
Sampling of effluent is being conducted regularly to ensure compliance

with the effluent discharge limits stipulated in the discharge licence
43
A7-2
Remark

Chapter 8 Waste Management
Table of Contents
Waste Management ..................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.8
8.9
Terminology ..................................................................................................................... 8-1

Statutory and Non-Statutory Requirements ...................................................................... 8-3
Construction Waste Disposal Charging Scheme............................................................... 8-3
Dumping Licence and Trip-Ticket System ........................................................................ 8-5
Government Waste Disposal Facilities for C&D Material ................................................... 8-6
Waste Management ......................................................................................................... 8-6
Case Studies ................................................................................................................. 8-11
Marine Sediment Disposal ............................................................................................. 8-12
List of Tables
Table 8.1
Charge Levels of Different Types of Construction Waste ................................................... 8-6
Table 8.2
Reusable and Recyclable Materials ................................................................................. 8-8
List of Appendices
Appendix 8.1
Material Storage Requirements ...................................................................................... A8-1
Appendix 8.2
Good Housekeeping Checklist ....................................................................................... A8-2

Waste Management
8.1
Terminology
Construction & Demolition (C&D) Material

C&D Material means any substance, matter or thing
which generated as a result of construction work
and abandoned whether or not it has been
processed or stockpiled before being abandoned.
It is a mixture of surplus materials arising from:
Site Clearance;
Excavation;
Construction;
Refurbishment;
Renovation;
Demolition; and
Road Works.
Vegetation;
Packaging Waste; and
Other Organic Materials.
C&D Waste containing vegetation, timber and plastics
Construction and Demolition Material
C&D material can be further classified into inert and

non-inert substances. The former is commonly
known as Inert C&D Material while the latter is
called C&D Waste.
Inert C&D Material

Over 80% of C&D materials are inert materials.
They are suitable for land reclamation and site
formation. The following substances are example of
inert C&D material/public fill:
Rubble;
Boulder;
Concrete;
Bricks;
Asphalt;
Tile;
Masonry;
Earth/Soil/Sand;
Rock; and
Used bentonite.
C&D Waste
C&D waste which means any substance, matter or
thing that is generated from construction work and
abandoned, whether or not it has been processed
or stockpiled before being abandoned, but does not
include any sludge, screenings or matter removed
in or generated from any desludging, desilting or
dredging works. And it is those materials not
suitable for reclamation. Subject to recovery of
reusable or recyclable items, C&D waste is
disposed of at landfills. The following substances
are example of C&D waste:
Bamboo;
Timber;
Generally inert C&D material from demolition works
8-1

Landfills
Landfills refer to the strategic landfill sites managed
by EPD. At present, three strategic landfills are in
operation:
West New Territories (WENT) Landfill;
South East New Territories (SENT) Landfill; and
North East New Territories (NENT) Landfill.
C&D waste disposed of at landfills should contain
not more than 50% by weight of inert C&D
materials.
In
accordance
to
Waste
Disposal
(Designated
Waste
Disposal
Facility)
Regulation (Chapter 354L), the following
Criteria should be adopted.
For a load of construction waste not consisting
entirely of bamboo, plywood or timber delivered
by a vehicle:Inert Waste Content 50%.
For goods vehicles with demountable skips:
Weight Ratio 0.25
The depth of the waste loaded >1 meter
For other types of vehicles:
An area allocated for temporary stockpile of

public fill for later use.
C&D Material Recycling Facility
The facility process hard inert materials into
recycled aggregates and granular materials for
use in construction activities.
Under the Charging Regulation, existing Public Fill

Reception Facilities available to the public are:
Tseung Kwan O Area 137 Fill Bank
Tuen Mun Area 38 Fill Bank
Chai Wan Public Filling Barging Point
Mui Wo Temporary Public Filling Barging Point
C&D material disposed of at public fill reception
facilities should consist entirely inert materials while
that disposed of at sorting facilities should contain
more than 50% by weight of inert materials.
Construction Waste Sorting Facilities
There are two operating sorting facilities, one at
Tseung Kwan O Area 137 and the other at Tuen
Mun Area 38 for sorting the inert portion of
construction waste from mixed waste. C&D material
disposed of at sorting facilities should contain more
than 50% by weight of inert materials.
Weight Ratio 0.20

The depth of the waste loaded >1.5 meter
In
accordance
to
Waste
Disposal
(Designated
Waste
Disposal
Facility)
Regulation (Chapter 354L), the following
Criteria should be adopted.
For a load of construction waste consisting

entirely of bamboo, timber or plywood delivered
by a vehicle, there is no restriction on the depth
of the waste and the weight of the waste loaded
on the goods vehicle divided by the permitted
gross vehicle weight of the vehicle.
For a load of construction waste not consisting

by a vehicle:Inert Waste Content 50%.
Public Fill Reception Facilities

Public fill reception facilities are managed by the
Civil Engineering and Development Department
(CEDD) to accept public fill. The facilities includes:
Public Filling Areas
A designated part of a development project
accepting public fill for reclamation.
Public Filling Barging Points
A strategically located public fill reception
facility utilizing barge transportation to transfer
public fill from road vehicles to marine based
public filling areas.
Public Fill Stockpiling Areas
A newly reclaimed land where public fill is
stockpile as surcharging material to accelerate
settlement.
Fill Banks
For goods vehicles with demountable skips:

Weight Ratio 0.25
The depth of the waste loaded <1 meter
For other types of vehicles:
Weight Ratio 0.20
The depth of the waste loaded <1.5 meter
For a load of construction waste consisting
by a vehicle, the load is regarded as
construction waste containing not more than
50% by weight of inert construction waste.
8-2

For easier understanding on the current acceptance

criteria and practice, a table shown below has been
provided to the industry:
Waste
Depth
Weight
Ratio
>1.0 metre
1.0 metre
Any Ratio
0.25
Vehicle Type
Vehicles with
demountable
skips
> 0.25
Other types of >1.5 metres

vehicles
1.5
metres
Any Ratio
0.20
> 0.20
Waste
Disposal
Facilities
Landfills
Landfills
Sorting
Facilities
Landfills
Landfills
Sorting
Facilities
Outlying Islands Transfer Facilities

Outlying Islands Transfer Facilities refer to the
waste transfer facilities located at Mui Wo, Peng
Chau, Hei Ling Chau, Cheung Chau, Yung Shue
Wan, Sok Kwu Wan and Ma Wan. There is no
restriction on the percentage of inert materials for
C&D material disposed of at Outlying Islands
Transfer Facilities.
Specific requirements on the size and moisture
content of the materials may also be stipulated in
individual works contract.
Sorted Construction
Waste
100% Inert
Construction Waste
Public Fill
Reception Facilities
Mixed Construction
Wastes
Sorting Facilities
8.3
Construction
Waste
Charging Scheme
Disposal
C&D waste producers need to open a billing

account with EPD and pay for the construction
waste disposal charge prior to using government
waste disposal facilities.
8.3.1
Open a Billing Account
Step 1: Submit application with the required

documents
Case 1: Construction work with value of $1
million or above
Open a billing account solely for the contract
Application shall be made by main contractor
within 21 days after the contract awarded
(failing this will be an offence under the law).
Application form with guidance notes and
conditions
Sample of completed application form
Supporting documents required
Case 2: Construction work with value less than

$1 million
Any person such as the premises owner or
his/her contractor can open a billing account;
The account can also be used for contracts
each with value less than $1 million; and
Premises owner concerned may also engage a
contractor with a valid billing account to make
arrangement for disposal of the C&D waste.
Landfills
Inert Waste
Content <=50%
A Guide for Determination of 50% Waste

Materials Content
Application form with guidance notes and

conditions
Sample of completed application form
Weight Ratio =
Weight of in-weighbridge Tare weight of vehicle
Required Documents and Information
Permitted Gross Vehicle Weight (PGVW)
8.2
Statutory
and
Requirements
Photocopy of
HKID or BR
Certificate
Photocopy of
Proof of
company
address
Photocopy of
construction
work contract
Case 1
Case 2
Non-Statutory
Refer to Chapter 2 of the Guide for requirements

under the Waste Disposal Ordinance, subsidiary
regulations and non-statutory requirements.
8-3

Step 2: Pay the deposit stated on Demand Note
As a general construction waste disposal

requirement, the Gross Vehicle Weight of a
vehicle using the waste disposal service of
the prescribed facilities shall not exceed the
Permitted Gross Vehicle Weight" against
overloading of vehicle, similar to the one
under Section 8.4.1.
Case 1: Construction Work with Value of $1

million or above
Minimum $15,000 for issuance of up to 200
Chits for each account
Obtain additional Chits at HK$75 each
Case 2: Construction work with value less than
$1 million
HK$300 per Chit
HK$75 per Chit (for Outlying Islands Transfer
Facilities users)
Step 3: Bring collection note to designated
office to collect Chits or obtain
Chits by post (for 20 Chits or less)
8.3.3 Payment
EPD will issue a monthly demand note and
waste transaction information to the accountholder
The account-holder pays charges within 45
days from the date of demand note. The
charges may be paid by post, in person,
through phone payment service (PPS) or
internet
If the charges are not paid by due date, the
account-holder shall pay a surcharge of 5%
of the unpaid amount.
8.3.2 Use of Chit

The procedures for using the Chit are:
Account-holder
makes
arrangement
for
disposal of construction waste
Account-holder fills in and issues the Chit to
the waste hauler and retains Part A of the Chit
Waste hauler presents Parts B and C of the
Chit to the operator of designated waste
disposal facility
Operator after stamping returns Part B to the
waste hauler
A transaction record slip can be obtained upon
completion of the disposal
If the unpaid charges and the surcharge are

not paid with 14 days from the date on
which the surcharge becomes payable, the
Director of Environmental Protection (DEP)
may suspend the account and serve a final
notice to the account-holder.
Where the outstanding charges and the
surcharge are not paid within 14 days from
the date of final notice, the DEP may revoke
the account.
To avoid delay of construction progress due

to insufficient stock of CHIT for C&D
material disposal, the following strategy on
CHIT application should be observed:
Prepare
C&D
materials
disposal
schedule for the whole construction
period.
Update the disposal schedule at least
half-yearly.
Keep CHIT stock for sufficient use for
the coming 2 months.
Replenish CHIT as and when required.
8.3.4
Application for Issuance of Chits for Existing

Account, Download Form
8-4
Change/Closure/Reinstatement of an
Account
Prescribed Form 5 should be used for
notification of changes in Account information.
Prescribed Form 6 should be used for
application for closure or reinstatement of an
Account.

8.4
Dumping Licence and Trip-Ticket

System
8.4.1 Dumping Licence

A Dumping Licence is required for disposal of pubic
fill to the public filling facility. The Fill Management
Division (FMD) of CEDD is responsible for issuing
Dumping Licence.
The Dumping Licence together with a
windscreen Dumping Label are issued free of
charge.
Application for a Dumping Licence can be made
all the year round.
Sample of the CHIT used on government contracts
As stipulated in the Dumping Licence

conditions, the licensee or his authorized
dump truck driver should not overload his
dump truck beyond the gross vehicle
weight.
Non-compliance with that condition may
lead to receipt of warning letter or even
cancellation of the Dumping License for
repeated
non-compliance.
The
main
contractor can also be penalised through
the Contractors Performance Record.
8.4.2 Trip-Ticket System

The trip-ticket system (TTS) is a recording system
for orderly disposal of construction waste. The
system has been in operation for many years, prior
to the introduction of the Construction Waste
Disposal Charging Scheme.
CHIT for TTS is applicable to all public works

contracts for which tenders are invited on or after 1
November 2010, DEVB TCW No.6/2010.
For government contracts, the Contractor is
required to complete a standard trip-ticket form
outlining:
Date of Disposal
Vehicles License Plate Number
Contents of the vehicle (type and approximate
volume of waste)
Designated disposal facility
After being checked, signed, copy and stamped by
the Engineers or Architects Representative or site
supervisory staff, the load of waste will be delivered
to the designated facility.
For the waste delivered to the government
designated facility, stamped trip ticket will be
returned to the vehicle operator. In parallel, the
Contractor shall check the information and disposal
records at EPDs
/CEDDs
website for
verification of the compliance.
In order to ensure proper disposal of C&D materials,
enhancement measures to further improve the TTS
recording system, a video recording system shall
be installed to monitor the vehicular exit/entranceof
the site and disposal records shall be checked
against survey records.
Sample of the Disposal Delivery Form used on government

contracts
DDF for TTS continues to apply to existing

contracts and contracts for which tenders were
invited before 1 November 2010, ETWB TC(W)
31/2004.
For details of the Trip-ticket System, please refer to

the government's technical circular DEVB TCW
No.6/2010.
For non-government contracts, the Contractor is
also encourage to adopt the TTS. With the success
of the adoption of the TTS in public works, the
arrangement can also be applied to private sector
works.
8-5

8.5
Government
Waste
Facilities for C&D Material
Disposal
8.5.1 Charge Level

The level of charge for disposal of different types of
construction waste at government waste disposal
facilities is shown in Table 8.1.
Table 8.1 Charge levels for different waste types
Government waste
disposal facilities
(Please see location
map)
Type of construction
waste accepted
Charge
per
#
tonne
Public fill reception

facilities
Consisting entirely of
inert construction
$27
waste++
Sorting facilities
Containing more
than 50% by weight
of inert construction
waste++
$100
Containing not more

than 50% by weight
of inert construction
waste++
$125
Containing any
percentage of
inert construction
++
waste
$125
Landfills
Outlying Islands
Transfer Facilities@
8.6
8.6.1 Planning
The options for waste management are listed in
preferred order:
1 Avoidance;
2 Minimization;
3 Recycling;
4 Treatment; and
5 Disposal.
Proper planning for waste reduction should be
carried out before site operations commence. It can
be achieved by:
Preparing a waste management plan as part of
the overall Environmental Management Plan
Setting out waste reduction targets and
programmes
Arranging on-site sorting and proper waste
disposal
Setting up a good housekeeping practice
Setting up a waste management monitoring and
audit programme
# Except for the Outlying Islands Transfer Facilities,

the minimum charge load is 1 tonne, i.e. if a load of
waste weighs 1 tonne or less, it will be charged as 1
tonne. A load of waste weighing more than 1 tonne
will be charged at 0.1 tonne increment. For Outlying
Islands Transfer Facilities, the charge is $12.5 per
0.1 tonne and the minimum charge load is 0.1
tonne.
++ Inert construction waste means rock, rubble,
boulder, earth, soil, sand, concrete, asphalt, brick,
tile, masonry or used bentonite.
Non-inert C&D
Material
Timetable of Services for Waste

Disposal Facilities
A timetable of services for waste disposal facilities
can be found at the EPDs
/CEDDs
websites.
Inert C&D
Material
On site sorting of construction waste into inert and non-inert

streams
@ If a load of waste contains construction waste and

other waste, that load will be regarded as consisting
entirely of construction waste for the purpose of
calculating the applicable charge.
8.5.2
Waste Management
For sites with limited available working

space, waste materials should at least be
separated into inert and non-inert portions
by directly depositing into skips.
Preparing a Waste Management Plan

A waste management plan provides an overall
framework for waste management and reduction. It
identifies major waste types and defines ways for
waste reduction. Details of the contents of the plan
are given in Section 8.6.4.
8-6

Waste Reduction Targets

For each identified waste stream, waste reduction
targets such as percentage or quantity reduced or
recycling rates should be set.
Waste Reduction Programme
The programme sets out the actions required for
waste reduction for each identified waste type in the
form of waste reduction programmes, procedures
and guidelines.
Arranging On-site Sorting
Identify designated areas for on-site sorting of
waste for reuse and recycle and provide suitable
containers to temporarily store sorted materials
such as metals, concrete, timber, packaging and
plastics. Sorting and segregation at the works
location (i.e. at source) can achieve higher recovery
effectiveness.
Recycling cage for waste sorting
Proper Waste Disposal

Define a proper waste disposal procedure for each
waste type and arrange disposal.
Good Housekeeping Practice
Do not order too early or over-order to avoid
accumulation of material that can lead to damage
and deterioration. Provide good storage and
maintenance of raw materials to prevent
deterioration. Return any surplus material to a
centralized storage area with suitable protection
measures.
A proposed storage guide is provided in Appendix

8.1.
A Good Housekeeping Checklist is provided in
Appendix 8.2.
Monitoring and Audit
Set up a team to record the quantity of waste
generated, reduced, recycled and disposed and to
monitor the effectiveness of the waste management
programme. The monitoring team
should
recommend improvement or corrective measures
when necessary.
8.7.2
Waste Reduction Guidelines
Step 1: Lean Construction

For design and build projects, the adoption of lean
construction techniques can minimize the quantity
of raw materials being used and thus reduce the
amount of waste, for example:
Use thinner internal wall and floor slabs
Reduce foundation size
Adopt modular building designs and precast or
prefabricate building components such as
facades, staircases and semi-precast floor
slabs
Step 2: Assign a Site Waste Officer
Assign a site waste officer who may be an
environmental engineer, site agent or other suitable
staff. The officer should be responsible for:
Drafting a waste management plan;
Identifying waste management procedures and
instructions; and
Performing a regular site waste audit.
Step 3: Material Utilization
Poor handling of materials and improper operating
procedures often causes high raw material wastage.
Broken items or off-cuts should be considered
for sections when small lengths are required;
Set up management system making use of
information technology facilitating senior site
staffs or headquarter staffs to check the usage
and waste of materials; and
Measure wastage of different materials to
identify improvement opportunities.
8-7

On-site sorting area proper sorting of raw

materials
Table 8.2 Reusable and Recyclable Materials

Type of Material
How can it be Reused or

Recycled?
Concrete
Recycling
for
use
as
aggregate in new concrete.
Recycling
for
use
as
unbounded aggregate in roads
or fill.
The specification facilitating
the
use
of
recycled
aggregates can be found in
WBTC 12/2002 and ETWB
TCW 24/2004.
Bitumen and Asphalt
Recycling for use in bound

layer of road.
Recycling for use as bulk fill.
Excavation Spoil
Reuse for landscaping.
Topsoil
Reuse for landscaping.
Timber
Reuse, eg. for formwork or

noise barriers.
Reuse for chipboard.
Metals
Reuse.
Recycle.
Clay, Concrete Pipes,

Tiles, Blocks and
Bricks
Reuse.
Packaging and
Plastics
Reuse or send to recycler
Properly designed on site storage area
Step 4: Reuse and Recycling

Reuse and recycling is an essential part of waste
management, to prevent surplus materials from
being disposed, measures include:
Reuse items such as hoarding, formwork and
scaffolding;
Recycle materials such as metals, concrete and
asphalt. A list of reusable and recyclable
material is shown in Table 8.2; and
Consider an on-site crusher for demolition
material into aggregates for reuse.
A list of recyclers is available at EPDs website.
On-site sorting area for reusable and recyclable

materials
Designs should be flexible to provide

opportunities for future adaptation of
buildings
Use of durable materials; and
Flexible design allowing conversion of

building to meet future uses.
Reuse
and
encouraged.
Provide an on-site sorting area for reusable or recyclable

materials
8-8
Recycling
should
be
Reuse surplus construction materials

such as bricks and tiles;
Use of recycled materials in new

construction
such
as
recycled
aggregates and asphalt, and
Use of pulverized fuel ash and durable

and recyclable materials such as metals
instead of timber.

For foundation and earthworks projects,

design for reusing excavated spoil as backfill material to balance cut and fill.
more importantly reduces the disturbances caused

by the construction activities and also the overall
construction cycle period.
If cut and fill cannot be balanced on-site,

look to other possible sites. Consolidation
of material needs across Hong Kong is
carried out Fill Management Division of the
Civil
Engineering
and
Development
Department.
The Hong Kong Construction Association
can also assist in publicising material
availability and needs of projects to
facilitate waste management initiatives
within Hong Kong.
Some Good Examples

Case 1: Selective Demolition
To maximise recovery of reusable and recyclable
materials, the following measures should be
adopted:
Hand demolition and dismantling should be
considered prior to demolition using point
breaker, bulldozer, crane ball and chain, and
explosives, which are more relevant to recycling
than reuse.
Salvageable materials such as metals, timber,
bricks and tiles should be removed from the
buildings before demolition.
Selective sequential demolition should be
adopted to remove one type of material at one
time to avoid mixing.
Case 2: Designs for Long-Life
Designs should be flexible to provide opportunities
for future adaptation of buildings
Use of durable materials; and
Flexible design allowing conversion of building
to meet future uses.
Case 3: Reuse and Recycling of materials
Reuse surplus construction materials such as
bricks and tiles;
Use of recycled materials in new construction
such as recycled aggregates and asphalt; and
Use of pulverized fuel ash and durable and
recyclable materials such as metals instead of
timber.
Case 4: Unitized Precast Construction
When
compared
with
traditional
building
construction approaches, the use of unitized
precast construction eliminates the use of timber
formwork and wet trades; reduces water
consumption and dust and noise nuisance and
Precast units for facades of housing blocks
Video Shows
Some videos showing low waste construction
design and technologies can be viewed at EPDs
website.
8.7.3 Waste Management Implementation

ETWB TCW No. 19/2005 Environmental
Management on Construction Sites
includes
procedures on waste management requiring
contractors to reduce the C&D material to be
disposed of during the course of construction.
Some of the strategies to be adopted include:
Nominating a person, such as a site manager,
to be responsible for good site practices,
collection and effective disposal of all wastes
generated at the site to an appropriate facility;
Training of site personnel in proper waste
management and chemical waste handling
procedures;
Developing and providing toolbox talks for onsite sorting of C&D materials to enhance
workers awareness in handling, sorting, reuse
and recycling of C&D materials;
Providing sufficient waste disposal points and
regular collection of waste;
Implementing
a
regular
cleaning
and
maintenance programme for drainage systems,
sumps and oil interceptors;
Sorting C&D waste from demolition of existing
facilities to recover recyclable portions such as
metals;
Segregating and sorting different types of waste
into different containers, skips or stockpiles to
enhance reuse or recycling of materials and
their proper disposal;
8-9

Encouraging collection of aluminium cans,

plastic bottles and paper by providing separate
labelled bins to enable these wastes to be
segregated from other general refuse
generated by the work force;
Recycling unused chemicals;
Ensuring proper storage and site practices to
minimise the potential for damage or
contamination of construction materials; and
Routine inspection and reporting system.
Mixed waste skip needs emptying make sure there is a

monitoring regime for best practice
Is a Waste Management Plan (WMP) a

mandatory requirement?
Under ETWB TCW No. 19/2005, capital works

contracts (including Design & Build contracts and
E&M contracts, with contract sum $20M and
contract period > 6 months) are required to
prepare and implement an Environmental
Management Plan (EMP) of which the Waste
Management Plan becomes part.
8.7.4
Prevention against illegal land filling

and flytipping activities
A list of Ordinances/Regulations has imposed

controls on depositing construction waste on
government and private land, which includes:
Town Planning Ordinance;
Waste Disposal Ordinance;
Public Cleansing and Prevention of Nuisances

Regulation;
Fixed Penalty (Public Cleanliness Offences)

Ordinance;
Public Health and Municipal Services

Ordinance;
Building Ordinance; and
Relevant pollution control ordinances.
Potential preventative measures are suggested to

be
implemented
by
the
landowners,
developers/contractors and truck drivers in order to
prevent illegal land filling and flytipping activities:
For landowners:
Proper site entry and exit control of dump trucks
with construction waste;
Prompt
reporting
of
any
suspected
noncompliance case to the authorities;
Close checking and keeping of disposal record
of construction waste;
Installation of CCTV/ photo taking of each dump
truck entering and leaving the site;
Ensure disposal of construction waste at proper
disposal outlets; and
Ensure land filling is permitted.
For developers/contractors:
Implementation of waste management plan;
Proper control and management of chits issued
to dump truck operators;
of construction waste;
Photo taking and on-site loading measurement
of each dump truck leaving the site;
disposal outlets;
Ensure the transporter comply with all legal
requirements;
Prompt
reporting
of
any
suspected
noncompliance case to the authorities; and
Employ only reliable driver, vehicle and
companies with no previous record of
engagement in flytipping activities.
For truck drivers:
disposal outlets;
Ensure to comply with environmental and safety
requirements;
Report of any suspected noncompliance case
to the authorities;
of construction waste; and
Request the C&D wastes producers to adopt a
trip ticket system to track the loads.
More information on guidelines for control of
flytipping activities can be referred to the following
leaflets published by EPD.
Be responsible, say "NO" to illegal waste
dumping - A Guide for Construction Waste
Transporters
8-10

8.8
Know your environmental responsibilities:

Managing construction and demolition materials
properly - A Guide for Developers, Contractors
and Property Managers
Broken concrete for paving

haul road
Case Studies
Case 1: Use of metal moulds for forming

concrete channels
Merits:
1 Reduce timber required for concrete works; and
2 Metal moulds can be recycled after use.
Metal Mold
Plan ahead to make sure that surplus concrete can be reused
Case 3: Recycle Backfilling Materials

Merits:
1 Temporary stockpile of excavated material for
recycling as backfilling material at a later stage.
Stockpiling material be aware of potential construction dust

impacts and mitigate when necessary
Case 4: On-site sorting of construction waste

Concrete Channel to be
constructed
Use of metal moulds for concrete works
Case 2: Reuse of Surplus Concrete

Merits:
1 Reuse surplus concrete as counterwight base
for hoarding; and
2 Reuse surplus broken concrete for paving haul
road.
Reinforcing steel
8-11

More details can be found in Technical Circular

(Works) No. 34/2002 Management of Dredged/
Excavated Sediment adopted by Environment,
Transport and Work Bureau.
8.9.1
Timber
Sorting of materials for reuse or recycling. Careful demolition

can ensure high levels of material recovery
8.9
Marine Sediment Disposal
Given that dredging and excavation works are

commonly occurred in Hong Kong, to facilitate the
reclamation works or infrastructure development.
There is a need to manage the sediment generated
from dredging works at sea or land-based
excavation works in an environmental friendly, cost
effective and efficient manner. In particular,
appropriate consideration should be given to waste
management options of reuse, recycling or upland
treatment and/or disposal prior to marine disposal.
Dredged mud may be dumped at sea subject to
permit controls under the Dumping at Sea
Ordinance, Cap. 466 (DASO). The permits are
issued by the Director of Environmental Protection
(DEP) as the Authority under the Ordinance.
Applicant should note that the Authority may refuse
to issue a permit for dumping any matter if it is
determined that appropriate opportunities exist to
reuse, recycle or treat the waste. Relevant
considerations are set out in the DASO Guidance
Note No. 1/2006 "Implementation of the 1996
Protocol to the Convention on the Prevention of
Marine Pollution by Dumping of Wastes and Other
Matter, 1972".
This section explains the procedure for seeking
approval to dredge/ excavate sediment and the
management framework for marine disposal of
such sediment.
Terminology
The Marine Fill Committee (MFC)

The MFC is responsible to identify and manage the
supply and demand of marine fill resources as well
as to provide and manage the disposal capacity of
the dredged/excavated sediment. Applications for
approval of dredging/ excavation proposals and
allocation of marine disposal space shall be made
to the Secretary of MFC.
Permits for marine disposal (DASO Permit)
The Director of Environmental Protection (DEP) is
responsible for the issue of permits for marine
disposal under the provisions of the Dumping at
Sea Ordinance (Cap.466). The DASO Permit
stipulates the quantity of material to be disposed of,
the allocated disposal ground and the source of
sediment, the validity period of the permit, a list of
vessels employed for the disposal of dredged/
excavated sediment as well as the name of the
permit holder.
Preliminary Sediment Quality Report (PSQR) /
Sediment Quality Report (SQR)
Upon completion of the sampling and chemical
testing, the project proponent shall submit a PSQR
to DEP with a copy to the Secretary of MFC. This
report shall include the sampling details, the
chemical testing results, quality control records,
proposed classification and delineation of sediment
according to the Technical Circular and the
information and/or records as specified by DEP in
his approval of sediment sampling and testing plan.
Should biological screening be required to
determine the subsequent sediment disposal
arrangement, the project proponent shall submit a
formal SQR to DEP for approval.
8-12

8.9.2
Screening Process and Disposal Arrangement for Dredged/ Excavated Sediment
8-1

8.9.3
Dredging/Excavation and Disposal Work

Flow
The application form together with any relevant

document can be submitted to any of the Customer
Service Counters of EPD.
The applicant may also be required to submit
further details such as drawings, method of
dumping and confirmation letters to substantiate the
application and the provided information.
8.9.4
Application Procedures
The requirements stipulated in "Environment,

Transport and Works Bureau Technical Circular
(Works) No. 34/2002" as applicable or
"Buildings Department Practice Notes for
Authorized Persons and Registered Structural
Engineers No. 252" (re-issued as ADV-21)..
regarding dredged sediments testing and allocation
of dumping capacity should be fulfilled.
Applicant should also note that the requirements
stipulated in the technical circulars in respect of the
sampling and testing of the dredged sediment and
allocation of dumping capacity have already been
fulfilled before they submit their applications. This
will avoid unnecessary delays to processing the
applications.
Application for the permit should be made in a
standard application form EPD 114a.
Separate applications should be made if a single
project involves sediment requiring different types
of disposal option.
Document:
Covering letter
Completed application form with authorized
signature and company chop
Copy of a valid Business Registration
Certificate (BRC) of the permit applicant
Dredging plan(s) & layout plan(s) with
coordinate
explicitly
showing
the
dredging/excavation areas and the depth of
dredging/excavation
Sectional drawings showing the interface
between sediment layers requiring different
Type of disposal
Documents certifying the award of Contract
(from the Waste Producer/ Client to the Main
Contractor, and from the Main Contractor to
the Dumping Operator if applicable)
Method statement for the dumping operation
Documents certifying that you are the waste
producer
Sediment quality report on the proposed
dredging excavation areas
Allocation of mud disposal capacity endorsed
by Marine Fill Committee (MFC) of the Civil
Engineering and Development Department or
EPD
Letter from Resident Engineer stating that will
provide Independent Supervision to ensure
the dumping is carried out in an
environmentally acceptable manner
Name and License number of vessels to be
employed for dumping operation
Name and BRC copy of Main Contractor/
Dumping Operation
Crossed cheque made payable to The
Government of the Hong Kong Special
Administrative
Region
containing
the
application fee
Copy of the up-to-date dumping returns of the
project.
8-1

Appendix 8.1: Material Storage Requirements

Material
Preferred storage
Under
cover
Secure
area
Special Requirements
On
pallets
Banded
Sand, gravel, rock, crushed

concrete
Plaster, cement
Store on hard standing base to reduce

wastage. Store in bays if large quantities
Avoid material getting damp
Concrete pavers
Store material in original packaging until

used,
and protect
from
vehicle
movements

used,
and protect
from
vehicle
movements
Use stoppers and spacers to prevent

rolling, and store in original packaging
until used
Protect all types of wood from rain
Bricks and blocks
Clay pipes, concrete pipes
Wood
Metals
Store in original packaging until used
Any internal fittings
Store in original packing until used
Cladding
Wrap in polythene to prevent scratches
Sheet glass, glazing units
Protect glass from breakage due to bad

handling or vehicle movements
Paints
Store in original packing until used
Bituminous felts
Usually store in rolls and protect with

polythene
Insulating material
Store under polythene
Ceramic tiles
Glass fibre
Ironmongery
Oils
Store in bowsers, tanks or cans

according to quantity protect container
from damage to reduce likelihood of
spillage use a bund
Kerbstones
Clay & slate tiles
Store in original packaging until required
Protect from vehicle movements & tar

spraying to reduce damage
Keep in original packaging until use
Topsoil, subsoil
Store on hard-standing base to reduce

wastage and keep segregated from
potential contaminants
Precast concrete units
Store in original packaging, away from

vehicular movements
Reinforcement
Steelwork
Note:

used
Store in original packaging until used
The manufacturers instructions/recommendations for handling and storage of materials should be followed in conjunction with
the above recommendations.
A8-1

Appendix 8.2: Good Housekeeping Checklist

Good Housekeeping Checklist for Waste Management
Items
Implemented?
General (Non Construction)
Yes
No
All work areas are cleaned regularly to remove general litter

and refuse
General refuse and litter are stored in enclosed bins or

compaction units separate from construction or chemical waste
Collect general waste and litter from site for disposal
No burning of refuse at any construction area
Separately labelled bins are provided to allow segregation of

recyclable material
Save paper and recycle waste paper
All vehicles carrying waste are properly fitted with side and tail
boards, and with tarpaulin covered
Training is provided to workers on waste management

procedures
Remarks
General (Construction)
9
Different types of construction waste generated from the site is

segregated, stored, transported and disposed of separately
10
Sorting of waste is conducted on-site
11
All waste materials are segregated into categories covering:

Inert portion of construction & demolition (C&D) material for
reuse on-site
Inert portion of C&D material to be used as public fill
Remaining waste for landfill
Chemical waste
Packaging waste
General waste
12
Separate compartments for inert (e.g. soil, rubble, sand, stone,

etc.) and non-inert (e.g. wood, glass, plastics, steel and metals,
organics, etc.) wastes are provided
13
Inert waste is used on site before disposed of at public fill

reception facilities
14
Non-inert waste is sorted for re-use or recycling where possible

before disposal at strategic landfills
15
Site fencing, scaffolding and timber for building work are

reused wherever possible
16
Regular maintenance and cleaning of waste storage area
17
Excavated materials are properly treated (re-used/disposed of)

according to specified procedures
18
General refuse stored in specified enclosed bins/compaction

units, or reused if possible
19
Does the waste collector have any records of dumping?
A8-2

Good Housekeeping Checklist for Waste Management

Items
Implemented?
General (Construction)
Yes
No
20
A barge loading point is provided to facilitate transfer of

suitable material to public dumps
21
Records of reuse/recycling/disposal of construction waste are

properly kept
A8-3
Remarks

Chapter 9 Chemical Waste Management
Table of Contents
CHEMICAL WASTE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................... 9-1

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Terminology ..................................................................................................................... 9-1

Rationale to Deal with Chemical Waste ............................................................................ 9-1
Classification of Chemical Waste ..................................................................................... 9-2
Chemical Waste Identification .......................................................................................... 9-2
Application of Licence / Registration................................................................................. 9-2
Chemical Waste Management ......................................................................................... 9-4
Practice to Reduce the Risk of Spillage .......................................................................... 9-11
List of Figures
Figure 9.1
Cradle to Grave Control of Chemical Waste ................................................................... 9-1
Figure 9.2
Flow Chart for Determination of Chemical Waste Producer .............................................. 9-3
Figure 9.3
Chemical Waste Licenses Requirement ........................................................................... 9-4
Figure 9.4
Trip Ticket System Procedures ........................................................................................ 9-6
Figure 9.5
Trip Ticket System Checklist for Waste Producer ............................................................. 9-7
Figure 9.6
Important Issues in Using a Chemical Waste Container.................................................... 9-8
Figure 9.7
Information to be included in Chemical Waste Label......................................................... 9-9
Figure 9.8
Chemical Waste Storage Facilities -- Enclose ................................................................ 9-10
List of Appendices
Appendix 9.1
Good Housekeeping Checklist for Chemical Waste Management ................................... A9-1

9.1
Terminology
Fire hazard.
Chemical Waste
Any substance or thing being scrap material,
effluent or an unwanted substance or by-product
which:
Contains any substance or chemical specified
in Schedule 1 of the Waste Disposal (Chemical
Waste) (General) Regulation and
Causes pollution or constitute a danger to
health or risk of pollution to the environment
Chemical Waste Producer

Under the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste)
(General) Regulation, any person who produces
chemical waste or causes it to be produced will be
defined as a Chemical Waste Producer.
9.2
The site is required to register with the

Environmental Protection Department (EPD). For
registration procedures refer to Section 9.4.
Rationale to Deal with Chemical

Waste
Chemical wastes arising during the construction

phase may pose environmental, health and safety
hazards if not stored and disposed of in an
appropriate manner. The potential hazards include:
Toxic effect to workers;

Adverse effect on soil and water quality from
spills and improper disposal; and
Registration as a Chemical Waste Producer is

required if a construction site generates chemical
waste.
The Cradle to Grave approach used to control

chemical waste under the Regulation is shown in
Figure 9.1.
Figure 9.1 Cradle to Grave Control of

Chemical Waste
Storage
Chemical Waste should be

controlled Cradle to Grave
All stages of:
Storage
Collection
T ransportation
Disposal
Packaging and Labelling
Monitor &
Control
Collection
Monitor &
Control
Transportation
Monitor &
Control
Disposal/Treatment
9-1

9.3
Surplus adhesives with solvent content

Spent lubricating oils and mineral oils
Unwanted paint, paint thinners and paint removers
Spent acid and alkaline solutions
Spent solvent
Waste containers
Asbestos sheets/waterpipes
Demolition wastes containing dioxins, asbestos,
PCB
Unwanted DG Cat 2-10
(Refer to EPD A Guide to the Registration of
Chemical Waste Producers)
Classification of Chemical Waste
Chemical wastes are classified according to

their chemical nature and hazards.
Symbols to describe the chemical nature and its
hazard are summarised in the following figure.
Special handling and storing procedures are required

for chemical wastes. Please refer to EPD Code of
Practice on the Handling, Transportation and Disposal
of Asbestos Waste
for details.
9.5.1 Registration Procedure

Registering as a chemical waste producer (CWP) can
be made by submitting a completed form (EPD 129)
or by On-line Application.
Particulars including location of waste generating
establishments, nature of the business and waste
types shall be recorded on the registration form and be
provided to EPD for processing.
The fees required for the registration can be found at
the EPDs webpage.
Chemical Classification Symbols
9.4
Chemical Waste Identification
Figure 9.3 can assist in determining whether a

contractor is a chemical waste producer and is
therefore subject to the registration requirement.
Upon completion of the registration, EPD will issue a

registration certificate (EPD130) which designates a
unique waste producer number.
Mixing of different types of chemical

wastes may result in a chemical reaction
leading to hazards, e.g. mixture of
flammable and explosive wastes can
cause explosion and fire. Therefore,
chemical wastes with different nature
should not be mixed / stored in the same
container.
9.5
Registration is a one-off requirement and not subject to

renewal. However, each registered chemical waste
producer has the obligation to notify EPD of any
change in the particulars of the registration. For
example, changes in:
Contact person
Telephone number or fax number
Correspondence address
Company name
Waste location
Business Registration Certificate
Application of Licence /
Registration
Registration as a Chemical Waste Producer is

required for construction sites generating
chemical wastes including:
Such notifications should be made in writing within two

weeks of the change.
9-2

No matter how small the waste quantity is,

as long as chemical waste is produced, the
producer is required to register.
A registered producer should properly keep
his chemical waste in designated storage area
until it is collected by a licensed collector.
In-house storage must comply with the
requirements prescribed under the Waste
Disposal (Chemical Waste)(General)
Regulation.
Please also refer to EPD "Code of Practice
on the Packaging, Labelling and Storage of
Chemical Wastes" for details
Figure 9.2 Flow Chart for Determination of Chemical Waste Producer
Waste
producer
to
identify nature of waste.
Review processes and
carry out laboratory test if
necessary.
1. Examine the activity which generates

chemical waste
2. Identify the nature and characteristics of
chemical waste
i.
Look at product information of
chemical being used
ii.
Consult supplier
iii. Employ consultant
iv. Laboratory test if you are not sure
If the waste contains a chemical listed in the

Schedule, you need to check whether the
waste is listed in Appendix B of EPDs A
Guide to the Registration of Chemical Waste
Producers (Guide).
NO
Does the waste
contain any
chemical listed in
Schedule 1
(Appendix A)
YES
Is the waste o
Chemical Waste
For complete listing of
Streams
No
Appendix
A&
(Appendix
B) B, please
refer to the EPD Guide.
NO
Although Appendix B
does not include a list
for construction
activities, registration is
usually required.
YES
9-3
Not subject
to
Registration
For complete listing of

Appendix A & B ,
Please refer to the EPD
Guide.
Annex 8.3 shows some common chemical

wastes
associated
with
construction
activities.
If you are still unclear or having difficulty in

classifying your waste, you should contact
EPD for guidance.
No
SUBJECT TO
REGISTRATION
REQUIREMENT
Seek advice
from EPD

Figure 9.3 Chemical Waste Licenses

Requirement
Upon registration, EPD may issue a notice

requesting you to furnish more information
on the wastes you produce.
According to section 23B of the Waste
Disposal Ordinance, you will be required to
furnish the information within the period
specified in the notice. Any person who fails
to comply with the requirement or provides
inaccurate/false information or omits
information commits an offence and is liable
to a fine of $100,000.
For construction activities, registration as a

chemical waste producer is required for the
generation of chemical waste (such as spent
lubricating oil). However, other licence(s) may
also be required depending on how you manage
the chemical waste, i.e. are you also responsible
for collection or disposal of chemical waste?
Figure below shows the licences required for
different steps in chemical waste management.
9.5.2
Chemical Waste Licences Application &

Requirements
License application to EPD is required for various
handling processes of chemical waste. Figure 9.3
shows the different chemical waste license
requirement.
Registration as Chemical Waste Producer (EPD 129)
Are there any other chemical waste related

licences I have to obtain for construction
activities?
If waste includes
any substance(s)
(i.e. Asbestos)
listed in Part A of
the Schedule,
Notification to EPD
is also required
9.6
If you are also

responsible for
waste collection to a
licensed reception
facility for
treatment/disposal,
you should apply for
A Waste Collection
Licence
If chemical waste
is reprocessed /
treated / recycled
on site, including
any on-site
treatment before
discharge, a Waste
Disposal Licence is
required
If chemical waste
containers sized
more than 450 L are
used for on-site
storage, approval is
required from EPD
Complete
EPD 132
for Notification
to EPD at least
10 working
days before
any intended
waste disposal
operation
Complete EPD
126 for Waste
Collection
Licence
Complete EPD
127 or On-line
Application for
Waste Disposal
Licence
Complete
Application for
Approval to use
Chemical Waste
Container(s)
Exceeding 450
Litres

Under the Waste Disposal (Chemical Waste)
(General) Regulation, waste producers are
required to arrange proper packaging,
labelling and storage of chemical waste
before they are transported off-site to
disposal facilities.
The new ETWB TCW No. 19/2005

Environmental Management on Construction
Sites includes the requirement for
environmental measures requiring
contractors to follow during the course of
construction.
9.6.1 Good Planning and Housekeeping

Good planning can:
9-4

Estimate the amount of chemicals needed

before the actual work; avoid excess ordering
and delivery of chemicals
Use chemicals efficiently; avoid overdosing
Minimise the possibility of expiry of chemicals
by tracking usage
Minimise the space necessary for excess
storage
Train and educate how to use chemicals
efficiently and minimise waste generated
Good housekeeping can:

Avoid prosecution
Avoid damage to health and environment, as
well as hazards
Lead to better image
Avoid wastage
Measures that can be taken include:
Minimise waste production as far as possible
Train staff for good practice in handling, storage
and disposal of chemical waste
Monitor the site environment, check waste skips
regularly for unauthorized disposal of chemicals
Monitor water quality to ensure no chemical
waste is disposed of improperly. For example:
- Observe for any oil present in water
discharge
- Use universal indicator paper to test the pH
- Check for any odour from discharge water
9.6.2
Minimising the Generation of Chemical

Waste
Quantities of chemical waste produced can be
reduced by careful site management.
You can use up leftover chemicals within the site or
from other sites according to their originally
intended purposes as far as possible. Good
practice can avoid contamination of chemicals with
other substances; thus enhancing the possibility to
minimising any surplus of the original chemicals;
thus avoiding wastage.
9.6.3
Treatment / Recycling / Disposal of

Chemical Wastes
The chemical waste producer is responsible for
arranging a Licensed Waste Collector(s) to collect
and dispose of (includes recycling or treatment)
chemical wastes.
The chemical waste producer is also required to

provide records to demonstrate that arrangements
have been made for proper disposal of the
chemical waste. Chemical waste producer is
required to keep a copy of trip ticket of each waste
consignment for 12 months.
For construction sites in Hong Kong, off-site
treatment of chemical waste at licensed
reception
facilities
through
licensed
collectors is required.
9.6.4 Licensing of a Chemical Waste Collector

If a contractor wishes to carry out the collection or
removal of chemical waste, they should apply for a
Waste Collection Licence from EPD. This
requirement applies also to a waste producer if he
wishes to collect and transport his own waste.
An application should be made in a specified form
which can be obtained from the EPD. Each
application should be accompanied by the
appropriate licence fee set out in the Waste
Disposal (Permits, Authorisations and Licences)
(Fees) Regulation. The current fee levels for the
application can be found in EPDs webpage.
The following information is needed for a Waste

Collection Licence application:
Particulars of the applicant, including details of
key management staff;
The types and quantities of waste to be
collected;
The collection vehicles/vessels and equipment
to be used (including relevant drawings, plans
and specifications); and
An Operational Plan which covers a detailed
description of the collection operation as
specified in the Concise Guide in Writing an
Operational Plan for Chemical Waste Collector.
Empty chemical containers, when drained of
all chemicals, are not classified as chemical
wastes and such containers may be
disposed of in landfill sites. There are also
waste collectors which collect empty
containers for reuse and refill.
9.6.5 Trip Ticket System

Waste producers should only engage licensed
waste collectors to arrange for the collection and
removal of chemical waste.
9-5

Waste collectors are persons licensed by EPD to

provide such services.
Monitor chemical waste movements

The chemical waste producer and licensed collector
shall each complete his part on the trip ticket when
the waste is collected for disposal. The Trip Ticket
System Procedures are shown in Figure 9.4.
Figure 9.4 Trip Ticket System Procedures
Waste Collector
keeps trip-ticket
during transportation
Waste Producer
retains 1 copy
Waste
Producer to
produce copies
on request
Waste
Collector
retains 1
copy
Records of
trip-tickets in
computer or
other format
accepted by
EPD
(EPD may
check records)
Disposal
Point
Manager
retains
original
Drums and jerricans are preferred as they are

commonly available and suitable for a wide
range of waste.
Consideration should be given to the quantity
and frequency of chemical waste produced
when determining the size of containers to be
used. This should be carried out in the planning
stage.
Space and access within the premises should
also be considered if large size containers have
to be moved between the production and
storage areas.
For construction sites, chemical waste normally
will not be produced in very large quantities,
therefore smaller containers are recommended.
You can also use the original chemical
container for storing the same type of chemical
waste, to save cost and minimise waste.
Plastic and steel are the most common types of
materials of containers.
For wastes in solid and bulky form, e.g.,
asbestos waterpipes or PCB contaminated
equipment, heavy duty and leak proof plastic
sheets should be used.
Figure 9.6 shows the important issues about the

use of chemical waste containers.
Trip Ticket System Checklists for Waste

Producer
A trip ticket system checklist for the chemical waste
producer is shown in Figure 9.5.
Please refer to EPD Code of Practice on the

Packaging, Labelling and Storage of Chemical
Wastes
, Code of Practice on the Handling,
Transportation and Disposal of Asbestos Waste
and Code of Practice on the Handling,
Transportation and Disposal of Polychlorinated
Biphenyl (PCB) Waste
for details.
9.6.6 Packaging
Chemical waste should be packed and held in
containers of suitable design and construction so as
to:
Prevent leakage
Prevent spillage or escape of contents under
normal conditions of handling, storage and
transport
The recommended types of containers are listed as
below:
The use of any container with a capacity
exceeding 450 litres is subject to the approval
of the EPD.
9-6

Figure 9.5 Trip Ticket System Checklist for

Waste Producer
Trip Ticket
Checklist:
Have you completed all the necessary

particulars and information on the Ticket?
Have you checked that all copies of the Ticket

are clearly filled in?
Have you checked that the waste to be

delivered is correctly classified, described,
quantified and labelled?
Have you checked and certified the Ticket?
Have you kept a copy of the Ticket for your

record?
Have you given the original and one further

copy to the waste collector?
Waste collector should keep a copy
Reception point manager of the disposal
facility will keep the original
Note:
Retain your copy of the trip ticket for at least

12 months following the consignment of the
waste
Waste collector should deliver the collected

waste to a reception point within 48 hours of
collection and should not unload the collected
wastes from collection vehicles for any off-site
storage.
Any subsequent transfer of waste from a

reception point would also need to follow the
same Trip Ticket requirements
Waste producers, waste collectors and

reception point managers are obliged to
provide EPD with any extra information
requested within a specified time
9-7

Figure 9.6 Important Issues in Using a Chemical Waste Container
Sufficient Air Space in

Containers when Storing
Liquid Waste
Securely Closed
Every container should

be securely closed or
sealed, correctly stored
and kept clean
No chemical waste
should be allowed to
adhere to the external
surface of the container
Waste producer should
ensure that the cap is
securely fitted and waste
may not escape by any
means
XXX
yyyyyy
Resistant to the Contents
Containers must not be

liable to react with
contents
Waste producers have
the responsibility to
ensure
that
the
containers
are
compatible with the
chemical waste to be
packed / stored
Separate
containers
should be used for
different types of waste
or waste arising from
different sources or
processes
Chemical
Waste
Container
No Mixing of Incompatible
Waste
Must not mix different

types of chemical waste
in the same container
where such mixing is
likely to produce
dangerous
consequences (E.g.
mixture of strong acids
and strong alkalis may
cause explosion with
excessive heat
generation). Hazardous
waste compatibility chart
is shown in Annex 8.4
9.6.7 Labelling
Every container of chemical waste should be
labelled clearly, in both Chinese and English
The waste producer should ensure that the
information contained on the label is accurate
and sufficient so as to enable proper and safe
handling, storage and transport of the chemical
waste
The label should be securely attached to a
suitable part of the container (to the sides of
9-8
Sufficient air space should

be allowed to ensure that
neither leakage nor
permanent distortion of
the container occurs as a
result of liquid expansion
caused by changes in
temperature or other
physical conditions which
are likely to occur under
normal conditions of
handling, storage and
transport
Minimum 100mm air
space should be allowed
between container top and
stored waste
In Good Condition
Free from corrosion,
contamination, damage or
defects which may impair
the performance of the
container
Waste producer should
carry out visual inspection
of both outside & inside of
the container to determine
the condition before it is
used or re-used for storing
chemical waste. If there is
doubt related to the
integrity of the container,
DO NOT use it
drum and not on the top), which allows the

information on the label to be easily read
Remove old labels from the containers if you
decide to reuse or recondition containers
The label should contain all the particulars as

shown in Figure 9.7.

Figure 9.7 Information to be included in

Chemical Waste Label
CHEMICAL WASTE
Chemical name/Common name
code consists of Process code and Waste subcode.

Particular Risk and Safety Precaution
A full list of recommended risk phrases and safety
precautions should be addressed.
A typical chemical waste label is shown below.
Symbol
Waste type and Code
Particular Risks
Name, address and

Telephone No. of Waste
Producer

Safety Precautions
Title of Label
Not be less than 1/20th of the area of the label. For
small-size labels, the minimal size of the characters
should be around 5mm high.
Symbol
Not be less than 1/10th of the label 2area
No case shall be less than 500mm
Minimum dimension should be 25mm 25mm
Chemical Classification Symbols
Chemical Name
Waste types and codes for different chemical
wastes can be found in EPDs A Guide to the
Registration of Chemical Waste Producers. Waste
9-9
A Typical Chemical Waste Label
Sizes of Chemical Waste Labels

The dimension of the labels should be as follows:
Capacity of
Container
Dimension of label to be not

less than:
< 50 litres
90mm 100mm
50 450 litres
120mm 150mm
> 450 litres
180mm 200mm
9.6.8 Storage
The chemical waste producer should provide a
suitable area for temporary storage of chemical
waste. The illustrations are shown in Figure 9.8.
The storage area should be used for chemical
waste storage only. It is strictly forbidden to
store chemical waste with either chemicals or
dangerous good substances in the same
storage facility.
The storage area should be located close to the
source of waste generation.
The storage area should be enclosed on at
least three sides by a wall, partition or fence
with a height of not less than two metres or at
least the total height of containers in the stack.
Suitable materials for enclosures:
- Concrete
- Brick
- Steel with protective coating or treatment
Enclosures should be rigidly erected and fixed
to the area.
Adequate space should be allowed within the
storage area for container handling by workers

Containers of incompatible chemical waste

must not be stored together where potentially
dangerous consequence may result in the
event of contact between the wastes.
A warning sign that indicates the English words
and Chinese characters CHEMICAL WASTE
clearly and boldly in red on a white

background with a letter/character size of not
less than 60mm high should be displayed at or
near the entrance or opening of the storage
area for chemical waste other than asbestos

and PCB wastes.
For more details on the requirements of storage
area and warning panel for asbestos and PCB
wastes, please refer to Section 7 of the Code of
Practice on the Handling, Transportation and
Disposal of Asbestos Waste or Section 7 of the
Code
of
Practice
on
the
Handling,
Transportation and Disposal of Polychlorinated
Biphenyl (PCB) waste.
Figure 9.8 Chemical Waste Storage Facilities Enclosure

Impervious
wall/partition made
of suitable material
Storage of
incompatible wastes
in different areas
Impermeable floor
made of suitable
materials to withstand
normal abrasion and
chemical action of the
stored chemical waste
Bund (max. 200mm height) to retain

potential leakage of the capacity of the
largest container or 20% of the storage
capacity whichever is the greater
Chemical Waste Store
Requirements for Chemical Waste Storage:

Ensure adequate ventilation (leave some space
between top of enclosure walls and ceiling; or
provide louvers on the sides of enclosure walls.
Should be no connection to any surface water
drains or foul sewers.
Should not obstruct any means of escape.
Roof or cover should be used if enclosure is
located outside building, to prevent rain and
reduce heat from sunlight.
9-10
Raise floor area if flooding is likely.

Additional drip trays are encouraged for extra
prevention measures.
Storage area should be kept secured with an
appropriate door/gate and locked at all time.
Storage area should be kept clean and dry.
Size of enclosure can be predicted by the
amount of chemical waste produced and
chemical containers used. Allow additional
space for unpredicted waste.
Stacks of containers should be secured and
easily accessible without risk when handling the
chemical waste containers.
The maximum height of a stack should not be
more than 2.5 metres.
Please refer to MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet)

for the potential hazard of different chemical wastes.
Do not mix incompatible wastes into the same
container.

For a proactive compliance check on

construction site, EPD staff would check
whether all chemical wastes are properly
packaged, labelled and stored; and that the
wastes have not been improperly disposed
of. The storage area should be enclosed on
three sides and should be kept secured with
door/gate locked at all times except for
necessary access. The Contractor has to
retain the trip tickets for inspection by EPD
staff.
9.7
For small chemical waste producers (those

requiring less than 300 litres of storage capacity in
total), Chemical Waste Storage Cupboards as
shown below can be used instead of Enclosures.
Drip tray to
contain leakage
Vent
Holes
Storage of
incompatible waste
in separate areas
Impermeable sill to contain

leakage or spillage
Chemical Waste Store - Cupboard
Storage shelves should be fitted with a leakproof tray or spill catcher trays in its base to
retain the capacity of the largest container or
20% of the total storage capacity in that shelf,
whichever is greater, so that chemical waste
can be retained within the trays if spillage
occurs, without overflowing to other shelves or
outside the shelves.
Storage shelves should be strong enough to
carry the full weight of the filled containers
being stored.
Ventilation holes of at least 30mm diameter
located at the top and bottom of the side panels
of the cupboard.
9-11
Materials for tray and cupboard should be able

to withstand the chemical action of the chemical
waste stored in the containers. E.g. steel with
protective coating.
A proper warning sign should be displayed at or
near the door of the cupboard (refer to Section
9.6.7 for details).
Practice to Reduce the Risk of

Spillage
Reduce the amount of chemical waste
generated during activities by careful planning
and usage.
Reduce the amount of chemical waste stored
on site, regular collection of chemical waste by
licensed Waste Collector.
Chemical waste should be stored within
designated enclosure, away from direct sunlight
or heat generating / propagating activities.
Always close the door of enclosure.
Ensure ventilation is adequate within enclosure,
prevent the building up of gaseous substances.
Separate incompatible chemical waste from
each other.
Use a pump instead of simple pouring to
transfer liquid waste.
Ensure caps and lids are tightly fitted to seal
containers.
Ensure drip trays are placed under each
chemical waste container, so that any spillage
can be retained.
Check conditions of containers regularly.
Avoid the use of large size containers, as they
are hard to handle and transport.
Clearly label all the chemical waste.
Use suitable carriers to transfer containers
between locations.
Provide training to staff on chemical waste
handling.
Ensure the shelves are secure, and easily
accessible to collect or handle chemical waste
containers.
Use absorbent materials to absorb spillage of
chemicals or chemical wastes. (Note: Used
absorbent materials should be handled as
chemical wastes). The following figures show
the spill control kit and the handling of chemical
spill.
Regular drills on handling of chemical spills
should be conducted.

Chemical Drums on Drip Tray
Handling of Chemical Spill
Chemical Spill Control Kit
9-12

Appendix 9.1: Good Housekeeping Checklist for Chemical Waste Management

Good Housekeeping Checklist for Chemical Waste Management
Items
Implemented
Yes
No
Chemical waste is packaged and labelled properly as soon as

they are produced
A proper chemical waste container/packaging is used
Container/packaging has markings that conform to EPD

Specifications
Container/packaging is made of compatible materials
Seek approval from EPD if container/packaging exceeds 450 L
The labels on the container/packaging are clear, intact and

adhere firmly to the container/packaging
The labels contained all required information:
English Word Chemical Waste
Chinese Characters
Appropriate symbol
Name, address & contact phone number of the chemical waste

producer
Chemical name and common name of the substance
Waste Type and Code Labelled
Hazard Classification Symbol
Indication of Particular Risks
Indication of Safety Precautions
The waste container is in good condition (no corrosion, damage,

contamination) and the caps are kept tightly closed
The storage area is kept dry and clean and is used for storage of
chemical waste only
Different types/sources of chemical wastes are stored in different

containers
For liquid waste, about 100mm air space is allowed between top
of container and level of liquid contents
The storage area is enclosed by at least a 3-sided structure
A proper warning panel is displayed at or near the entrance or

opening of the storage area
10
The storage area is provided with a roof or similar covering
11
The enclosed storage structure has vent holes or ventilation

facilities
12
The storage area is constructed of concrete, brick or steel (can

be a cupboard or cabinet for waste quantities <300L)
A9-1
Remarks

Good Housekeeping Checklist for Chemical Waste Management

Items
Implemented
Yes
No
13
The location for waste storage is labelled clearly and away from
any potential hazard e.g. heat generating activities
14
The chemical waste container is put inside a drip tray or a spill

retention structure is available to contain spillage
15
The drip tray or cabinet is free of other substances (e.g.

rubbish/spillage) except those contained in the waste
container(s)
16
Incompatible wastes are prevented from mixing in case of a spill
17
The storage structure has no connection to the sewer or surface

water drain
18
The storage structure for liquid chemical wastes has a retention

capacity for 20% of the total waste stored or the volume of the
biggest container, whichever is the greater
19
Emergency procedure for spillage or leakage of chemical waste

is posted for workers reference
20
Disposal records i.e. trip tickets for chemical waste are retained
21
No stacking of containers of chemical waste exceeding 2.5

meters
22
Stacks of containers are made secure to prevent their falling

down
23
Conduct regular drills on handling of chemical spills. Chemical

spillage handling kit is provided at site
24
Emergency contact telephone numbers are displayed for quick

reference in handling chemical spills
ii
Remarks

Chapter 10 Land Contamination
Table of Contents
10
LAND CONTAMINATION .......................................................................................................... 10-1

10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
General.......................................................................................................................... 10-1
Terminology ................................................................................................................... 10-1
Land Contamination Caused by Construction Activities .................................................. 10-1
Land Uses with Potential to Have Land Contamination ................................................... 10-1
Contamination Assessment Process .............................................................................. 10-2
Soil Contamination Treatment Technology ..................................................................... 10-3
List of Figures
Figure 10.1
The Contamination Assessment Process in Hong Kong ................................................. 10-2

10 Land Contamination
10.1
General
Contaminated land is caused by spillage, leakage

or disposal of toxic chemicals to the ground. Soil at
or below the ground surface and sometimes
groundwater may be contaminated depending on
the subsurface conditions. Before a contaminated
site is re-developed, it is necessary to assess the
level of contamination.
If contamination is above an acceptable level,
defined by a set of standards or remediation goals,
remediation is required to render the site safe for
future use.
Historically, Hong Kong had no locally-derived
contaminated land standards. The Dutch B levels of
the Netherlands referenced in the Practice Note for
Professional Persons for Contaminated Land
Assessment and Remediation, ProPECC PN 3/94
issued by EPD in 1994, have been used up to 14
November 2007. Since 15 August 2007, with a
transitional period of 3 months, a set of locallyderived contaminated land standards, the RBRGs,
has been adopted which is in line with the latest
international practice.
More details can be found in the Guidance Note for
Contaminated Land Assessment and Remediation
which supersedes the ProPECC PN 3/94.
This
section
explains
the
contamination
assessment process adopted in Hong Kong and
describes commonly available contamination
treatment technology.
10.2
Terminology
chemicals. The RBRGs are developed for four

broad post-restoration land use categories, namely
urban residential, rural residential, industrial, and
public parks.
They are intended to be used as site assessment
criteria that will be appropriate on a stand-alone
basis for the majority of sites in Hong Kong, where
human health is the only significant receptor that
needs to be protected.
The philosophy of the RBRGs is that, in being riskbased, they tailor the extent of remediation required
to the level of risk under certain land uses. For
example as residential land use is more sensitive
than industrial land use that land would need to be
remediated to a greater extent.
10.3
Land Contamination Caused

by
There are several construction activities that

lead to land contamination. These include:
Plant maintenance;
Refuelling;
Accidental spillage from storage of
chemical and chemical waste; and
Accidental leakage of fuel, hydraulic oil
lubrication oil from construction plant
vehicles.
may
Risk-Based Remediation Goals (RBRGs)

The Risk-Based Remediation Goals (RBRGs) have
been designed to protect the health of people who
could potentially be exposed to land impacted by
10-1
and
and
The scale of the land contamination arising from

these construction activities is usually very small.
The Contractor may adopt the emergency
procedure for chemical spillage as detailed in
Chapter 3 of this Guide for cleaning up any
contamination.
10.4
Contaminated Land
Contaminated land refers to land which has been
polluted by hazardous substances as a result of
industrial or commercial operations carried out on
and around the site over a number of years. Very
often, these contaminants pose hazardous risks or
may cause detrimental effects to the land users or
the nearby environment.
fuel,
Land Uses with Potential to Have

Land Contamination
A number of industries in Hong Kong have been

identified as having potential for causing land
contamination. These include:
boatyards;
scrap yards;
power plants;
gas works;
petrol filling stations;
vehicle repair/maintenance or dismantling
workshops;
Seabed soil in reclaimed land;
metal or mechanical workshops; and
oil installations (e.g. oil depots).

10.5
Contamination Assessment Process
The primary responsibility for this process usually

rests with project proponent during the EIA process.
The Contractor may have a role to play in the
process depending on the contractual requirements.
Usually only the remediation process in accordance
with the Remediation Action Plan (see Section
10.5.3) may involve the Contractor.
The contamination assessment process in Hong
Kong is illustrated in Figure 10.1. RBRGs should be
used to determine the need for future action and
remediation at a contaminated site.
Figure 10.1
The Contamination Assessment Process in
Hong Kong
Conduct initial
site appraisal
Plan and
design site
investigation
10.5.1 Contamination Assessment Plan (CAP)

The CAP should be submitted to EPD after initial
site appraisal, prior to commencement of land
contamination investigation.
The content of the CAP should include:
Site description
Past and present site activities
Inventory of chemicals/hazardous substances
and their handling/storage
Design of land contamination investigation
Prepare CAR
Site concentration
above RBRGs?
Submit
CAR to
EPD for
approval
Yes
Prepare RAP and submit

both CAR and RAP to
EPD for approval
More detail can be found in the Guidance Manual

for Use of Risk-Based Remediation Goals for
Contaminated Land.
Conduct site
investigation
No
The RAP and CAR may be submitted as a

combined report for EPDs approval referencing the
corresponding CAP prior to the commencement of
clean up work on site.
Contaminated Land Management

and Practice
Guide for Investigation and Remediation of
Obtain
endorsement of
CAP from EPD
Assessment process
Based on the endorsed CAP, the project proponent

should conduct a contamination assessment and
compile a Contamination Assessment Report (CAR)
to document the findings for approval by the EPD. If
the findings confirm that the site is contaminated, a
Remediation Action Plan (RAP) should be drawn up.
Implement RAP
After remediation, submit
Remediation Report to
EPD for endorsement
Implementation of the RBRGs and an assessment

of the RBRGs to chemical concentrations detected
on a site should be undertaken by a competent
specialist consultant.
Prior to the commencement of the land
contamination site investigation work, the project
proponent has to prepare and submit a
Contamination Assessment Plan (CAP) to EPD for
endorsement.
10-2
10.5.2 Contamination
Assessment
Report
(CAR)
The CAR should be submitted to EPD after land
contamination investigation is completed.
The content of the CAR should include:
Procedure of land contamination investigation
Field results
Laboratory results
Interpretation of results
Plans showing contaminant distribution
10.5.3 Remediation Action Plan (RAP)
If the CAR shows that contamination is above an
acceptable level as defined in RBRGs, a RAP
should be devised. The RAP should be submitted
to EPD after site investigation is completed, but
prior to commencement of site remediation. It is to
be submitted together with the CAR if remediation
is required.
The content of the RAP should include:
Background information from CAR

Objectives of remediation action

Evaluation of remediation alternatives
Design and operation of remediation
Implementation programme.
The whole contamination assessment
process for a typical site takes
approximately 6 months to complete and any
follow-up remediation, if necessary, may take
another 6 months or more. Therefore, it is
advised to conduct the required assessment
as soon as the site is available or accessible
to avoid any delay to the subsequent
construction programme.
10.6
Soil
Contamination
Technology
Treatment
The selection of an appropriate treatment method

for remediation a site would depend on a number of
factors:
Nature of the contamination;
Level of the contamination;
Future use of the site;
Soil characteristics;
Time allowable;
Treatment cost;
Availability of local expertise and facilities for
undertaking the treatment; and
Disposal of the contaminated wastes.
A number of options for remediation are described
in this section. The method used should follow that
described in the RAP.
10.6.1 Biopiling
Biopiling is an ex-situ bioremediation method that
makes use of the biodegrading ability of naturally
occurring or specifically added bacteria to break
down the contaminants in the soil or to convert
them into harmless substances (such as carbon
dioxide and water).
Application and Environmental Benefits
Effective to Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons
(TPH) and a wide range of organic
contaminants with some successful local case
studies, e.g. decontamination works at the
Cheoy Lee Shipyard at Pennys Bay and
reclamation works at North Tsing Yi Shipyard
site.
Most cost-effective for large volumes of
contaminated soil.
All materials and equipment are commercially
available.
10-3
Can be designed to be a closed system; vapour

emissions can be controlled.
Limitations and Environmental Dis-benefits

Labour-intensive;
require
considerable
maintenance.
Time-consuming (~1 year required) and not
cost-effective for treating small volume of soil.
Space required for biopile construction.
10.6.2 Soil Venting
Soil venting is a technology that uses air to extract
volatile contaminants from contaminated soils. The
technology is also known as soil vapor extraction, in
situ volatilization, in situ vapor extraction, in situ air
stripping, enhanced volatilization, in situ soil
ventilation, and vacuum extraction.
This is done by applying a vacuum through wells
and extracting the air in the contaminated zone.
Commonly used for the removal of volatile to
semi-volatile organics from a site.
Suitable for remediation in built up areas
because wells can be placed between or below
buildings.
Applicable to large sites with widespread
contamination.
Uses readily available equipment; easy to
install.
Vapour emissions can be controlled but not to
the extent of biopiling due to underground soil
in-situ properties.
Effectiveness is limited by underground soil
features e.g. soil moisture content and
permeability.
May induce possible air emission to the
Require large space for the system
development.
10.6.3 Landfarming
Landfarming is an ex-situ bioremediation method
usually involves spreading excavated contaminated
soils in a thin layer on the ground surface and
stimulating aerobic microbial activity within the soils
through aeration and/or the addition of minerals,
nutrients and moisture.
Very effective in treating TPH
Simple to design and implement

May induce possible dust and vapour emission

to sensitive receivers (surrounding factories
and buildings) and is relatively difficult to
control.
Requires a large flat space for the system

development.
Slow bioremediation rate and require long

operation period (as long as 2 years) which
may affect future development schedule.
10.6.4 Solidification/Stabilization
Solidification/Stabilization is an in-situ or ex-situ
immobilization technique that treats contaminated
soil by mixing soil with binding agents, e.g. cement
so that the contaminants become to chemically and
physically bound within a stable mass.
Solidification/stabilization has been used on certain
contaminated sites in Hong Kong and is
demonstrated as a successful treatment method for
inorganic contaminated soil, e.g. decontamination
works at the Cheoy Lee Shipyard at Pennys Bay,
reclamation works at North Tsing Yi Shipyard site
and a few isolated sites identified in the Deep Bay
Link project.
In-situ Method
Applicable to clean-up inorganic contaminants
(including radionuclides).
Timeframe is short to medium-term.
Limitations and Environmental Downsides
Depth of contaminants may limit some types of
application processes.
Future usage of may weather the materials
and affect ability to maintain immobilization of
contaminants.
No/Limited effectiveness against VOCs, SVOCs
and pesticides depends on type of methods
employed.
Increase in volume of material following
treatment.
Certain wastes are incompatible with variations
of the processes.
Treatability studies are generally required.
Reagent delivery, effective mixing and
confirmatory sampling are more difficult than
ex-situ application.
Solidified material may hinder future site use.
10-4
Processing of contamination below the water

table may require dewatering.
Ex-situ Method
Applicable to clean-up inorganic contaminants
such as heavy metals.
Limitations and Environmental Downsides
The effectiveness reduces with the presence of
organic contaminants.
Large boulders may hinder the mixing process.
Soil sorting is necessary before the treatment
taken place.
Increase in volume of material following
treatment.
10.6.5 Soil Washing
Soil Washing is an ex-situ soil separation
processes mostly based on mineral processing
techniques. It is a water-based process for
scrubbing soils ex-situ to remove contaminants.
Applicable to clean inorganic contaminants
such as heavy metals from coarse-grained soils.
The effectiveness of the treatment depends on
soil particle size. Fine soil particles may require
the addition of a polymer to remove them from
the washing fluid.
Complex waste mixtures make formulating
washing fluid difficult.
Requires further treatment and disposal for
residuals.
10.6.6 Excavation and Landfill Disposal
Excavation and landfill disposal is an ex-situ
method whereby contaminants are removed by
excavation of the contaminated soil and direct
disposal to landfill.
Most simple and quickest way to dispose of
contaminated soil.
Wide experience in Hong Kong.
Applicable to all waste or mixture that meet
landfill disposal criteria.


Generally not allowed and approval only
granted when there is no other feasible
methods.
Only small disposal quantity is allowed.
Pre-treatment
may
be
required
for
contaminated soil to meet landfill disposal
criteria.
Landfill space limited and valuable.
Indirect costs to the landfill management on
monitoring and maintenance.
Potential long-term liabilities to landfill.
Need large volume of clean backfill materials.
No access to the working site until completion
of backfilling.
Least desirable management option.
Landfill disposal should be considered as the
last resort and should be employed only when
all other remediation measures as well as reuse
option are proved to be inappropriate or
infeasible, when there is very localized
contamination of the site, and when the quantity
of excavated material requiring landfilling is
small.
The disposal of contaminated soils at landfills is
not allowed unless other in-situ or ex-situ
remediation measures as well as reuse of soil
either on-site or off-site are proved to be
inappropriate or infeasible. To ensure landfill
stability and safety, landfill disposal can be
adopted only for localized contamination and
where the extent of contamination is small.
10-5

Chapter 11 Protection of Ecological Resources
Table of Contents
11
PROTECTION OF ECOLOGICAL RESOURCES ....................................................................... 11-1

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Terminology ................................................................................................................... 11-1

Tree Management.......................................................................................................... 11-1
Ecological Sensitive Receivers....................................................................................... 11-2
Ecological Mitigation Measures ...................................................................................... 11-3

11 Protection of Ecological Resources

11.1
Tree Survey Report

A Tree Survey Report is a report usually prepared
by a landscape architect during the planning stage
of a proposed development. The report usually
contains an inventory of existing trees affected by
the proposed development; tree survey plans
showing location and condition of trees;
photographic records of the affected trees; and a
proposal for tree retention, transplantation, felling
and compensatory planting.
Tree Protection Zone
A Tree Protection Zone is the area the perimeter of
which is defined by the dripline of the tree. Dripline
of a tree means the imaginary vertical plumb line
that extends downward from the tips of the outer
most tree branches and intersects the ground.
11.2
value in the vicinity. To strike a balance

between cost and benefit, only trees with high
conservation value or high amenity value
including rare and precious species and
transplantable trees (i.e. trees that have a
very good chance of recovering to its normal
form) should be considered for transplanting;
and
Terminology
Tree Management
11.2.1 Definition of Tree

According to ETWB TCW 3/2006, a plant is
considered as a tree if its trunk diameter
measures 95 mm or more at a height of 1.3m
above the ground level.
(d) Felling of trees will only be considered as a last

resort.
11.2.3 Management of Trees at Construction
Site
Trees at the construction site should be managed in
accordance with the recommendations in the Tree
Survey Report and the EIA Report. In general, the
following good practices shall be adopted:
Erect, secure and maintain in good condition
temporary protective fencing to protect the
preserved trees before commencement of any
works within the site. The temporary protective
fencing should be erected along or beyond the
perimeter of the tree protection zone of each
individual tree.
11.2.2 Hierarchy
for
Tree
Management
Consideration
No tree should be unnecessarily felled or pruned.
The following order of priority should be adopted for
tree management considerations:
(a) Retain the trees at their existing locations with
protection;
(b) If (a) is not possible, transplant the affected
trees to other permanent locations within the
site, so as to increase the trees survival rate
after transplantation and minimize the loss of
greenery on the local environs. This should be
considered as far as possible unless the trees
affected are of low conservation and amenity
value, or have a low chance of surviving or
recovering to its normal form after transplanting;
(c) If both (a) and (b) are not possible, transplant
the trees to a permanent location off site.
Location of receptor site should preferably be
within the same area for retention of amenity
11-1
Temporary Protective Fencing

(Photo extracted from the EPDs website)
No nails or other fixings shall be driven into the

trees.
No fencing, services, or signs other than the
identification labels or markings shall be
attached to any part of the trees.
No trees shall be used as anchorages for ropes
or chains used in guying or pulling or for
equipment used for removing stumps, roots or
other trees, or for any other purposes.

No soil, materials, equipment or machinery

shall be stockpiled or stored within the tree
protection zones.
No site offices, workshops, canteens,
containers or similar structures shall be
installed within the tree protection zones.
Excessive water shall be drained away from the
tree protection zones to prevent damage to tree
roots by asphyxiation.
No chemical / chemical waste store shall be set
up within the tree protection zone to avoid
accidental chemical spillage that may cause
damage to the tree.
Wheel washing bay / concrete lorry mixer
washing area (if nay) shall be located away
from tree protection zone to prevent the alkaline
washout from damaging the roots of trees.
No passage or parking of vehicles and no
operation of equipment or machinery shall take
place within the tree protection zones unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
No stripping of surface vegetation or top layer
of soil shall be carried out within the tree
protection zones unless otherwise agreed by
the Engineer.
11.2.4 Control Procedures for Tree Felling or

Transplanting
Public Works
The control procedures for tree felling or
transplanting for public works are detailed in ETWB
TCW 3/2006 and are extracted below:
The project office shall submit an application to
the relevant District Lands Officer (DLO) for
formal approval of the felling/transplanting
proposal, with copies to Agriculture, Fisheries
and Conservation Department (AFCD) or
Leisure and Cultural Services Department
(LCSD), or the relevant tree maintenance
departments as appropriate.
LandsD will scrutinise the application and reply
to the applicant within 10 weeks from the date
of receipt of an application with all the requisite
information, or within 4 weeks upon receipt of
all comments from relevant departments,
whichever is the earlier.
Longer processing time may be required should
the proposal involve felling or transplanting of a
tree included in the Register of Old and
Valuable Trees.
Where the project office disagrees with DLOs
decision on the tree felling/transplanting
application, either party may bring the dispute
11-2
to the District Lands Conference (DLC) under

LandsD for a decision.
For removal of Old and Valuable Trees, the
project office should seek recommendation
from Development Bureau before an appeal is
made to DLC for decision.
Private Projects
The control procedures for tree felling or
transplanting for private projects are detailed in
Lands Department Practice Note 7/2007 and
extracted as below:
The lot owners or their Authorized Person (AP)
shall submit an application to DLO under the
tree preservation clause of the lease.
The application should contain a conceptual
proposal comprising the tree survey submission,
the tree removal proposal together with
justifications for tree felling, transplanting, tree
preservation/protection measures and a
conceptual compensatory planting proposal and
a detailed compensatory planting proposal.
To ensure compliance with the tree
preservation clause, the pre-sale consent will
not be given unless and until approval to all
aspects of the tree removal including any
required compensatory planting proposal of the
application has been obtained.
11.2.5 Penalty for Illegal Tree Felling
Illegal tree felling is liable for prosecution and fine.
For trees on unleased Government land, they are
protected under the Forests and Countryside
Ordinance. Under the Ordinance, any person who
fells any trees on unleased Government land is
punishable by a fine up to $25,000 and
imprisonment up to one year.
For trees on leased Government land, felling of
trees not in accordance with the tree preservation
clause of the lease is punishable by a fine. The
amount of fine may be as high as few ten
thousands dollars per tree.
11.3
Ecological Sensitive Receivers
Ecological Sensitive Receivers are areas of

ecological importance that should be conserved as
far as possible. Such receivers include wildlife
habitat, protected species and endangered species.
11.3.1 Wildlife Habitat
A wildlife habitat is an environmental area that is
inhabited by a particular species. It is the natural
environment in which an organism lives, or the

physical environment that surrounds (influences

and is utilized by) a species population.
Common important habitat types include:
mature native woodland larger than one hectare
undisturbed natural coastal area larger than
one hectare or longer than 500 metres in linear
measurement
intertidal mudflats larger than one hectare
established mangrove stands of any size
brackish or freshwater marshes larger than one
hectare
established seagrass bed of any size
natural stream courses and rivers longer than
500 metres
established coral communities of any size
other habitats found to have special
conservation importance by documented
scientific studies such as country parks; marine
reserves; marine parks and Ramsar Site
11.3.2 Endangered Species
Endangered species is a population of an organism
which is at risk of becoming extinct because it is
either few in number, or threatened by changing
environmental or predation parameters.
Such
species are listed in the Protection of Endangered
Species of Animals and Plants Ordinance.
Common endangered species include:
Chinese White Dolphin
Tiger
Elephant
Sulphur crested cockatoo ()
Slipper orchids ()
11.3.3 Protected Species

Protected species are animals and plants defined in
Wild Animals Protection Ordinance and Forests and
Countryside Ordinance respectively.
Common protected animal species include:
All wild birds
Squirrels
Monkey
Water Monitor
Romer's Tree Frog ()
Birdwing Butterfly ()
Common protected plant species include:
Orchids ()
11-3
Azaleas ()
Chinese New Year Flower ()
Pitcher-plants ()
11.4
Ecological Mitigation Measures
11.4.1 Hierarchy for Ecological Mitigation

Consideration
The general policy for mitigating ecological impacts
on important habitats and wildlife, in the order of
priority, are:
Avoidance
Potential impacts shall be avoided to the maximum
extent practicable such as adopting suitable
alternatives (e.g. change of site, design,
construction method, alignment, layout, programme,
etc.).
Minimizing
Unavoidable impacts shall be minimized by taking
appropriate and practicable measures such as
constraints on intensity of works operations or
timing of works operations.
Compensation
The loss of important species and habitats may be
provided elsewhere (on-site or off-site) as a
compensation.
Enhancement
and
other
conservation measures should always be
considered whenever possible.
11.4.2 Ecological Mitigation Measures at
Construction Site
Ecological impacts should have been fully
considered during the project planning and EIA
stages such that the impacts have been mitigated
through project design to acceptable level.
Residual ecological impacts during construction
period on site should be managed in accordance
with the recommendations in the EIA Report and
the Particular Specifications of the construction
contract. In general, the following measures may
be adopted at construction site:
Re-provision or enhancement of habitats such
as fish pond, marsh and reedbed as
compensation for ecological impact. A detailed
method statement should be prepared for the
landscape architect and ecologists review.
Installation of piezometer for monitoring of
groundwater level and recharge to restore the
local groundwater to the acceptable envelope
when necessary.

Carry out baseline and periodic measurement

of ecological attributes throughout the
construction period.
Such attributes may
include:
- Survival, growth and reproduction of key
species (especially sown, planted or
translocated species).
- Health of planted species e.g. pest or fungal
attack.
- Plant species richness and diversity.
- Presence or abundance of selected
ecological indicator species.
Restrict construction activities to work areas
that should be clearly demarcated. The work
areas should be reinstated after completion of
the works.
Minimize the use of reflective materials to avoid
collision by birds.
Place equipment or stockpiles in designated
works areas and select access routes on
existing disturbed land to minimise disturbance
to natural habitats.
Animals shall not be fed and no food shall be
left for any animals and no pets of any type
shall be allowed on the site.
11-4

Chapter 12 Resources Management
Table of Contents
12
RESOURCES MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................. 12-1

12.1
12.2
Rationales for Resources Management .......................................................................... 12-1

Measures for Resources Management ........................................................................... 12-1

12 Resources Management
12.1
Rationales
Management
for
Devise a preventive maintenance programme for

construction equipment to ensure they are
operating efficiently.
Resources
Resource use on construction sites mainly includes

construction materials (concrete, steel and timber),
water, energy and paper.
Adopt modular and standardized design as far as

possible to reduce on site casting of concrete to
reduce generation of construction wastes.
To promote resources management, the 3-R

principles 'Reduce, Re-use and Recycle' should be
adopted in the day-to-day operation of construction
sites and in site offices.
Sort and segregate reusable and recyclable

materials on-site from bulk wastes.
By taking measures to better manage resources the

following benefits can be achieved:
Over the long term, the cost of purchasing
resources can be reduced when waste
avoidance and recycling measures are adopted.
Generally, if existing materials are used more
efficiently, less money will be spent.
Efforts will increase environmental awareness
among staff and the workforce.
By minimizing the amount of resources used,
finite resources will be protected and pollution
levels will decrease.
12.2
Measures
Management
for
Resources
This section introduces practical measures that can

be taken in construction site and site office for
better management of resources. It is suggested
that contractors should set up performance targets
on resource management for a construction site at
the project planning stage. The use of different
resources in subsequent construction activities
should then be closely monitored and checked
against the established performance targets.
Reuse excavated materials as fill materials.

Reuse materials for hoarding, formwork, scaffolding
and trench supports.
Reduce the use of embedded infrastructure for
power, data and MVAC systems. The repair or
replacement of these embedded infrastructures
requires demolishing of the surface wall that
generate C&D wastes and also require subsequent
refurbishment of the structure.
Selective demolition should be adopted whenever
practicable to maximize the collection of recyclable
materials.
Regular maintenance of plant and equipment to
prolong their lifespan as well as maintaining their
working efficiency.
12.2.2 Energy
Use compact fluorescent lights and lamps instead
of incandescent light bulbs for indoor lighting.
Use non-tungsten floodlight instead of traditional
tungsten floodlight for outdoor lighting (e.g.
craneage, security).
Where appropriate, incentive schemes for front line

site staffs on resources saving should be
considered to enhance their involvement in the
exercise.
Turn off a portion of your office lights during lunch

breaks, during overtime work and after normal
office hours.
12.2.1 Construction Materials and Equipment

Avoid over-ordering of materials.
Prolonged
stockpiling of materials may lead to deterioration
and wastage.
Ensure lights and air conditioning in conference

rooms/meeting rooms are turned off after use. This
can be achieved by posting signs near the room
exits.
Allocate designated and preferably sheltered

locations for stockpiling of materials.
Proper
labelling should be affixed on materials.
Encourage the use of natural

ventilation where at all possible.
12-1
lighting
and

When purchasing new appliances check with

suppliers to determine the energy efficiency of the
products and choose those products (with energy
labels) that will save the most energy possible.
Place boxes and trays beside photocopiers as

containers to collect used papers for recycling use.
Develop electronic document management system
for distribution of document in electronic manner.
Require the last person to leave his/her office to

ensure that all office equipment, lights and airconditioners are switched off.
Reference could be made to the Waste Paper

Recycling Programme described in Tips to Save
the Earth for details on implementation of waste
paper recycling programme in the site office.
Plants and equipments that may be in intermittent

use shall be shut down between works periods or
throttled down to a minimum to minimize fuel
consumption as well as air pollution.
The Environment Bureau has also published the
Guidelines on Industry Best Practices for External
Lighting Installations to minimize the impact of
external lightning on the environment.
12.2.3 Water
Use rainwater harvesting systems to capture
freshwater for site use. More detail can be found in
Section 7.4.4 of this Guide.
Install flow restrictors and automatic shut-off
systems and other water flow devices to faucets.
This will ensure that water use is reduced at all
times.
Encourage staff to always completely turn off all
faucets and report any possible leaks. Post
reminder signs to tell people to turn off faucets and
indicate the number to call to report leaky faucets.
Establish a monitoring and repair programme to
ensure that pipes are in good working order and
that leaks and other problems are repaired as soon
as they are detected.
Reuse treated wastewater whenever practicable
(e.g. for dust suppression).
12.2.4 Paper
Use double-sided photocopying and printing.
Encourage the use of E-mail for both internal and
external communication, or if this is not possible
circulate material rather than making copies for
individuals.
Avoid photocopying
required.
faxed
documents
unless
12-2

Chapter 13 Environmental Impact Assessment Mechanism
Table of Contents
13
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT MECHANISM....................................................... 13-1

13.1
13.2
Environmental Impact Assessment Process ................................................................... 13-1

Implication to Contractor ................................................................................................ 13-2
List of Figures
Figure 13.1
The Statutory EIA Process ............................................................................................. 13-1

13 Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance

13.1
Environmental Impact Assessment

Process
Environmental impact assessments (EIAs) are

intended to identify the potential impacts of a
project in the early planning stages, as well as any
alternatives or mitigation measures. The EIA
Ordinance enacted in 1997 makes EIAs statutory
for designated projects in both the private and
public sectors.
Before an environmental permit for a Schedule 2
designated project can be obtained, a person
planning the designated project is required to:
apply for an EIA study brief, proceed with the
EIA study, and then seek approval of the EIA
report under the Ordinance; or
seek a permission to apply directly for an
environmental permit.
A Schedule 3 designated project requires an EIA
report to be approved under the Ordinance.
Once approved, the EIA report will be placed on the
Register established under the Ordinance.
The statutory environmental impact assessment
process is shown in Figure 13.1.
Figure 13.1 The Statutory EIA Process
13.1.1 Purpose and Principles of EIA Process

The purpose of the EIA process is to protect the
environment through prevention.
The basic
principles of the process are:
Proactive Planning and Decision Tool.
Avoidance, Pre-emption and Prevention of
Adverse Environmental Consequences.
Making Positive Influence on Decision Making
at the Earliest Possible Opportunity and
Thinking Proactively about Options and
Alternatives.
Living Process throughout the Project Cycle.
Making EIA Recommendations Enforceable.
Flexibility amidst Robustness and Transparency,
with Public Participation and with the Ability to
Adapt to Changes.
Seeking Practical Environmental Outcomes for
the Environment and Community.
Avoidance of any Late Focus.
Efficiency amidst Effectiveness.
Transparent Agreement among Relevant
Parties, Clear Expectations of what need to be
done and what the Performance will be, and
Explicit Resolution of any Conflicts.
13.1.2 Designated Projects under the EIA
Ordinance
Designated projects are projects or proposals that
may have an adverse impact on the environment.
They are projects covered by Schedules 2 and 3 in
the EIA Ordinance.
Schedule 2 consists of two parts: Part I for projects
that require environmental permits to construct and
operate of the following categories of works:
A Roads, Railways and Depots
B Airports and Port Facilities
C Reclamation, Hydraulic and Marine Facilities,
Dredging and Dumping
D Energy Supply
E Water Extraction and Water Supply
F Sewage Collection, Treatment, Disposal and
Reuse
G Waste Storage, Transfer and Disposal Facilities
H Utility Pipelines, Transmission Pipelines and
Substations
I Waterways and Drainage Works
J Mineral Extraction
K Industrial Activities
L Storage, Transfer and Trans-Shipment of Fuels
M Agriculture and Fisheries Activities
13-1

N
O
P
Q
Community Facilities
Tourist and Recreational Developments
Residential and Other Developments
Miscellaneous
Part II is for projects that require environmental

permits to decommission.
Schedule
3
designated
projects
require
Environmental Impact Assessment Report to
construct and operate of the following works:
1.
Engineering feasibility study of urban

development projects with a study area
covering more than 20 ha or involving a total
population of more than 100,000.
2.
Engineering feasibility study of redevelopment

projects with a study area covering more than
100,000 existing or new population.
13.1.3 Environmental Monitoring and Audit

Requirements
After obtaining the Environmental Permit, the
execution of the designated project can be
commenced and the Environmental Monitoring and
Audit (EM&A) process will be triggered. An EM&A
Manual will be developed which outlines the
monitoring and audit programme for the designated
project. It aims to provide systematic procedures
for
monitoring,
auditing
and
minimising
environmental impacts associated with Project
activities. The purpose of the EM&A process is to:
ensure the execution of the designated project
comply with the EIA study recommendations
and the Environmental Permit conditions;
assess the effectiveness of the recommended
mitigation measures; and
identify any further need for additional
mitigation measures or remedial action.
13.1.4 Role & Responsibility of Contractors in
EM&A Process
The EM&A process involve the Contractor,
Engineer,
Environmental
Team
(ET)
and
Independent Environmental Checker (IEC). The
Contractor is the party responsible for the execution
of the designated project.
Its duties and
responsibilities with respect to EM&A include:
providing assistance to ET in carrying out
monitoring;
submit proposals on mitigation measures in
case of exceedance of Action and Limit Levels
in accordance with the Event and Action Plans;
13-2
implement measures to reduce impact where

Action and Limit Levels are exceeded;
implement the corrective actions instructed by
the Engineer;
participate in joint site inspection undertaken by
the ET; and
adhere to the procedures for carrying out
complaint investigation.
13.1.5 Responsibility
of
Contractors
in
Environmental Complaint Investigation
When an environmental complaint is received, it
should be referred to ET for coordination. The
validity of the complaint should be investigated by
ET in consultation with IEC. If the complaint is
justified to be due to the execution of the
construction work, the Contractor is responsible to
propose and implement mitigation measures to
alleviate the situation. The performance of the
mitigation measures will be reviewed by ET and
additional mitigation measures may be required by
ET if necessary.
13.2
Implication to Contractor
13.2.1 Environmental Permit (EP) and Further

Environmental Permit (FEP)
Under the EIA Ordinance, a Project Proponent such
as a private developer or a works department of the
Government, who wants to construct a Designated
Project, needs to apply for and obtain an EP before
the construction work can commence.
The Project Proponent, i.e. the EP holder, will
instruct his contractor to conduct all necessary
actions to fulfil the permit conditions during the
construction work.
There are two common
approaches:
Option 1
The Project Proponent holds the EP by himself.
The Project Proponent is still fully responsible for
legal liability. The Project Proponent needs to
monitor the Contractors performance to ensure
compliance with the EP conditions.
In case of breaches of the EP condition, both the
Project Proponent and contractor might be subject
to prosecution under the relevant ordinances. For
example, the Project Proponent did not carry out
the environmental monitoring works as specified in
the permit; the Project Proponent/contractor might
be prosecuted by EPD under EIAO. Whilst the
discharged wastewater could not comply with the

relevant discharge requirements, EPD might make

a prosecution under the WPCO.
Option 2
The project proponent requires the Contractor to
apply for a FEP for the whole or part of the project.
The Contractor, i.e. the FEP holder, will become
legally responsible to fulfil the FEP conditions.
The Project Proponent can then surrender the
whole or part of the EP after ceasing to be
responsible, by submitting an application to the
EPD.
13.2.2 Content of Environmental Permit
In general, the EP will include 3 parts, namely:
Part A (Main Permit);
Part B (Description(s) of Designated Project),
and
Part C (Permit Conditions)
Part A (Main Permit)
Part A contains the EP application number and
document in the register which includes the
reference number of the letter of approval of the
EIA Report or the reference number of the letter of
permission to apply directly for an EP.
The permit would state that the EP for the particular
project is issued to name of permit holder with the
designated project name. If the conditions of the EP
have been changed from previous one(s), the
approved EP would indicate it is an amended
permit.
Note that the Environmental Permit refers to EIA
report approved and permission to apply directly for
permit granted under the Ordinance.
Part B (Descriptions of Designated Project)
The descriptions of the designated project may
include the title, nature, location, physical scale and
scope of the project.
Part C (Permit Conditions)
In general, Part C of the EP shall include the
following sections:
General Conditions:
This section will generally list the legal
requirements for the permit holder. The Permit
Holder shall display a copy of the EP on the
construction site(s) at all vehicular site
entrances/exits or at a convenient location for
public information at all times, and all
13-3
documents listed in Part A of the EP shall be

readily available in all sites/offices covered by
the EP.
The Permit Holder shall also ensure that the
project is designed and implemented in
accordance
with
the
information
and
recommendations described in the EIA report
and relevant environmental legislation.
The Permit Holder shall notify the EPD in
writing of the commencement date no later than
one month before the commencement of the
Project.
Special Conditions/Measures and Submissions
for Commencement of the Project:
There may be some specified conditions, as
special conditions, listed in the EP that the
holder needs to follow. Different designated
projects may have different special conditions.
Particular matters, which are related to
construction work, are listed as follows:
- Design, alignment, plan, layout or visual
appearance of a designated project
- Limits on the strength, severity or level of
the environmental impact of a designated
project
- Pollution control, environmental protection
or other mitigation measures to be carried
out outside the site of a designated project
- Compensation or restoration measures for
the conservation, preservation or protection
of flora, fauna, ecological habitat or other
ecological resources, including replanting,
relocation, re-establishment or rehabilitation
measures, to mitigate an adverse
environmental impact of a designated
project
- The mitigation of the environmental impact
of a designated project, and the timing,
phasing or order of mitigation measures
13.2.3 Application for a Further Environmental

Permit (FEP)
Prescribed Form 6
should be completed for
application for the FEP.
Normally, application of a FEP will take 30 days
from receipt of the application. The FEP should be
obtained before he/she assumes the responsibility.
The applicant should pay the prescribed fee. The
prescribed application fee can be found in EPDs
webpage.

In submitting the application, the details of the part

of designated project including location, scope and
the reference in EIA Report to be covered by FEP
should be described.
Approval of the FEP application is subjected

to:
There has been no material change to the

designated project since the previous
environmental permit was issued; and
The information and findings of the EIA

report, if any, are still relevant and
adequate.
13.2.4 Application for Variation of an EP or

FEP
When the need for variation of conditions of an
environmental permit arises, the permit holder
could apply for a variation of an EP or FEP using
the prescribed Form 5.
The permit holder should pay the prescribed fee.
The prescribed application fee can be found in
EPDs webpage.
The application will be
processed within 30 days.
In order to facilitate the application process,

it is advisable to take a proactive role and
start an early dialogue with EPD to identify
potential
environmental
issues
and
resolutions before submitting the formal
application.
adverse if any factor listed in Annex 3 of the

Technical Memorandum on Environmental Impact
Assessment Process applies and the criteria in
Annexes 4 to 10 of the Technical Memorandum on
Environmental Impact Assessment Process
may be violated. As a general rule, changes under
the following circumstances are regarded as
material changes to a designated project:
a change to physical alignment, layout or
design of the project causing an environmental
impact likely to affect existing or planned
community, ecologically important areas or
sites of cultural heritage;
a physical change resulting in an increase in
the extent of reclamation or dredging affecting
water flow or quality likely to affect ecologically
important areas, or disrupting sites of cultural
heritage;
an increase in pollution emissions or discharges
or waste generation likely to violate guidelines
or criteria in this technical memorandum without
mitigation measures in place;
an increase in throughput or scale of the project
leading to physical additions or alterations that
are likely to violate the guidelines or criteria in
this technical memorandum without mitigation
measures in place; or
a change resulting in physical works that are
likely to affect a rare, endangered or protected
species, or an important ecological habitat, or a
site of cultural heritage.
A variation of the environmental permit would be

issued without the need for an environmental
impact assessment report if the Director of
Environmental Protection is satisfied that there is
no material change to the environmental impact of
the designated project with mitigation measures in
place and the designated project complies with the
requirements in the Technical Memorandum on
Environmental Impact Assessment Process. If an
environmental impact assessment report is required,
the procedures described in sections 5, 6, 7 and 8
of the EIA Ordinance should be followed.
The definition of material change in the Ordinance
shall be used for a material change to a designated
project. The material change shall refer to
significant changes only. As a matter of principle,
an environmental impact is considered to be
13-4

Chapter 14 Implementation of Environmental Management System
Table of Contents
14
IMPLEMENTATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM..................................... 14-1

14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
Environmental Management System .............................................................................. 14-1

Environmental Policy ..................................................................................................... 14-1
Tasks at Planning Stage ................................................................................................ 14-2
Tasks at Implementation Stage ...................................................................................... 14-4
Tasks at Checking Stage ............................................................................................... 14-6
Management Review ..................................................................................................... 14-6
ISO 14001 EMS Review ................................................................................................ 14-6
List of Tables
Table 14.1
Examples of Environmental Aspect and Associated Impacts .......................................... 14-3
Table 14.2
Examples of Objectives and Targets .............................................................................. 14-4
Table 14.3
Environmental Responsibilities....................................................................................... 14-4
List of Figures
Figure 14.1
Key Elements of EMS .................................................................................................... 14-1
Figure 14.2
Relationship amongst Environmental Aspect, Impact and Objective and Target ............. 14-2

14 Implementation of Environmental Management

System
14.1
ISO 14001 is the international specification for an

EMS. It was first published in 1996 and technically
revised in 2004 and specifies the actual
requirements for an EMS. The overall idea is to
establish an organized approach to systematically
reduce the impact of the environmental aspects
which an organization can control.
Environmental Management System
An Environmental Management System (EMS) is a

continual business cycle of planning; implementing,
reviewing and improving the processes and actions
that the company undertakes to meet its
environmental obligations and continually improve
its environmental performance. The ISO 14001
EMS model is illustrated in Figure 14.1.
Figure 14.1 Key Elements of EMS
Management
Review
Environmental
Policy
Checking /
Corrective Action
Continual
Improvement
- Monitoring and Measurement

- Non-conformance & Corrective
& Preventive Action
- EMS Audit
Planning
- Environmental Aspects
- Legal & Other Requirement
- Objectives & Targets
- Environmental Management
Program
Implementation
- Structure and Responsibility
- Training, Awareness Competence
- Communication
- EMS Documentation
- Document Control
- Operational Control
- Emergency Preparedness / Response
14.2
Environmental Policy
An environmental policy is top managements

declaration of its commitment to protecting the
environment and it provides a unifying vision of
environmental concern by the entire organization.
The policy establishes the principles of action for an
organization. It sets the level of environmental
responsibility and performance required of the
organization, against which all subsequent actions
will be measured.
14-1
The policy should be appropriate to the significant

environmental aspects of the organization, e.g.
generation of construction wastes, and should
guide the setting of objectives and targets.
The responsibility for setting environmental policy
rests with an organizations top management. The
organizations management is responsible for
implementing the policy and for providing input to
the formulation and modification of the policy. The
policy should be communicated to all persons
working for or on behalf of the organization. In

addition, the policy should be made available to the

public.
An environmental policy must include:
compliance with legal requirements and
voluntary commitments;
pollution prevention; and
continual improvement in environmental
performance, including areas not subject to
regulation.
Figure 14.2
Relationship between Environmental Aspect,
Impact and Objective and Target
Identify Aspect
Evaluate Significance
Periodic
Review
No
The policy statements usually address a

combination of the following:
Significant?
Meet all relevant regulatory and legislative

requirements.
Yes
Reduce waste and consumption of resources

(materials, fuel and energy), recover and
recycle, where feasible.
Manageable?
Keep Record
No
Yes
Minimize the production of pollutants to the

environment.
Adopt technologies and raw materials that
will minimize pollution, energy use and
waste.
Mitigation and/or
Operating Control
Design products in such a way to minimize

their environmental effects in production,
use and disposal.
Minimize the adverse environmental effects
of new developments through strategic
planning.
Provide
training.
environmental
education
Work
towards
the
achievement
sustainable development.
14.3
Set Objectives and

Targets
Measure / Monitor
Follow-up
Complies?
and
Yes
No
of
Take corrective
action
Raise nonconformance
Planning Stage
Tasks at EMS planning stage include the following

items:
Identification of environmental aspects and their
associated impacts
Identification of legal and other requirements
Development of objectives and targets
Development of an environmental management
programme
The relationship between the above items is shown
graphically in Figure 14.2.
14.3.1 Identification of Environmental Aspects

Environmental aspects are elements of an
organizations activities, products and services that
can interact with the environment. An organization
should identify environmental aspects within the
scope of its EMS that are associated with its past,
ongoing and planned activities, products and
services. In all cases, the organization should
consider normal and abnormal operating conditions
including start-up and shut-down maintenance and
emergency situations and accidents.
In identifying environmental aspects, the following
should be considered:
Operations and activities that interface with the
environment in a way that could result (or has
resulted) in environmental impacts;
14-2

Materials, energy sources and other resources

to be used in the work;
Emissions to the air, water or land;
Wastes generated and their handling or
disposal processes;
Characteristics or attributes of the products or
services that could result in impact to the
environment (e.g. through their intended use or
end-of-life management);
Interaction of the land or infrastructure (e.g.,
buildings) with the environment; and
Activities (for example, chemical storage) that
might lead to accidental releases.
Environmental Aspects should be identified
considering normal and abnormal
conditions.
Normal condition means routine daily
operation with everything functioning
properly.
Abnormal condition means operation out of
scheduled program or under abnormal
working environment. Abnormal conditions
may include operating out of normal working
hours or under inclement weather
conditions.
14.3.2 Identification of Environmental Impacts

Environmental impacts are changes to the
environment, either adverse or beneficial, that
result wholly or partially from environmental aspects.
Upon identification of the relevant aspects, an
organization must be able to correlate the aspect to
the respective impacts whereby the significance of
the impact is determined for prioritizing the
resources to be mobilized.
In evaluating environmental impacts, the following
should be considered:
Are the impacts effect in normal or abnormal
condition?
Are the impacts beneficial or damaging to the
environment?
What is the magnitude or degree of these
impacts?
What is the frequency or likelihood of these
impacts?
What is the duration and geographic area of
these impacts?
Which parts of the environment might be
affected (e.g., air, water, land, flora, fauna)?
Is the impact regulated in some manner?
Have the interested parties expressed concerns
about these impacts?
14-3
Examples of environmental aspect and associated

impacts are shown in Table 14.1.
Table 14.1 Examples of Environmental Aspect
and Associated Impacts
Environmental Aspects
Environmental Impacts
Activity: Bored piling

Emission of exhaust from
construction plants
Pollution of air
Respiratory impacts on
local residents
Odour nuisance
Discharge of soil to water

bodies from foundation
works
Pollution of water body
Consumption
water
Use of natural resources
of
fresh
Use
of
powered
mechanical equipment
Construction
impacts
on
residents
Generation
construction wastes
Impacts on land use and

use of natural resources
of
noise
local
14.3.3 Identification of Legal and Other

Requirements
As stated in environmental policy, compliance with
legal and other requirements is a commitment of
top management.
Chapter 2 of this Guide
summarises the legal and other requirements
relevant to construction industry.
14.3.4 Development of Objectives and Targets
An environmental objective shall mean the overall
environmental goal, arising from the environmental
policy, that an organization sets itself to achieve,
and which is quantified where practicable.
Environmental target is the detailed quantifiable
performance requirement that arises from the
environmental objectives and that needs to be met
in order to achieve that objective. Examples of
objectives and targets are shown in Table 14.2.

Table 14.2 Examples of Objectives and

Targets
Objectives
Targets
Reduce energy usage
Reduce electricity use by

10% in 2008.
Reduce diesel use by
10% in 2008.
Improve employee
awareness of
environmental issues
Hold monthly awareness

training courses at all
sites.
Train 95% of employees
by end of 2008.
Objectives and Targets should be meaningful

and achievable and can bring real
satisfaction to staff once achieved, rather
than being over-ambitious which may lead to
failure and discouragement. The following
steps may be taken in development of
objectives and targets:
1. Gather data on the environmental
aspects which are planned to be
controlled.
2. Analyse the assembled data to determine
the current baseline.
14.4
Implementation Stage
Tasks at implementation stage include the following

elements:
Structure and Responsibility
Training
Communication
EMS Documentation and Control
Operation Control
Emergency Preparedness and Response
14.4.1 Structure and Responsibility
Responsibility should be clearly defined and
delegated to different levels of staff for effective
implementation of EMS. Employees at all levels
should be accountable, within the scope of their
responsibilities, for environmental performance in
support of the overall environmental management
system.
One
possible
approach
for
developing
environmental responsibilities is indicated in Table
14.2. It should be recognised that as construction
companies have different organisational structures,
individual contractor would need to understand and
define environmental responsibilities based upon
their own work processes.
Table 14.3 Environmental Responsibilities
3. Against the current baseline, set the

targets which the organization aims to
achieve over time.
4. Evaluate the financial, technological and
other capabilities that are required to
achieve the objectives and targets.
14.3.5 Development
of
Environmental
Management Programme
Environmental management programme is an
action plan that it translates the organizations goals
and policy commitments into concrete actions so
that environmental objectives and targets are
achieved. An individual programme should be
developed for each target.
The programme should include the following
elements:
Why That is the specific target to be achieved
in the programme
What A list of detailed actions to be done in
order to achieve the target
Who the responsible person for each specific
action
When the time frame and schedule for
completing each specific action
14-4
Sample Environmental
Responsibilities
Typical Person(s)
Responsible
Establish overall direction
Chairman, Managing
Director, Board of
Directors
Develop environmental
policy
Chairman, Managing
Director, Environmental
Director/Manager
Develop environmental
objectives, targets and
programmes
Managers of a project or
department
Monitor overall EMS

performance
Environmental
Director/Manager
Assure regulatory
compliance
Senior Project Manager,

Project Manager
Ensure continual
improvement
All Managers
Develop and maintain

accounting procedures
Quantity Surveyor,
Finance/Accounting
Managers
Comply with defined

procedures
All Staff

14.4.2 Training
An analysis of training needs should be undertaken
to determine the appropriate training for each grade
of staff. The training provided to staff should be
relevant to the achievement of environmental
policies; objectives and targets; and management
programme. Employees should be trained to have
knowledge on proper procedures to perform their
tasks
and
understand
the
environmental
consequence if such procedures are deviated.
Manual and the

Management Plan.
More information about training can be found in

Chapter 15 of this Guide.
Other EMS records cover:

Legislative and regulatory requirements
Licences and Permits
Environmental aspects (such as construction
noise, wastewater treatment, chemical waste,
etc.) and impacts and their associated
mitigation measures (such as construction of
noise barrier, wastewater recycling plant, drip
tray for chemical waste, etc.)
Environmental training activity for management,
operation staff, contractors, etc.
Inspection, calibration and maintenance activity
Monitoring data (see Section 14.5.1)
Details
of
non-conformance:
incidents,
complaints and follow-up action
Environmental audits and management reviews
14.4.3 Communication
Communication channels should be established to:
Demonstrate management commitment to
implement environmental protection on site.
Deal with concerns and questions about the
environmental aspects of the organisation
activities, products or services.
Raise the environmental awareness of the staff
on the organisations environmental policies,
objectives, targets and programmes.
Inform internal or external interested parties
about
the
organisations
environmental
management system and performance as
appropriate.
This could be done by:
Displaying the companys environmental policy,
objectives, targets and programme to the public;
Displaying contact details of nominated
correspondents (include name of person,
address, telephone number and fax number);
Regular internal environmental meeting to
review environmental performance;
Meeting
with
interested
parties
and
stakeholders to seek their environmental
concerns; and
Distribution of companys environmental report
addressing the work done with respect to
environmental protection.
14.4.4 EMS Documentation and Control
Operational processes and procedures should be
defined and appropriately documented and updated
as necessary. The organisation should clearly
define the various types of documents to establish
and specify effective operational procedures and
control.
site
specific
Environmental
The existence of the EMS manual supports

employees awareness of what is required to
achieve organisations environmental objectives
and enables the evaluation of the system and
environmental performance. The environmental
manager or project manager could discuss the
manual through training at site offices.
Effective management of these records is essential

towards successful implementation of the EMS. All
documentation should be dated (with dates of
revision), readily identifiable, organised, and
retained for a specified period.
14.4.5 Operational Control
Implementation is accomplished through the
establishment, running and maintenance of
operational procedures and controls to ensure that
the companys environmental policy, objectives and
targets can be met. Including communicating
applicable procedures and requirements to
suppliers and contractors.
14.4.6 Emergency
Preparedness
and
Response
The Contractor should carry out the following tasks:
Identify the possibilities for accidents and
emergency situations.
Develop
emergency
preparedness
and
response procedures.
Evaluate, revise and test the procedures.
For construction sites, the EMS documentation

should, as a minimum include the Companys EMS
14-5

During identification of emergency situation, the

nature, location, duration and scale of works should
be considered. Both normal and abnormal
operating conditions should be taken into account.
Emergency response procedure for each of the
identified
emergency
situation
should
be
established. Emergency Team for execution of the
procedure should be setup.
Regular training and drill should be exercised to
enhance the awareness.
More information about the planning for emergency
situation can be found in Chapter 3 of this Guide.
14.5
Checking Stage
Tasks at EMS Checking stage include the following

items:
Monitoring and Measurement
Non-conformance, Corrective and Preventive
Action
EMS Audit
14.5.1 Monitoring and Measurement
A construction company should measure, monitor
and evaluate its environmental performance, to
ensure that the organisation is performing in
accordance with the stated environmental
management programme.
This should be mainly based on the licence(s) and
permit(s) issued from EPD, which requires
environmental monitoring. They may include the
WPCO Effluent Discharge Licence, Environmental
Permit requirements (stating the required
monitoring works such as construction dust, noise
and water sampling and measurements). Results,
if necessary, should be submitted to EPD for their
record.
The EPD or general public would appreciate the
main contractor undertaking additional/further
monitoring works in order to satisfy their own
environmental policy, objectives and targets.
14.5.2 Non-conformance,
Corrective
and
Preventive Action
The findings, conclusions, and recommendations
reached as a result of measuring, monitoring,
audits and other reviews of the EMS should be
documented, and necessary corrective and
preventive actions identified. Management should
ensure that these corrective and preventive actions
14-6
are implemented, with systematic follow-up to

ensure their effectiveness.
14.5.3 EMS Audit
Internal EMS audits should be conducted at
planned intervals to determine and provide
information to management on whether the system
conforms to planned arrangements and has been
properly implemented and maintained. They can
also be performed to identify opportunities for
improvement in an organizations environmental
management system.
Typical audit should include the following
procedures:
Opening meeting
Document review
Detail site inspection
Staff interview
Close meeting
Audit report preparation
14.6
Management Review
A review of the EMS should be conducted at

appropriate intervals (normally of every 12 months)
to ensure its continuous suitability and
effectiveness.
Company
officers
and
top
management should be involved in the review
process, to ensure all environmental issues are
identified and where applicable improved.
While the site documents such as EMP should be
reviewed quarterly to cope with the different stages
of construction works, the review of the EMS should
include:
Review of environmental objectives, targets and
environmental performance
Evaluation of the suitability of the environmental
policy and the need for changes in the light of
- Changing legislation
- Changing expectations and requirements of
interested parties such as the client
- Advances in science and technology
- Lessons learned from environmental
incidents
- Market preferences
- Reporting and communication
14.7
ISO 14001 EMS Resource
The Environmental Protection Department (EPD)

has provided a free support package on
Environmental Management Information and ISO
14001 EMS tailored made for SMEs in the
construction sector. It aims to help SMEs in the
construction
sector
understand
the
local
environment pressure from different stakeholders

and stay competitive in the environmentally

conscious market. The package includes up-dated
environment management information related to
supply chain pressure in the construction sector, a
set of user-friendly generic ISO 14001 EMS
templates and a user manual with sector specific
practical examples to facilitate their adoption and
implementation of the ISO 14001 EMS. The
package is freely accessible via EPDs website.
14-7

Chapter 15 Training Resources and Materials
Table of Contents
15
TRAINING RESOURCES AND MATERIALS ............................................................................. 15-1

15.1
15.2
15.3
Internal Environmental Training...................................................................................... 15-1

External Environmental Training .................................................................................... 15-1
Environmental Training Resources ................................................................................. 15-2

15 Training Resources and Materials

Environmental training is an effective way to
enhance staff and workers awareness with respect
to environmental protection on construction sites.
This chapter introduces different types of
environmental training and provides resources on
training materials.
15.1
Internal Environmental Training
Internal Environmental Training mainly includes:

Site-specific Induction Environmental Training
Environmental Toolbox Talks
15.1.1 Site-specific Induction Environmental
Training
Site-specific Induction Environmental Training
should be conducted to all site staff and workers. It
should be arranged by site Environmental Officer
and delivered by Environmental Officer or
Environmental Supervisor. The training should be
provided within the first week of the staff or worker
first report duty of the site and then every half-year.
The content of the training should include:
Environmental Policy
Environmental Legislations
Legal requirements
Organization structure on environmental
management
Environmental duties and responsibilities
Environmental nuisance abatement measures
Environmental objectives and targets
In-house rules and regulations
15.1.2 Environmental Toolbox Talks
Environmental Toolbox Talks are mainly attended
by site workers. The purpose is to provide practical
and appropriate measures to be implemented on
construction
sites in order
to minimize
environmental nuisance and impact during their
execution of construction activities.
They should be arranged by the site Environmental
Officer and delivered by Environmental Officer or
Environmental Supervisor weekly throughout the
construction period.
The following matters should be considered during
the selection of appropriate training topics:
Trade of workers
Recent construction activities
Recent environmental inspection findings
15-1
Advice / comment from authorities, client and

Architect/Engineer
Environmental toolbox talk materials relevant to

different construction activities have been prepared
by Hong Kong Construction Association (HKCA).
The Environmental Toolbox Training Kit published
in January 2008 should be referred to during the
arrangement of the training. This Training Kit can
be purchased from HKCA. Please refer to HKCAs
webpage for detail.
15.2
External Environmental Training
Various environmental training courses are

available
in
different
institutes,
including
Construction Industry Council Training Academy
(CICTA), Hong Kong Productivity Council (HKPC),
Institute of Vocational Education (IVE) and School
of
Professional
Education
and
Executive
Development (SPEED) of The Hong Kong
Polytechnic University, and are suitable for different
levels of staff. The following lists out some relevant
courses.
15.2.1 Environmental Management Course for
Construction Managers
Suitable for site management staff including project
manager, construction manager and site agent.
Course focuses on:
contractual requirement on environmental
management;
implementation of environmental management
system; and
nuisance abatement measures on air, noise,
water quality and waste management.
15.2.3 Environmental Protection Course for
Environmental Supervisors
Suitable
for
Environmental
Supervisor
in
accordance with ETWB TCW 19/2005.
Course mainly focuses on management of air
quality, noise, water quality and waste management
and waste reduction techniques.
15.2.4 Environmental Officer Course
Suitable for Environmental Officer in accordance
with ETWB TCW 19/2005.
Course focuses on legislation and relevant
requirements for management
of
various

environmental parameters and preparation and

implementation of Environmental Management Plan.
15.2.5 Supervision of Tree Works Course
Suitable for any person who want to fulfil the
requirement of the Technical Circular No. 3/2006
Tree Preservation as a competent member to
oversee and supervise tree works related to
horticultural operations and preservation of trees.
15.3.4 Water
Pollution
Control
Training
Materials
Train-the trainer Package for Water and Waste
Green Construction Video on Water Pollution

Control
EPD Guidelines and References on Water

Pollution Control
Course focus on tree preservation and felling; tree

protection; tree surgery; tree planting; tree work
safety procedures; and tree maintenance.
15.3
Environmental Training Resources
Environmental training materials are available at

the following EPDs webpage.
15.3.1 General Training Material
Green
Construction
Pocket
15.3.5 Waste Management Training Materials

Train-the Trainer Package for Construction and
Demolition Waste
Green Construction Video on Low Waste

Construction
EPD Guidelines and References on Waste

Pollution Control
Handbook
Guidance Notes for Green Construction (Part I)
Guidance Notes for Green Construction (Part II)
15.3.2 Air Pollution Control Training Materials

Train-the-Trainer Package for Air Pollution
EPD Guidelines
Pollution Control
Green
Construction
Management
and
References
Video
on
on
Air
Dust
15.3.3 Noise Control Training Materials

Train-the trainer Package for Construction
Noise
Green Construction Video on Noise Control
EPD Guidelines and References on Noise

Control
15-2

Chapter 16 Innovative Environmental Control
Table of Contents
16
INNOVATIVE ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL ............................................................................ 16-1

16.1
16.2
16.3
Innovation on Dust Control ............................................................................................. 16-1

Innovation on Green Site Office ..................................................................................... 16-2
Innovation on Recycle, Reuse and Reduce .................................................................... 16-3

16
Innovative Environmental Control
Hong Kong Construction Innovative Environmental

Award programme was launched in year 2007.
This Section extracts some of the innovative
technologies developed by the participants to tackle
site environmental pollution problems.
16.1
Innovation on Dust Control
This Section introduces the dust control innovations

developed by the participants.
16.1.1 Dust Control for Soil Nail Drilling Work
During drilling operation for installation of soil nail,
construction dust emission would be generated
especially during drilling against the rock and
concrete. The use of Mist Shield can effectively
suppress the dust migration while the consumption
of water is limit.
Water Spraying Funnel for backhoe
The Mist Shield is constructed with 20mm

diameter water pipe formed in closed loop with
water inlet port and bores (~2mm diameter) outlet at
the inner edges. It is lightweight and portable.
Installation of it is easy to handle and could be
completed in a very short time. All these features
facilitate reuse of it in several soil nail installation
projects.
Water Spraying Funnel Mounted on Backhoe
Dust Shield for Soil Nail Rig
16.1.2 Dust Control for Operation of Backhoe

During the use of backhoe for concrete breaking
work, construction dust emission will be generated.
16.1.3 Dust Suppressor for Breaking Work

The aim on the dust suppressor is to remove dust
generated during the breaking process. It is
achieved by using an air blower to force the dusty
air to come into contact with the water. The baffles
in the water will be working as a turbine to create
turbulence. By the turbulence force, the dust in the
air will mix with water and subsequently settle down
to the bottom.
The innovation of water spraying funnel fabricated

by a traffic cone and a manual water pump is
developed. The funnel is mounted on the backhoe
and water is delivered to the breaker bit using hand
water pump to reduce dust emission during
breaking work.
16-1

Principles
Air from electric blower
Air is forced into the
water filled container
Reused plastic
bottles
Reused plastic from
the safety helmet
Dust collected in the

water
Mobile Sprinkler
Schematic Design of Dust Suppressor
16.1.5 Electrostatic Dust Filter Box

The filter box consists of multiple layers of
corrugated aluminum mesh which is used for dust
filtration. The electrostatic charge is enhanced by
the friction of airflow generated by air blower over
the media surface. When the dusty air is drawn to
the filter box by the air blower, the dust is trapped
by the corrugated aluminium mesh and the clean air
expelled.
The advantage is that the corrugated aluminum
mesh is easily washable by water jet that enhances
the lifespan of the system.
Dust Suppressor
16.1.4 Mobile Sprinkler

Mobile sprinkler is designed to improve the mobility
of sprinkler system.
Four wheels are installed at the base of the unit for
easy mobilization on uneven grounds around the
site. The unit is light weight and can be manipulated
on site by one person. It is suitable for use in open
spaces or near public areas. This temporary
arrangement is particularly made for places where
fixed water spraying is not possible.
Electrostatic Dust Filter Box
16.2
Innovation on Green Site Office
This Section introduces the green site office

innovations developed by the participants.
16.2.1 Green Cladding
The green cladding was an innovative design with
high flexibility, reliability and good appearance. It is
a prefabricated product with lightweight feature that
just one person can handle it solely and easily.
16-2

Thus, it is replaceable and transferable easily and

reduces the difficulties during maintenance. The
claddings can be fixing horizontally and vertically.
For vertical application, it can be mounted in new
building surface or existing building surface. For
horizontal application, it can be placed on the top of
a site office or building as a green roof. This helps
to reduce indoor temperature and hence energy
consumption. Moreover, it can increase oxygen
content of the working space and provide more
greenery to mitigate visual impact.
Door Closer
Installing a door closer to keep the door closed at
all times reduces the unnecessary loading on the
air conditioner compressor and reduces the power
consumption.
Timer Control
Installing a timer to control the site office containers
main electrical power supply. As a result, the main
power will be switched on/off automatically on a
daily basis or as required.
Window Blind
Installing window blind so that direct sunlight cannot
enter the office container.
It can reduce
consumption of energy for air conditioning.
16.3
Innovation on Recycle, Reuse and

Reduce
16.3.1 Reuse Sample Rock Material

Reuse of sample rock material from rock socket
during pilling for planting purpose.
Green Cladding
16.3.2 Recycle, Reuse and Reduce of Fell tree

Green Cladding Mounted on Roof of Site Office
16.2.2 Energy Efficient Site Office

The energy efficiency of different site office design
is studied and the following design consideration is
proposed.
Recycle the trees felled in construction projects to

mulches and compost materials in order to
minimize landfill utilization.
Container Colour
Painting the container with a coat of white paint give
power consumption reduction in air-conditioning
demands.
Roof
Constructing a roof to shade the container from
direct sunlight and to create an insulation layer of
air in the roof void above the office container ceiling.
16-3
Felling
Cutting
and
Composting

Sorting
The composting bin with holes for aeration should

be placed in a partially sunny location outdoors at
ambient temperature to facilitate composting of
vegetation. During site clearance, generated
vegetation will be collected, centralized and
transferred to the composting bin which will be
watered daily and stirred weekly. Soil that contains
essential microorganism will be added to facilitate
composting.
Reusing for Wood fencing, Mulching and Planting

Composting Bin with Holes
Hay and Glass Mixed with

Essential Soil
Watered Daily
Stirred Daily
Final Compost Product
Return to the Nature
16.3.3 Organic Farming on Green Roof

In order to diminish poor impression from public
about construction site generated kinds of pollutions
from construction activities. A Joint Organic
Farming Program with public/educational school to
be organized to improve impression of construction
industry and raise concern of healthy organic food.
The final compost product (composting period is

approximately three month depends on the
materials and site condition), will be used to nurture
nearby vegetation on site.
Organic Farming in Construction Site
Organic farming in construction site not only

increases green area, but also reduces Heat Island
Effect and Carbon Emission.
16.3.4 Natural Composting
In addition to reduction of waste disposed of at

landfills and reuse of valuable resources, on-site
composting also help to control carbon emission of
works by reducing the scale of transportations.
Reducing waste is one of the essential topics in

waste management.
16.3.5 Reduce Chemical Waste Generation on

Sulphuric Acid Spillage
During site clearance, hay and grass clippings byproducts can be used to composting into valuable
fertilizer to minimizing waste to disposal to landfill.
Base on the use of sulphuric acid is more common

in use at construction works area. (e.g. Battery
Fluid, pH regulator and concentrated sulphuric acid).
16-4

A simple neutralization process can be applied to

minimize or zeroing chemical waste generation
during chemical spillage occurs.
Treatment on Spillage Acid on Site
An anhydrous cement powder can be used as the

neutralization agent and can be found in the
Material Safety Data Sheets which provided from
suppliers.
Neutralization Agent (kg) to be Used (at least)
Volume
of Acid
Batteries
Fluid
(32% of
Sulphuric Acid)
Batteries
Fluid
pH
Regulator
(44% of
(66% of
Sulphuric Acid) Sulphuric Acid)
Conc.
Sulphuric
Acid
1L
2L
3L
0.301
0.603
0.904
0.444
0.887
1.331
0.753
1.505
2.258
1.354
2.707
4.061
4L
5L
1.205
1.507
1.774
2.218
3.010
3.763
5.415
6.769
The sorbent with acid waste can be changed into

cement powder and reused as hard paving
materials.
16-5

Best Practice Guide For Environmental Protection On Construction Sites

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Best Practice Guide For Environmental Protection On Construction Sites

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Best Practice Guide For Environmental Protection On Construction Sites

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What guidelines are provided for managing environmental issues on construction sites?

What guidelines are provided for managing environmental issues on construction sites?

Best Practice Guide

for Environmental Protection

The Hong Kong Construction Association, Limited

Hong Kong Construction Association